5 - Tadiran Telecom - Compress

Eliezer Katzenstein
Israel
Coral
IPx 800
Installation Procedure
and Hardware Reference
Manual
(Document Edition 3.5)
Creating a new world of IPportunities

The information contained in this document is proprietary and is subject to all relevant
copyright, patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific
agreement protecting TADIRAN TELECOM LTD.'s (herein referred to as the “Manufacturer”)
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained herein
may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the
express, prior, written permission of the Manufacturer. In addition, any use of this document or
the information contained herein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is
strictly forbidden.
The Manufacturer reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in
equipment design or specifications.
Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no

responsibility is assumed by the Manufacturer for the use thereof nor for the rights of third
parties which may be effected in any way by the use thereof.
Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's

product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of future performance,
either express or implied. The Manufacturer's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales
contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by the Manufacturer in
relation thereto.
This document may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors; no warranty is granted nor
liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in the Manufacturer's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained herein is periodically updated and
changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please
notify the Manufacturer. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
© Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2005-20.

All rights reserved worldwide.
The Coral is Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404
All trademarks contained herein are the property of their respective holders.
Federal Communications Commission
Rules Part 68 Compliance Statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this
equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN's contact the
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack
which is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right
to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide
advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted
service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the supplier at (516)-632-7200 for repair
and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
The following repairs can be done by the customer: No repairs allowed.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. This is to avoid damaging the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment is capable of providing user's access to interstate providers of operator services through
the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be a violation
of the telephone operator consumer services improvement act of 1990 and part 68 of the FCC Rules.
i
Canadian DOT Compliance Statement
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement
that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.
ii
TUV Safety of Information Technology
Equipment Compliance
Equipment certified according to TUV has been tested and complies with the following:
UL 60950-1 :2007
CAN / CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1-07
TUV Rheinland of North America is a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in the
United States and is accredited by the Standards Council of Canada to test and certify products to
Canadian National Standards. Clients can demonstrate compliance for both U.S. and Canadian markets
through a single mark (TUV) on their product(s) which denotes compliance to U.S. and Canadian
National Standards.
CB SCHEME Compliance Statement

Equipment certified according to the CB SCHEME has been tested and complies with the following:
IEC 60950-1 :2005, 2nd Edition
CE Compliance Statement (R & TTE)
Equipment certified according to CE has been tested and complies with the following:
EN 60950-1 :2006, 2nd Edition + A11 :2009

EN 55022 CISPR 22
EN 55024 CISPR 24
Australia and New Zealand Compliance Statement
Equipment certified for Australia and New Zealand has been tested and complies with the following:
AS/NZS 4117
AS/NZS 60950.1
ACA TS002 TS003 TS004
AS/NZS CISPR22
iii
Federal Communications Commission
Part 15
The FCC Wants you to Know
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
a) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
b) Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
c) Connect the equipment on an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
d) Consult with the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
To ensure continued compliance with specified radio energy emissions limits of FCC Rules, the
following precautions must be observed while installing and operating the equipment:
1. Install the equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Verify that the power supply and associated A.C. powered equipment are connected to a
properly grounded electrical supply, and that power cords, if used, are unmodified.
3. Verify that the system grounding, including Master Ground, D.C. power system, and equip-
ment cabinets, is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and connected to an
approved earth ground source.
4. Always replace the factory-supplied cover or keep the cabinet doors closed when not ser-
vicing the equipment.
5. Make no modification to the equipment that would affect its compliance with the specified
limits of FCC Rules.
6. Maintain the equipment in a satisfactory state of repair.
7. Verify that emissions limiting devices, such as ferrite blocks and radio frequency interfer-
ence modules, are properly installed and functional.
8. If necessary the operator should consult their supplier, or an experienced radio/television
engineer for additional suggestions. The following booklet prepared by the Federal Com-
munications Commission (FCC) may be of assistance: “How to Identify and Resolve
Radio-TV Interference Problems.”
This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402,
Stock No. 004-000-00345-4.
iv
FCC Warning
Modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user authority to operate the
equipment under FCC rules.
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE)
Directive 2002/96/EC of the European Parliament
It is the responsibility of the Distributor to fully comply with Directive 2002/96/EC dated 27 January
2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council on Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) and with any applicable law and regulation promulgated in its respective Member State in
connection with such Directive. Accordingly, the Distributor is responsible for, and shall bear all costs
related to, the collection, treatment, recovery, reporting and environmentally sound disposal of all
electronic waste related to the products. For the purpose of this paragraph, the term “Distributor” shall
mean the person and/or entity engaged in the importation, distribution, sales, support or any other
activity carried out in the applicable jurisdiction in connection with products supplied by
Tadiran Telecom Ltd.
v
vi
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.1 Document Description .............................................................................................................. 1-1

Document Contents................................................................................................................ 1-1
Related Documentation .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document .................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 System Description................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4 Recommended Tools................................................................................................................ 1-9
Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation Procedure
2.1 Site Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

Installation Environment ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Space Requirements .............................................................................................................. 2-3
Electrical Requirements ......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Equipment Installation

Introduction............................................................................................................................. 2-9
Mounting and Installing the Cage........................................................................................... 2-10
Ground Wiring ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
Wiring DC Powered Systems ................................................................................................. 2-22
Wiring AC Powered Systems ................................................................................................. 2-25
Connecting the I/O Cables ..................................................................................................... 2-27
Setting the Configuration Jumpers ......................................................................................... 2-30
Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages.................................................................... 2-32
Installing the Power Supply Card ........................................................................................... 2-33
Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable ............................................................ 2-36
Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage...................................................................... 2-37
2.3 Program Interface Device Connection...................................................................................... 2-47
vi
Chapter 3 - Initial Powerup Tests
3.1 Power Supply Test.................................................................................................................... 3-1

General................................................................................................................................... 3-1
PS19 DC Powered System .................................................................................................... 3-2
PS19 DC-D Powered System ................................................................................................ 3-4
AC Powered System .............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.2 Common Control Test............................................................................................................... 3-9

Control Card Initialization ....................................................................................................... 3-9
Memory Lithium Battery Condition Test.................................................................................. 3-18
3.3 Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test ................................................................................ 3-19

Introduction............................................................................................................................. 3-19
System Initialization................................................................................................................ 3-23
PS 19 DC-D Backup Power Supply Check ............................................................................ 3-25
3.4 Installation Wrap-up.................................................................................................................. 3-27
Chapter 4 - Software Installation Procedure
4.1 Generic Feature Software ........................................................................................................ 4-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................. 4-1
Upgrading Using FMprog PC-Utility ....................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes ................................................................................................ 4-3

Numeric Status Display .......................................................................................................... 4-3
Chapter 5 - External Connections
5.1 Main Distribution Frame ........................................................................................................... 5-1

General................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 External Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5-5

Station Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5-5
Trunk Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 5-9
Auxiliary Connections............................................................................................................. 5-10
5.3 Protection Devices.................................................................................................................... 5-11

Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection Devices ................................................... 5-11
Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting........................................................................................ 5-14
5.4 Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits ............................................................................................. 5-17
vii
Physical Connection............................................................................................................... 5-17
Database Programming ......................................................................................................... 5-18
5.5 Terminal Data Communication Ports ........................................................................................ 5-21
5.6 I/O Connections Via Front Panel .............................................................................................. 5-25

General................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Connections on the Cage Rear Panel.................................................................................... 5-26
2DT Card (PRI-23, PRI-30, T1, 30T, or 30TM Configuration) ................................................ 5-27
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card .............................................................................................................. 5-29
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card............................................................................................................ 5-33
DPC Card (Discontinued)....................................................................................................... 5-37
UGW Card.............................................................................................................................. 5-38
IPG Card ................................................................................................................................ 5-41
5.7 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel .................................................................................... 5-43

Cards with Rear Panel I/O Connections................................................................................. 5-43
2DT Card (PRI-23, PRI-30, T1, 30T, or 30TM Configuration) ................................................ 5-45
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT “C” and later)................................................................... 5-48
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT “C” and later) ................................................................ 5-49
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E ....................................................................................... 5-50
PUGW Card ........................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.8 I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors.................................................................................. 5-57

General................................................................................................................................... 5-57
Card Index: Listed by Function Category ............................................................................... 5-61
Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order ..................................................................... 5-63
Chapter 6 - Cage Description
6.1 Cage Description and Installation............................................................................................. 6-3

Cage Structure ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Cage Front, Top, and Side Panels ......................................................................................... 6-6
Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................. 6-11
DC Power Terminals and Fuse............................................................................................... 6-16
AC Power Cord and Cover..................................................................................................... 6-20
Accessing the Cage Interior ................................................................................................... 6-22
Cage Interior........................................................................................................................... 6-26
Mounting Brackets.................................................................................................................. 6-29
Heat Buffer Bracket ................................................................................................................ 6-30
Cage Labels ........................................................................................................................... 6-35
Dismounting the Cage from the Rack .................................................................................... 6-37
6.2 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage ...................................................................................................... 6-39
viii
Circuit Card Slots ................................................................................................................... 6-39
Backplane Description............................................................................................................ 6-41
Configuration Jumpers ........................................................................................................... 6-42
Connections to Other Cages .................................................................................................. 6-44
6.3 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage .............................................................................................. 6-45

Circuit Card Slots ................................................................................................................... 6-45
Backplane Description............................................................................................................ 6-47
Configuration Jumpers ........................................................................................................... 6-48
Connections to Other Cages .................................................................................................. 6-51
6.4 System Configuration Options.................................................................................................. 6-53

General Description................................................................................................................ 6-53
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.......................................................................... 6-60
Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution ......................................................................... 6-68
Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage ............................................................................. 6-70
Chapter 7 - Power Supplies
7.1 PS19 DC................................................................................................................................... 7-1

Circuit Description .................................................................................................................. 7-6
Ringer Frequency Adjustment................................................................................................ 7-9
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-10
Ringer Database Programming .............................................................................................. 7-12
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC) ................................................................................................... 7-13
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-16
7.2 PS19 DC-D............................................................................................................................... 7-17

Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-26
Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D)................................................................................................ 7-33
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.3 PS19 AC................................................................................................................................... 7-39
ix
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 7-46
Troubleshooting (PS19 AC).................................................................................................... 7-49
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 7-52
Chapter 8 - Common Control Cards
8.1 Common Control Cards............................................................................................................ 8-1

General Information................................................................................................................ 8-1
Card Handling Procedures ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 MEX-IP2 ................................................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3 DBM.......................................................................................................................................... 8-7

When a DBM Card is Required .............................................................................................. 8-8
8.4 DBX .......................................................................................................................................... 8-9

When a DBX Card is Required............................................................................................... 8-10
8.5 IMC8/16 Integrated Flash Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-11

When an IMC16 Card is Required ......................................................................................... 8-12
8.6 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) ........................................................................................... 8-13

8.7 MAP.......................................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.8 LIU ............................................................................................................................................ 8-17

8.9 HDC Card ................................................................................................................................. 8-19

Tone PROM............................................................................................................................ 8-23
HDC Card Installation............................................................................................................. 8-24
8.10 PX Card .................................................................................................................................. 8-27

PX Card Installation................................................................................................................ 8-28
x
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Space Requirements............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-2: Removing the Locking Bar .................................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-3: Preparing the Right Side of the Cage for 23" Rack Assembly .............................................................. 2-13
Figure 2-4: Left Side View of Coral IPx Cage Mounted onto 19" Rack ................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-5: Left Side View of Coral IPx Cage Mounted onto 23" Rack ................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-6: Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket.......................................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-7: Coral IPx 800 Cage Ground Wiring....................................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-8: Master Ground Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-9: Ground Connection for System Including Customer Supplied MDF ..................................................... 2-20
Figure 2-10: Ground Connection for Coral IPx 800System with More than One Cage Including MDF Units.......... 2-21
Figure 2-11: DC Power Terminal Interconnection ................................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-12: Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage.......................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-13: Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack .......................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-14: Coral IPx 800 Cage Rear Panel .......................................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-15: Coral IPx 800 Power Connection for AC Systems .............................................................................. 2-26
Figure 2-16: Coral IPx 800 Card Slot Position to I/O Cable Pair Relationship ........................................................ 2-28
Figure 2-17: ESD Wrist Strap Connection on the Coral IPx 800 Cage.................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-18: PS19 Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 2-35
Figure 2-19: Coral IPx 800M Main Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .................................................... 2-42
Figure 2-20: Coral IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram................................................ 2-43
Figure 2-21: Coral IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .............................................. 2-44
Figure 2-22: Coral IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram................................................ 2-45
Figure 2-23: Coral IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram .............................................. 2-46
Figure 2-24: 25-Pin Program Interface Device Connections to KBO....................................................................... 2-48
Figure 2-25: 9-Pin Program Interface Device Connections to KBO......................................................................... 2-48
Figure 3-1: Internal View of the Coral IPx 800 Cage............................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-2: MEX-IP2 Memory Interface Connector Locations ................................................................................. 3-14
Figure 3-3: MEX-IP2 Front Panel ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
xi
Figure 3-4: MAP and DBM Baby Card Layouts ....................................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-5: CLA and DBX Baby Card Layouts ........................................................................................................ 3-17
Figure 5-1: MDF Connections.................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5-2: Twisted Pair TIP and Ring Wiring Detail ............................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3: Modular Wired Station Jack Wiring Diagram......................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-4: Typical Trunk Circuit Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-5: Magazine 10 Surge Arrestor and Voltage Protectors............................................................................ 5-14
Figure 5-6: Connecting Surge arrestor to MDF ....................................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-7: Power Fail Wiring To Single-Line (500/2500) Telephone Set ............................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-8: Power Fail Wiring To EKT-PF Set (Discontinued)................................................................................. 5-20
Figure 5-9: Coral FlexSet APA/APDL RS-232E Cable Connections ....................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-10: FlexSet 80 or GKT RS-232E (v.24) Pin Functions .............................................................................. 5-23
Figure 5-11: 2DT RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment................................................................................ 5-27
Figure 5-12: 2DT Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU............................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-13: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout A&B) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment...................................... 5-29
Figure 5-14: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment......................................... 5-30
Figure 5-15: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment...................................... 5-31
Figure 5-16: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) DA-15S to LTU/CSU Connection Cable ............................................... 5-31
Figure 5-17: PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU...................................... 5-32
Figure 5-18: T1, 30T (layout A&B) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment..................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-19: T1, 30T (layout UDT) RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment..................................................... 5-34
Figure 5-20: T1, 30T (layout UDT) DA-15S Interface Connector PIN Assignment.................................................. 5-35
Figure 5-21: T1, 30T (layout UDT) DA-15S to LTU/CSU Connection Cable ........................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-22: T1, 30T/x, 30T/E (layout UDT) Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU ................................... 5-36
Figure 5-23: DPC TO:CO & TO:CORAL Connector Pin Assignments .................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-24: UGW Card........................................................................................................................................... 5-38
Figure 5-25: UGW Network Interface Connector PIN Assignment .......................................................................... 5-39
Figure 5-26: UGW Card Connection to the LAN/WAN ............................................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-27: IPG Network Interface Connector PIN Assignment............................................................................. 5-41
Figure 5-28: IPG Card Connection to the LAN/WAN............................................................................................... 5-42
xii
Figure 5-29: Coral IPx 800 Back Panel and RJ-45 Rear Connectors...................................................................... 5-44
Figure 5-30: 2DT RJ-45 Front and Rear Panel Interface Connector PIN Assignment ............................................ 5-45
Figure 5-31: 2DT Network Interface Connections to the PSTN/LTU/CSU .............................................................. 5-46
Figure 5-32: 2DT Network Interface Connection from the Rear Panel .................................................................... 5-47
Figure 5-33: PRI-23/30 (layout UDT “C”) Rear Panel RJ-45 PIN Assignment to the PSTN/LTU/CSU ................... 5-48
Figure 5-34: T1, 30T (layout UDT “C”) Rear Panel RJ-45 PIN Assignment to the PSTN/LTU/CSU ....................... 5-49
Figure 5-35: UGW Card........................................................................................................................................... 5-51
Figure 5-36: UGW-E Card ....................................................................................................................................... 5-52
Figure 5-37: UGW and UGW-E Rear Panel RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment to the LAN/WAN........... 5-53
Figure 5-38: PUGW Rear Panel RJ-45 Interface Connector PIN Assignment to the LAN/WAN............................. 5-54
Figure 5-39: PUGW Card ........................................................................................................................................ 5-55
Figure 6-1: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Door Closed................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-2: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Door Opened ................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-3: Coral IPx 800 System with Three Cages .............................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-4: Front, Left, Right, and Top Views of Coral IPx 800 Cage ..................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-5: Left and Right Panels of the Cage ........................................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6-6: Top Panel of Cage Clear of Objects...................................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-7: Front View of Cage Door....................................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-8: Cage Including Components Relevant to the Door ............................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-9: Coral IPx 800M Rear Panel................................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-10: Coral IPx 800X Rear Panel ................................................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-11: Coral IPx 800 Connection Pair Allocation ........................................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-12: Coral IPx 800 Connection Layout for 66 Type Punch Blocks.............................................................. 6-14
Figure 6-13: DC Power Cover Closure Requirement for both AC and DC Powered Coral IPx 800 Systems ......... 6-15
Figure 6-14: Coral IPx 800 DC Power Cover........................................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-15: DC Cover Removal ............................................................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-16: DC Cover Installation .......................................................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-17: Rear Panel of Coral IPx 800 Cage with DC Power Cover Removed .................................................. 6-18
Figure 6-18: Coral IPx 800 DC Power Terminals .................................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-19: AC Power Cord Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 6-20
xiii
Figure 6-20: AC Power Cord Assembly................................................................................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-21: Opening the Door ................................................................................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6-22: Closing the Door.................................................................................................................................. 6-23
Figure 6-23: Removing the Door ............................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-24: Assembling the Door ........................................................................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-25: Coral IPx 800 Cage Interior................................................................................................................ 6-26
Figure 6-26: Coral IPx 800M Backplane.................................................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-27: Coral IPx 800X Backplane .................................................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-28: Cable Routing from the Front of the Cage .......................................................................................... 6-28
Figure 6-29: Cage Mounted onto 19” Rack ............................................................................................................. 6-29
Figure 6-30: Cage Mounted onto 23” Rack ............................................................................................................. 6-29
Figure 6-31: Coral IPx 800 Cage Ventilation Flow................................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-32: Coral IPx 800 Cage with Heat Buffer Bracket Installed Directly Above............................................... 6-31
Figure 6-33: Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted Beneath another Coral IPx 800 Cage .................................................. 6-32
Figure 6-34: Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted Beneath a Customer Supplied Cage ................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-35: Left View of Coral IPx 800 Cage Mounted at Top of Rack.................................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-36: Labels on Rear Panel.......................................................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-37: Labels Inside Cage and Door.............................................................................................................. 6-36
Figure 6-38: Coral IPx 800M Card Cage (Front View)............................................................................................. 6-40
Figure 6-39: Coral IPx 800M Backplane.................................................................................................................. 6-41
Figure 6-40: Coral IPx 800M Jumper Configuration for Synchronization Slots (J29) .............................................. 6-43
Figure 6-41: Coral IPx 800M Rear Panel Connections to other Cages ................................................................... 6-44
Figure 6-42: Coral IPx 800X Card Cage (Front View) ............................................................................................. 6-46
Figure 6-43: Coral IPx 800X Backplane .................................................................................................................. 6-47
Figure 6-44: Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration for Shelf Designation (J38) ..................................................... 6-49
Figure 6-45: Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration for Primary and Secondary Synchronization Slots (J37) ........ 6-50
Figure 6-46: Coral IPx 800X Rear Panel Connections to other Cages.................................................................... 6-51
Figure 6-47: System with One Cage (IPx 800M) ..................................................................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-48: System with Two Cages (IPx 800M and IPx 800X)............................................................................. 6-55
Figure 6-49: System with Three Cages (IPx 800M and Two IPx 800X Cages)....................................................... 6-56
xiv
Figure 6-50: System with Two Cages (IPx 800M and IPx 500X)............................................................................. 6-57
Figure 6-51: System with Three Cages (IPx 800M, IPx 500X, and IPx 800X) ........................................................ 6-58
Figure 6-52: System with Three Cages (IP x800M and Two IPx 500X Cages)....................................................... 6-59
Figure 6-53: H719 Cable Connection between Two IPx 800 Cages with PS19 DC-D Power Supply..................... 6-62
Figure 6-54: Connection between Two IPx 800 Cages (IPx 800M and 800X) ........................................................ 6-63
Figure 6-55: Connection between Three IPx 800 Cages (IPx 800M and two 800X) ............................................... 6-64
Figure 6-56: Connection between Two Cages (IPx 800M and 500X) ..................................................................... 6-65
Figure 6-57: Connection between Three Cages (IPx 800M, 500X and 800X) ........................................................ 6-66
Figure 6-58: Connection between Three Cages (IPx 800M and two 500X) ............................................................ 6-67
Figure 6-59: Coral IPx 800, PCM Highway Distribution........................................................................................... 6-69
Figure 7-1: PS19 DC Front Panel Layout ................................................................................................................ 7-3
Figure 7-2: PS19 DC Card Layout........................................................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-3: PS19 DC Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-4: PS19 DC-D Front Panel ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
Figure 7-5: PS19 DC-D Card Layout ....................................................................................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-6: PS19 DC-D Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-7: PS19 DC-D Economical Mode Cabling................................................................................................. 7-29
Figure 7-8: PS19 DC-D Redundancy Cabling ......................................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-9: PS19 DC-D Double Power (No Cable).................................................................................................. 7-31
Figure 7-10: PS19 AC Front Panel .......................................................................................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-11: PS19 AC Circuit Board........................................................................................................................ 7-42
Figure 7-12: PS19 AC Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 7-44
Figure 8-1: Coral IPx 800, HDC and Peripheral Cards............................................................................................ 8-19
Figure 8-2: HDC Circuit Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 8-20
Figure 8-3: Coral IPx 800, PCM Highway Distribution............................................................................................. 8-22
Figure 8-4: HDC Card Layout and Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8-5: PX Buffer Card Block Diagram.............................................................................................................. 8-27
xv
List of Tables
Coral IPx 800 Cage Dimensions.............................................................................................................................. 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Cage Weights ................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Cage Space Requirements............................................................................................................... 2-3
Coral IPx 800 Maximum Current ............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Contents of Coral IPx 800M Shipping Container ..................................................................................................... 2-11
Contents of Coral IPx 800X Shipping Container...................................................................................................... 2-11
Coral IPx 800 I/O Champ Connector to Card Slot Relationships ............................................................................ 2-28
Jumpers in the IPx 800M Main Cage....................................................................................................................... 2-31
Jumpers in the 800X Expansion Cage .................................................................................................................... 2-31
Shared Service and Peripheral Interface Card Types ............................................................................................. 2-41
Card Slot Status Messages ..................................................................................................................................... 3-22
MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes ............................................................................................................................... 4-4
Station Interface Wire Pair Requirements ............................................................................................................... 5-6
Telephone Circuit Primary Lightning / Surge Arrestor Device Specifications .......................................................... 5-12
Telephone Circuit Secondary Protection Device Specifications .............................................................................. 5-13
Coral FlexSet APA/APDL RS-232E Interface Pin Functions ................................................................................... 5-22
DKT2000 with APA/APDL RS-232E (V.24) Interface Module Pin Functions........................................................... 5-23
2DT Network Interface Connections........................................................................................................................ 5-27
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout A&B) Network Interface Connections ................................................................................. 5-29
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT) Network Interface Connections................................................................................. 5-30
T1, 30T (layout A&B) Network Interface Connections ............................................................................................. 5-33
T1, 30T (layout UDT) Network Interface Connections............................................................................................. 5-34
DA-15S D-Type connector for DPC card................................................................................................................. 5-37
UGW Network Interface Connections...................................................................................................................... 5-39
IPG Interface Connections ...................................................................................................................................... 5-41
2DT Network Interface Connections........................................................................................................................ 5-45
2DT Possible Front or Rear Panel Network Interface Connections......................................................................... 5-47
PRI-23, PRI-30 (layout UDT “C”) Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections ............................................. 5-48
xvi
T1, 30T (layout UDT “C”) Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections ......................................................... 5-49
UGW and UGW-E Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections.................................................................... 5-53
PUGW Rear Panel RJ-45 Network Interface Connections...................................................................................... 5-54
Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables ................................................................................................................... 5-59
Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables ................................................................................................................... 5-60
Possible Terminal/Card combinations ..................................................................................................................... 5-61
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards ....................................................................................................................... 5-65
I/O Connections: 4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards............................................................................................ 5-66
I/O Connections: 4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, 4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S) (12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> cards .......................... 5-67
I/O Connections: 4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, 4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S) (12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> cards .......................... 5-68
I/O Connections: 8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF) <G> <ES> cards........................................... 5-69
I/O Connections: 8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF) <G> <ES> cards........................................... 5-70
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards.................................................................................................................... 5-71
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards.................................................................................................................... 5-72
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-73
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................................................................................................................... 5-74
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-75
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-76
8BID cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-77
8BID cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-78
4GID, 4TWL cards ................................................................................................................................................... 5-79
4GID cards .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-80
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-81
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards ................................................................................................................................ 5-82
2SK cards ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-83
2SK cards ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-84
4SK, 8SK cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-85
4SK, 8SK cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-86
2SD, 8SD cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-87
2SD, 8SD cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-88
xvii
8SKD, 16SKD cards ................................................................................................................................................ 5-89
8SKD, 16SKD cards ................................................................................................................................................ 5-90
8SVD cards ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-91
8SVD cards ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-92
8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards ............................................................................................... 5-93
8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards ............................................................................................... 5-94
4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards......................................................................................................................................... 5-95
4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards......................................................................................................................................... 5-96
8SA, 8SLS, 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S(-LL) cards............................................................................................................... 5-97
8SA, 8SLS, 8S, 8S/SH(-LL), 8SH/S cards............................................................................................................... 5-98
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH, 16S/SH cards .................................................................................................... 5-99
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH, 16S/SH cards .................................................................................................... 5-100
24SA, 16SLS, 24SLS cards .................................................................................................................................... 5-101
24SA, 16SLS, 24SLScards ..................................................................................................................................... 5-102
8SM cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-103
8SM cards ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-104
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ............................................................................................................................................ 5-105
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ............................................................................................................................................ 5-106
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-107
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-108
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) .............................................................................................................................. 5-109
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) .............................................................................................................................. 5-110
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station) ............................................................................................. 5-111
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station) ............................................................................................. 5-112
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station) ........................................................................................... 5-113
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station) ........................................................................................... 5-114
Coral IPx 800M Card Slot Configuration for Main Cage .......................................................................................... 6-39
Coral IPx 800MConfiguration Jumpers.................................................................................................................... 6-42
Coral IPx 800X Card Slot Configuration for the Expansion Cage............................................................................ 6-45
Coral IPx 800X Jumper Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 6-48
xviii
Coral IPx 800 System Configuration Options .......................................................................................................... 6-53
Number of Universal I/O Slots per System Configuration........................................................................................ 6-54
Coral IPx 800 System Expansion Options............................................................................................................... 6-60
Time Slot Distribution in Coral IPx 800 .................................................................................................................... 6-68
xix
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Document Description .........................................1-1

Coral
1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document.............1-5
1.3 System Description .............................................1-7
1.3 Recommended Tools...........................................1-9

Cor
IPx 800 Installation Manual

Document Description
1.1
0
1 Document Contents
The Coral IPx 800 Installation Guide and Hardware Reference Manual, is designed for field
use by Coral system installation and service personnel. It describes the installation of
the Coral IPx 800 system.
The manual is divided into two primary parts:
a systematic installation procedure
a complete hardware reference
Installation Procedure Guide

Chapters 2, 3, 4, and 5 include all installation procedures. These chapters listed below,
outline the step-by-step process of performing a complete, new Coral IPx 800 and 3000
system installation. Peripheral devices can be installed at any time after system
installation. For peripheral device installation, refer to The Coral Terminal Equipment
Installation Manual”.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation Procedure
Chapter 3 Initial Power-Up Tests
Chapter 4 Software Installation Procedure
Chapter 5 External Connections
Hardware Reference
The Hardware Reference is described in Chapters 6 through 8. These chapters offer
detailed technical information about Coral system hardware, including cabinet

specifications, internal power supplies, and interface circuit operation:
Chapter 6 Cabinet Descriptions
Chapter 7 Power Supply Descriptions
Chapter 8 Control Card Descriptions
1
Introduction 1-1
0
2 Related Documentation
For further information not in the scope of this manual about Coral Service cards,
Coral Peripheral cards, voice terminals, VoIP devices, etc., consult the following
documentation.
Item Subject Manual
Coral systems General description and Coral IPx and FlexiCom Product
specifications for Description
marketing
Coral Database Programming 1) PI - Program Interface and

Database Reference Manual
2) CVA -CoralVIEW Administrator
User Manual
3) CVD -CoralVIEW Designer
Guide
Backup 1) PI - Program Interface and

Database Reference Manual,
Chapter 21
2) Database Binary Backup PC
Utility
Installation and Upgrade FMprog PC-Utility Reference

Coral Software
Manual
Coral FlexAir Descriptions and Coral FlexAir (Wireless Systems)

(Wireless) Installation Procedure Installation Manual
IP device (VoIP) Installation Coral VoIP Installation Manual

UGW, UGW-E, PUGW
card, FlexSet-IP 280S,
Coral Teleport, FlexIP
SoftPhone
IPG card Descriptions and VoIP Gateway (IPG) card

Installation Procedure Installation Manual
IPx 500X Expansion Descriptions and Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual
Cages for IPx 800M Installation Procedure
IPx 500X Expansion Descriptions and Installa- Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual
Cages for IPx 800M tion Procedure
Control cards Descriptions, Installation Coral Control Cards

and Hardware Reference (for CDRS 200,200E;
IPx 500,800,3000 and
FlexiCom 200,300,400,5000)
Installation Manual
1
1-2 Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual

Item Subject Manual
Peripheral cards Descriptions and Coral Service and Peripheral

Installation Procedure Cards Installation Manual
Shared Service cards
Voice Terminal Description Coral IPx and FlexiCom

Equipment/ Product Description, Chapter 3
Peripheral Device
Installation, Administration T207M, T208M, T207M/NP and
Procedure, T208M/BL
Troubleshooting and IP station Installation Manual
Hardware Reference
T207S, T208S, T207S/NP and
T208S/BL
IP station Installation Manual
FlexSet-IP 280S
IP station Installation Manual
FlexSet (120, 120D, 120L, 120S,

121S, 280, 280D, 280D-Z, 280S,
281S, APDL, PEX, APA and CPA)
Digital Station Terminal Equipment
Installation Manual
DKT, DST, and VDM

Digital Station Terminal Equipment
Installation Manual
FlexIP SoftPhone User Guide
SeaBeam Installation and

Administration Manual
1
Introduction 1-3
NOTES:
1

Special Symbols Used in this Document
1.2
This manual includes information that requires special attention, or is distinguished
from the main texts in some significant way. These are indicated by the use of symbols
and text formatting. This is illustrated in the following examples:
There is a risk of danger to life or personal injury.
There is a risk of damage to the Coral System.
Indicates important information demanding special attention.
Points out a special procedure or a definition that is relevant but not central to

the text.
Tip:
Advice that makes it easier to follow the steps of a procedure.
Items marked {14.5x} denote that this field or feature is applicable to Coral software
version 14.50 and later only.
NOTES:
This page is intentionally left blank. It may be used for the reader's notes.
1
Introduction 1-5
NOTES:
1

System Description
1.3
Coral System General Features
The Coral 800 is a digital communications switching system, available in a variety of
configurations that share a common architecture. The Coral system is based on Pulse
Coded Modulation (PCM) switching technology. The active circuitry of the system is
contained on removable printed circuit assemblies or cards, nearly all of which may be
used in any system in the family.
The active circuitry of the Coral 800 system is divided into two major categories:
common control and peripheral circuitry. The common control circuitry directs call
traffic through the system, establishing audio connections between peripheral ports.
The peripheral circuitry provides the hardware necessary to establish those
connections. Instructions from the common control circuitry to the peripheral circuitry,
and status information from the peripheral circuitry to the common control circuitry
are passed through the group controller. The group controller provides driver and time
slot interchange functions for the PCM highways and the HDLC channels.
The peripheral circuitry is further divided into Shared Service and Peripheral Interface
functions. The shared service circuitry provides the equipment necessary to establish
calls between Peripheral interfaces. The Peripheral Interface circuitry provides
standardized electrical connections to external telephone station equipment and
network facilities.
Coral System Configurations

The major distinction between different Coral system configurations is their number of
card slots, into which Shared Service and Peripheral Interface cards may be inserted.
The Coral IPx 800 system is a highly cost-effective rack-mounted design, including up
to 30 universal card slots or 3 cages. The Coral IPx 800 cage operates from a standard
System Description
100-240VAC 47-63Hz power source, or from a 48 volt direct current (DC) stationary
battery.
The Coral IPx 3000 system has the same rack-mounted design as the Coral IPx 800, but
includes more cage options, including up to 178 universal card slots or 16 cages. The
Coral IPx 3000 offers the option of operating from either 100-240VAC 47-63Hz, or from
a 48 volt direct current (DC) stationary battery plant for increased service reliability.
1
Introduction 1-7
The Coral IPx 4000 system is a hot-standby dual control system – a complete and
powerful unit that functions without interrupting telephony service and a natural
development of the Coral IPx 3000 configurations. The Coral IPx 4000 meets the
demands of critical applications through its redundant common control system and
fail-safe backup operations, including redundant power supplies. These features are of
the utmost importance to systems considered “mission-critical”.
The Coral wireless FlexAir system allows portable handsets to be incorporated in the
Coral system.
System Description
1

Recommended Tools
1.4
In order to properly install and maintain a Coral system, the installation and service
technician must be equipped with many common tools, as well as several tools which
are specialized for the telecommunications industry. In addition, there are many tools
which, although not required to install or maintain a Coral system, are nevertheless
valuable in assisting personnel in the performance of their duties.
The manufacturer recommends that the installation or service personnel have the
following list of tools, as a minimum, at their immediate disposal for any Coral
installation site.
Required Tools:
3/ ", 1/ ", and 5/16" straight-blade screwdriver
16 4
#1 and #2 Phillips screwdriver

Diagonal wire cutters
Long-nosed pliers
Electrician's pliers
Slip-joint pliers
Standard crimping tool
Adjustable wrench
Socket wrench set
Telephone cable cutters
Telephone cable insulation strippers
16 foot (5m) measuring tape
Recommended Tools
Punch tool matching all telephone cable terminal blocks used at the installation
site
Digital multimeter (DMM)
Telephone line test set capable of pulse and DTMF dialing
Portable (laptop) personal computer capable of emulating an asynchronous ASCII
data terminal and approved by the manufacturer to run the binary database save
1
and restore utility, portable asynchronous ASCII data terminal, or permanently

installed on-site personal computer or ASCII data terminal
Introduction 1-9
Optional Tools:
Modular line polarity tester
Flashlight
Tone/continuity/talk battery generator
Tone detector/amplifier probe
Telephone line test set with MF tone signaling capability
Alligator clip leads
AMPTM CHAMPTM installation tool
Soldering iron and high quality, rosin-core solder
3/ 1/ ”
16“and 2 cable staple gun
Analog line transmission analyzer
Portable DS1/E1 analyzer, bit error rate tester, and channel demultiplexer
Recommended Tools
1

Chapter 2
Hardware Installation
Procedure
2.1 Site Inspection .....................................................2-1

Coral
2.2 Equipment Installation .........................................2-9
2.3 Program Interface Device Connection...............2-47
Cor

Site Inspection
2.1
1 Installation Environment
The Coral IPx 800 system should be installed in restricted access areas (dedicated
equipment rooms, equipment closets, or the like) in accordance with articles 110-16,
110-17, and 110-18 of the national electric code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Access to the system should be limited and controlled to prevent unauthorized
tampering. The system uses hazardous working voltages and extremely high short
circuit currents, and the area must be protected against damage by, and injury to,
unqualified personnel.
Due to these considerations, an installation area must be chosen in accordance with the
following guidelines:
1. Verify that the installation area is clean, dry, and protected from weather extremes.
2. Verify that the floor of the installation area is finished with linoleum, vinyl,
ceramic, wooden flooring, or polished sealed concrete. Carpeting is not acceptable.
3. Verify that the ceiling of the installation area is finished or treated to prevent
particle discharge.
4. Verify that the installation area is well lit, and that the light source is uniformly
diffused without shadows. Adequate lighting should provide a comfortable
reading level and allow the identification of wire insulator colors without undue
eye fatigue.
Lighting should be comparable to an office work environment, with a minimum
level of 70 foot-candles at each work surface. As a general rule, in a room with an
eight foot (2.5m) ceiling, one 48 inch fluorescent tube provides sufficient
illumination for 20-25 sq. ft. (1.9-2.4m2).
5. Verify that ventilation of the installation area is capable of maintaining an ambient
Site Inspection
temperature of 32°-104°F (0°-40°C), and a relative humidity of 20-80%

non-condensing, considering the system nominal heat dissipation 700 BTU/hr.
(These figures are for each cage only, and do not take into account heat generated
by other equipment.)
6. Verify that the installation area is free of caustic or corrosive liquids, substances, or
2
materials. If batteries will be installed as part of the system, ensure that adequate
Hardware Installation Procedure 2-1

precautions are taken (such as special ventilation) to prevent corrosive emissions
from the batteries. Check local building codes for additional requirements.
7. Verify that the installation area is located no closer than 20 feet (6.1m) from electric
devices that produce large electro-magnetic fields or high levels of radio frequency
energy. Possible EMF sources are radio transmitters, electric arc welding machines,
copying machines, electric motors, refrigeration units, power transformers, electric
load centers, and main circuit breaker panels.
8. Verify that the installation area provides reasonable security to the system. Room
construction should include solid, reinforced walls and a locking door.
The Coral system, and the service it provides to users, represents a substantial
investment. During an emergency, reliable service may be crucial in protecting
lives and property. Access to the system should be limited and controlled to
prevent unauthorized tampering. The system uses hazardous working voltages
and extremely high short circuit currents. The area must be protected against
damage by, and injury to, unqualified personnel.
Site Inspection
2

0
2 Space Requirements
This section describes the Coral IPx 800 space requirements.
1. Verify that there is sufficient space for the Coral IPx 800 system components. Table
2-1 lists the cabinet dimensions for the cages. Table 2-2 lists the cage weights. Table
2-3 and Figure 2-1 illustrate the space requirements for Coral systems.
2. Determine the position of cages on the rack according to system configuration (see
page 6-53, System Configuration Options), function, and the length of the cables
interconnecting the cages. Observe any order previously directed by a system
designer.
Table 2-1 Coral IPx 800

Dimension Inches Centimeters (cm)
Cage Dimensions
Width 19 48
Depth 13 33
Height - 9U 16 40
Heat Bracket Height - 1U 1.75 4.5

Weight Pounds Kilograms
Cage Weights
Empty 30 14
Fully Assembled 50 23

Space Required in: Inches Centimeters (cm)
Cage Space
Requirements
Front 36 100
Rear 36 100
Site Inspection
Top - 2U 3.5 9
2

Figure 2-1 Space
Requirements
36"
(100cm)
Minimum required 36"

clear floor space (100cm)
Minimum required
clear floor space
3. Verify that there is sufficient space for the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in
addition to the space required by the rack. The MDF should be located
immediately adjacent to the Coral IPx 800 rack. The bottom of the MDF must be
no lower than 2 feet (61cm) and the top must be no higher than 6 feet (1.9m) from
the floor. The floor space in front of the MDF must be clear for a minimum of 3
feet (1 m) due to the variety of cable termination hardware at the MDF.
4. Verify that there is sufficient space for any additional equipment related to the
Coral system, such as Program Interface terminal or personal computer, voice mail
Site Inspection
system, external public address system etc.

5. Verify that there is sufficient space for a technician's desk or work table.
6. Verify that there is sufficient space for power backup equipment. Due to the
variety of power backup equipment available, no specific requirements can be
detailed in this procedure.
2

0.
3 Electrical Requirements
General Requirements
The Coral IPx 800 operates from a standard wide input 100-240VAC, 47-63Hz source or
from a –48VDC source.
1. Verify that electrical service is sufficient and located in close proximity to the
system.
Coral IPx 800 installations require one dedicated branch circuit for all cages
within the system.
Ancillary equipment such as data terminals or personal computers, external
paging equipment, test instruments, etc., require at least one additional branch
circuit.
2. A 1.85mm2 or 10AWG wire must be used in the circuit branch for 115VAC or
230VAC power.
3. Each branch circuit must be independently protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker
and must not be controlled by a switch. Type-C fuses must be used where
required by local authorities.
4. The receptacle for the Coral system branch circuit must be located within 4 feet
(1.2m) of the cages for AC or DC operated systems.
5. Ancillary branch circuit receptacles should be located conveniently for equipment,
and allow data terminals, personal computers, or test instruments to be operated
near the system.
6. Table 2-4 lists the voltages and current requirements for each cabinet.
Site Inspection
2

Configuration* 115VAC 230VAC –48VDC
Maximum Current
IPx 800M 6A 3A 12A
IPx 800X 6A 3A 12A
IPx 500X 6A 3A 10A
IPx 800M + IPx 800X 12A 6A 24A
IPx 800M + IPx 800X + IPx 800X 18A 9A 30A
IPx 800M + IPx 500X 12A 6A 22A
*Maximum power requirement is a maximum case projection based on fully populated

systems. The total number may be defined per actual system. The current is identical for
main and expansion cages.
Site Inspection
2

DC Electrical Requirements
DC powered units must comply with the following instructions:
1. Restricted Access Area: The DC powered equipment should only be installed in a
Restricted Access Area.
2. Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to country
national electrical codes. For North America, equipment must be installed in
accordance with the US National Electrical Code, Articles 110-16, 110-17 and
110-18 and the Canadian Electrical Code, Section 12.
3. Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible listed branch circuit overcurrent
protective device rated 30A/60VDC minimum slow blow must be incorporated in the
building wiring for every four cages.
4. CAUTION: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed
conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the equipment.
See installation instructions below.
5. The equipment shall be connected to a properly earthed supply system.
6. All equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be earthed the same way, and shall
not be earthed elsewhere.
7. The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same premises as the
equipment.
8. A disconnect device is not allowed in the earthed circuit between the DC supply
source and the frame/ earthed circuit connection.
Site Inspection
2

NOTES:
Site Inspection
2

Equipment Installation
2.2
1 Introduction
This chapter describes how to install the Coral IPx 800 cages. For a detailed description
of the cage, see Chapter 6 - Cage Description.
The cage mounting and installation procedure includes the following stages:
Mounting and Installing the Cage, on page 2-10
Ground Wiring, on page 2-17
Wiring DC Powered Systems, on page 2-22
Wiring AC Powered Systems, on page 2-25
Connecting the I/O Cables, on page 2-27
Setting the Configuration Jumpers, on page 2-30
Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages, on page 2-32
Installing the Power Supply Card, on page 2-33
Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable, on page 2-36
Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage, on page 2-37
General Hazard. Installation and maintenance activities carried out by unqualified

personnel could lead to death, serious injury, or damage to equipment. Only qualified
service technicians certified by the manufacturer may install and maintain the
Coral IPx 800.

2

0
2 Mounting and Installing the Cage

The process of mounting and installing the cage includes the following stages:
Unpacking the Shipping Container, on page 2-10
Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements, on page 2-12
Removing the Cage Door, on page 2-12
Removing the Locking Bar, on page 2-12
When necessary, Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23” Rack, on page 2-13
Mounting the Cage onto the Rack, on page 2-14
Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket, on page 2-16
Unpacking the Shipping Container

1. Inspect the shipping carton for evidence of physical damage or mishandling.
Report any damage to the carrier immediately.
2. If it is necessary to make a damage claim to the carrier, do not move the container
until it has been examined by a representative of the carrier. Otherwise, move the
shipping carton as near as possible to the installation area before opening.
Ergonomic Hazard. The cage weights are provided in Table 2-2 on page 2-3. Serious back
injury could result due to improper handling. Use proper lifting techniques to lift the
shipping carton.
3. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the tape securing the top flaps of the shipping
carton and open the flaps.
4. Remove any circuit card boxes in the depressions of the top foam insert.
5. Remove the top foam insert and set it aside.
6. Using an assistant to avoid personal injury, grasp each end of the cage and lift it
out of the shipping carton. Place the cage on a stable surface.
7. Inspect the cage door and rear panel for hidden shipping damage.
8. Check the part list and verify that all the items are present. Table 2-5 through Table
2-6 list the components that are supplied with the wall-mounted Coral IPx 800
system.
9. Remove any other cage items from the shipping container, and move the container
2
so that it does not interfere with the remaining installation procedures.

Table 2-5 Contents of
Coral IPx 800M Shipping Part Quantity
Container
Cage including attached AC Power Cord 1
MEX-IP2 Control Card 1
HDC Control Card 1
Kit with Mechanical Fasteners 1
Power supply unit; PS19 AC or DC-D (ordered by customer) 1
Peripheral interface cards (ordered by customer) As required
8DRCF service card 1
Table 2-6 Contents of

Coral IPx 800X Shipping Part Quantity
Container
Cage including attached AC Power Cord 1
Kit with Mechanical Fasteners 1
H500-1 Cage Interconnection Cable Harness 1
Power supply unit; PS19 AC or DC-D (ordered by customer) 1
Peripheral interface cards (ordered by customer) As required
H614 DC power cable harness (for DC systems) 1
2

Checking the Space and Positioning Requirements
Verify that the cage will be positioned in accordance with local and system
requirements. The spacing requirements as described on page 2-3, Space Requirements
ensure system operation and maintenance.
Removing the Cage Door

Remove the cage door and set it aside. For more information, see page 6-24, Removing
the Door.
Removing the Locking Bar

The locking bar for shipping reinforces the cage and prevents damage during
shipping. For more information, see Figure 2-2. After it is delivered to the customer it
may be discarded.
To remove the locking bracket:
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, unfasten the screws (counter clockwise) that connect
the locking bar to the cage.
2. Remove and discard the locking bar.
3. If the cage is to be mounted onto a 19” rack, skip to page 2-14, Mounting the Cage
onto the Rack.
Figure 2-2 Removing

the Locking Bar
Left screw
Locking bar
2
Right screw

Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23” Rack
1. For 19” rack installation, skip to page 2-14, Mounting the Cage onto the Rack.
2. Unfasten the four screws that secure the right bracket to the cage.
3. Reposition the hanging pin assembly on the bracket as depicted in step 2 of
Figure 2-3, rotate the bracket 180°, and align the bracket with the cage such that
the narrow edge of the bracket is adjacent to the cage.
4. Fasten the bracket to the cage with the four screws.
5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 for the left bracket.
Figure 2-3 Preparing

the Right Side of the
Cage for 23" Rack
Assembly
Step 1 Remove four

screws.
Move hanging pin

Step 2 and rotate angle
180 .
Step 3 Replace four

screws.
2

Mounting the Cage onto the Rack
Mechanical Hazard. Insecure mechanical loads could result in serious injury. It is the
customer’s responsibility to verify that the cage is tightly secured to the frame and that it
cannot accidentally fall from the rack.
1. Verify that the cage mounting position on the rack is correct. In addition to
customer requirements, requirements for heat dissipation must be taken into
account. For more information, see page 2-3, Space Requirements.
2. With the help of an assistant, grasp each end of the cage and lift it to the
mounting position on the rack.
Ergonomic Hazard. The cage weight is provided in Table 2-1 on page 2-3. Serious back
injury could result due to improper handling. Use proper lifting techniques to mount the
cage onto the rack.
3. Insert the hanging pins into the two square inserts positioned on the rack holes
(supplied by the customer). See Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5. This ensures that the
cage remains in position while it is fastened to the rack. Do not let go of the cage
after you have inserted the hanging pins. The hanging pins are not designed to
support the weight of the cage and are to be used only for assistance.
Ergonomic Hazard. The hanging pins are not designed to support the weight of the
cage. Do NOT rest the weight of the cage on the hanging pins. Continue to support the
cage until it has been securely fastened to the rack.
4. Fasten the cage to the rack with fasteners inserted into the oval holes of the
mounting bracket. For more details, see Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 on page 2-15.
Note
It is the customer’s responsibility to provide the fasteners for the cage to the
rack.
2

Figure 2-4 Left Side
View of Coral IPx Cage
Mounted onto 19" Rack
Nut (not supplied

by manufacturer) Hanging pin
Mounting
bracket
19“ Rack
Figure 2-5 Left Side

View of Coral IPx Cage
Mounted onto 23" Rack
Nut (not supplied

by manufacturer) Hanging pin
Mounting
bracket
2
23“ Rack

Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket
Verify that the cage mounting position on the rack is correct. In addition to customer
requirements, requirements for heat dissipation must be taken into account. See page
6-30, Heat Buffer Bracket.
1. If a heat buffer bracket is not necessary, skip to page 2-17, Ground Wiring.
2. Install the heat buffer bracket. For details, see Figure 2-6.
3. Skip to page 2-17, Ground Wiring.
Figure 2-6 Installing the

Heat Buffer Bracket
2

0
3 Ground Wiring
Proper system grounding is critical for reliable system operation. System grounding is
only as effective as the ground point itself. To ensure adequate protection from
interference by radio frequency energy, electrical impulse noise, and lightening or
power line surge, the building electrical ground point must comply with grounding
recommendations of the National Area Code, Article 800, and/or applicable, local
building and electrical codes.
The purpose of ground circuit design is to establish a low resistance path to the earth,
and conduct a number of currents in such a way as to minimize the interaction of any
two or more currents. The ground connection is used as a common conductor for
many circuits: some carrying wanted signals, and others carrying unwanted signals.
The same ground that carries small networking currents must also carry unwanted
radio frequency energy, impulse noise, and lightening surges that might otherwise
interfere with system operation.
The ground terminal includes an M4 threaded terminal pole that is fixed to the bottom
right corner on the rear side of the cage (by the manufacturer), a serrated washer, a flat
washer, and an M4 nut.
Electrical Hazard. Incorrect ground wire connections to the system can cause shock,
burn, or death.
•Verify that the ground wires are 10 AWG stranded conductor.
•Verify that all cage ground connections are made directly from the cage ground
connection to the master ground.
•Do not interconnect cage ground terminals between Coral IPx cages.
•Ring terminals retain wires onto the terminal lug when the connection is loosened.
Verify that all ground wires include ring terminals at both ends.
•Connect only a Protective Earth (PE) to the Coral IPx system.
Do not connect a separate Telecommunications Reference Conductor (TRC).
•Resistance from the master ground to the building electrical ground should never
exceed 1.0 ohm. The master ground bar should be located in the switching room as
close as possible to the Coral system. Any ground connection of equipment related to
the switching Coral system should ultimately connect to the master ground.
The cage ground wire is connected to the cage at the rear bottom right corner, as
described on page 2-18, Connecting the Ground Wire to the Cage.
2

Connecting the Ground Wire to the Cage
The cage ground connection includes one serrated washer, one flat washer, and one
hexagonal nut. See Figure 2-7.
Connect the ground wire to the cage as follows:
1. Remove the hexagonal nut and flat washer from the ground terminal, and retain
for reassembly.
2. Insert the ground wire ring terminal over the serrated washer.
3. Insert the flat washer onto the ground wire ring terminal.
4. Fasten the hexagonal nut.
The hexagonal nut can be fastened or unfastened only with a closed 7mm
hexagonal socket wrench with a 1/4” drive and an adaptor. An open wrench
cannot be maneuvered in the restricted space around the nut.
Figure 2-7 Coral IPx 800

Cage Ground Wiring
Master
ground
-48V 48VRTN
Serrated
washer
Flat
washer
GND
Ring
terminals
Ground
nut (M4)
Ring Ground connection R=1.0 ohm max.

terminalbetween the Coral IPx
cage and the Master
Ground.
(10 AWG stranded
conductor)
Building
2
entrance
ground

Connecting the Ground Wire to the Master Ground
A master ground must be included within the system. The system ground connection
is fabricated as follows:
1. Verify that a master ground unit for ground connections is used. See Figure 2-8.
The recommended master ground unit must have the following specifications:
Dimensions:.......................Minimum of 5.5” x ¼” x 1” (140 mm x 6 mm x 25 mm)
Material:.............................Brass or Copper
Mounting holes:................¼” (6 mm) diameter, ½” (12 mm) distance from edges
Ground screws:.................10-32 UNF
Washers...............................One serrated washer and one flat washer
Distance between screws:.....¾” (19 mm)
Figure 2-8 Master

½ " m)
Ground Unit (1 3m
¾" m )
9m
(1
¾" m )
9m
(1
1/4"
(25 mm)
½" m )
3m
(1
F
UN
(25 mm)
2
-3
10
1"
¼"
(6mm)
Serrated Washer Ring Terminal Disk Washer
2. Verify that the ground wire is 10AWG stranded conductor, is the proper length,
and includes two ring terminals fitted onto either end of the wire that are suitable
for connecting to the master ground and to the cage.
3. Route the ground wire between the cage and the master ground.
4. Connect the ground wire to the cage as described on page 2-18, Connecting the
Ground Wire to the Cage.
5. Connect the cage ground wire to the master ground unit as follows:
a. Unfasten one of the 10-32 UNF screws connected to the master ground unit and
retain the screw and serrated washer. See Figure 2-8.
2

b. Insert the 10-32 UNF screw such that the ground wire ring terminal is
positioned between the serrated washer and the threaded hole of the master
ground unit.
c. Position the wire ring terminal over the threaded hole of the master ground
unit, and fasten. Tighten until snug. See Figure 2-8.
6. Repeat step 1 through step 5 for all cages in the system. Verify that the system
ground wire connection between the different cages is identical to the schematic
diagram displayed in Figure 2-9 or Figure 2-10.
7. Connect the MDF to the master ground according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Figure 2-9 Ground

Master
Connection for System Ground
Including Customer
Supplied MDF 10 AWG stranded wire
with ring terminals
MDF
Main Cage
R=1.0 ohm max.
Building
Entrance
Ground
2

Figure 2-10 Ground
0
10 AWG stranded wire

Connection for Coral with ring terminals
IPx 800System with More
than One Cage Including
MDF Units
Master
Ground
Expansion MDF
Cage 2
Expansion MDF
Cage 1
R=1.0 ohm max.
Building
Main Cage 0 MDF Entrance
Ground
2

0
4 Wiring DC Powered Systems

This section describes how to connect the power wires to the cage for DC powered
systems (that is, when the PS19 DC or PS19 DC-D power supply cards are installed in
the cage). For instructions on how to connect power wires to AC powered systems, see
page 2-25, Wiring AC Powered Systems.
Figure 2-11 displays the wire connections for DC systems.
A bonding bar is connected by the manufacturer between:
The two positive (48VRTN) terminal lugs
The two negative (–48V) terminal lugs
The two GND terminal lugs
This allows several cages to be connected together in parallel with the H614 wire
harness supplied. There is no ground interconnection between different cages.
Therefore, the GND terminal lugs are not in use.
Figure 2-11 DC Power

Terminal Interconnection
Do not use this terminal
To
-48V
To
Fuse 48VRTN
48V
-48V RTN GND
-48V 48V GND

RTN
Bonding Bars To
-48V
To
48VRTN
Before connecting the DC power wires, verify that:

•The positive and negative power conductors are NOT connected to the –48 VDC power
source and are NOT energized in any way.
•The H614 power wire harness (supplied by the manufacturer) are red for positive, black
for negative, 10AWG, and include ring terminals that retain wires onto the terminal lug
when the connection is loosened.
Do not connect the GND terminal lugs to master ground.
2

Connecting the Cage Power Wires of One Cage
1. Connect the cage as shown in Figure 2-12.
2. Remove the AC power cord. For more information, see page 6-20, Removing the AC
Power Cord.
It is the customer’s responsibility to supply the facilities DC fuse.

Power Wiring for One Master
Cage ground
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
48V
-48V RTN GND
10 AWG
-48V 48V GND

RTN
Ground
yellow/green
Black
Red
Fuse
30A / 125V S.B.
- - ++ Ground
yellow/green
48V battery Building

entrance
2
ground

Connecting the Cage Power Wires of One Rack
1. Connect the cage as shown in Figure 2-13.
2. Remove the AC power cord. For more information, see page 6-20, Removing the AC
Power Cord.
Figure 2-13 Coral IPx 800 Master

Power Wiring for One ground
Rack
48V
-48V RTN GND
Fuse
Ground
48V
-48V
RTN
GND
yellow/green
+
Ground
yellow/green
H614 Fuse
wire pair -48V

48V
RTN GND
Ground
yellow/green
-48V 48V GND
RTN
Fuse
48V
-48V RTN GND
Ground
yellow/green
-48V 48V GND
RTN
+ Red
Black Red
Ground
yellow/green
Fuse
30A / 125V S.B.
- +
48V battery Building

entrance
ground
2

0
5 Wiring AC Powered Systems

This section describes how to connect the power wires to the Coral IPx cage for AC
powered systems (that is, when the PS19 AC power supply card is installed in the
cage). For instructions on how to connect power wires to DC powered systems, see
page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
Do one of the following:

For cages that include an AC cord with bare wires, attach the appropriate AC
power connector to the end of the AC power cord according to local requirements,
and route the cord to the designated power outlet. For more information, see page
6-21, Installing the AC Power Cord.
For cages that include an AC cord with a plug already attached, route the power
cord to the designated power outlet.
Do not connect the AC power cord to the outlet at this time. The AC power connector
inside the cage includes dangerous currents when the AC power cord is connected.
Do not connect more than four cages to the same facilities AC fuse. Connecting more
than four cages to the same fuse could result in an overload within the building wiring. It
is the customer’s responsibility to supply the facilities AC fuse.

Cage Rear Panel
DC power
(not in Use
for AC Connections)
AC power
Ground
cord
connection
2
nut

Power Connection for AC Master ground
Systems
To AC
power
source
Ground
Ground yellow/green
To AC yellow/green
power
source
Ground
To AC yellow/green
power
source
Ground
yellow/green
Building
entrance
ground
2

0
6 Connecting the I/O Cables

The Input/Output (I/O) cables are described in further detail in Chapter 6 - Cage
Description. Read the entire chapter before attempting to connect the I/O cables.
Champ Connections
1. Determine the route of I/O cables from the MDF to the I/O Champ connectors of
the card cage and measure the longest distance from an I/O connector on the card
cage to the corresponding cable punch block on the MDF.
2. Prepare cables that are the length determined above, with a male 25 pair connector
on one end, for each I/O connector on the card cage. Eight 25 pair cables are
required for main cages and twelve cables are required for expansion cages.
3. Carefully route the connector end of the first cable to the left I/O connector. Insert
the cable connector firmly into the Coral I/O connector.
4. Route the other end of the cable to the appropriate cable punch block on the MDF.
5. Repeat this procedure for each I/O cable, moving from left to right across the
upper I/O connectors, and then from left to right across the lower I/O connectors,
until all cables are in place.
6. Mark each I/O cable near the connector on the card cage rear panel with the
corresponding peripheral shelf and I/O connector number on the Coral system.
7. Terminate each of the cables in their respective cable punch blocks on the MDF.
8. Mark each cable punch block with the corresponding I/O connector number on
the Coral system. Optionally mark every eighth pair on the block, starting with
the first pair, with the number of the two card slots associated with the I/O cable,
according to Table 2-7 and Figure 2-16.
Ensure that each I/O cable is secured with its own hook-and-loop fastener
strap on the Coral cabinet rear, so that the cables do not accidentally pop out
of place.
2

Card Slot Position to I/O Pair Pairs Pairs Pairs Connector
1/26-8/33 Pins
Cable Pair Relationship 25/50 17/42-24/49 9/34-16/41
25 17 9 1
UPPER
ports 0-7 ports 16-23 ports 0-7
CONNECTOR
50 42 34 26
EVEN SLOTS
NOT ODD SLOTS 2,4,6,8,10,12
USED
1,3,5,7,9,11
25 17 9 1
ports 16-23 ports 8-15 ports 8-15 LOWER

CONNECTOR
50 42 34 26

I/O Champ Connector to Coral IPx 800 I/O Champ
Associated Card Slots
Card Slot Relationships Connectors
1,2 Upper 1,2 Lower 1, 2
9,10 Upper 9,10 Lower 9, 10
11,12 Upper 11,12 Lower 11, 12

2

RJ-45 I/O Cable Connections to cage Rear Panel
RJ-45 I/O cables for the network connection are routed from the rear panel of the
Coral IPx cage, for the following cards:
2DT (Interface #0 only)
UDT
PRI-23 and PRI-30 cards (layout UDT “C” and later)
T1 card (layout UDT “C” and later)
30T/x, 30T/E card (layout UDT “C” and later)
PUGW
UGW-E
UGW card (layout B1)
Verify that the RJ-45 cables for the above cards are not connected directly from the
network to the connectors on the front panel of Coral peripheral cards.
Only 2DT(Interface #1), IPG, DPC and old versions of UGW, T1, 30T, PRI-23
and PRI-30 cards are routed from the connectors of the front panel of Coral
peripheral cards. See page 5-25, I/O Connections Via Front Panel.
1. Determine the route of the RJ-45 cable from the network connection to the cage
rear panel. Measure the longest distance from the cage rear panel to the
corresponding network connector.
2. Fabricate a cable of the length determined in step 1 with a male, 4 pair RJ-45
connector on each end. For information on the pinout connection, see page 5-43,
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel.
3. Connect one side of the RJ-45 cable routed in step 1 to the network connection.
4. Carefully route the other side of the RJ-45 cable routed in step 1 to the rear panel
of the Coral IPx cage. Connect the RJ-45 connector to the corresponding RJ-45 jack.
5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 for each peripheral card with an RJ-45 connector.
2

0
7 Setting the Configuration Jumpers

The cage motherboards include the configuration jumpers that define:
The synchronization cards that are housed in the cages
The cage number
The motherboard may require changes to the jumpers on the card. This must be done
before inserting the circuit cards. This section describes how to remove and insert the
shorting plugs of the various jumpers that are present on the backplanes of the main
and expansion cages.
1. Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the
strap. See Figure 2-17.
Circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by

electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling
circuit cards.
Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching contact surfaces. Handle with care
and do not drop.
Figure 2-17 ESD Wrist

Strap Connection on the
Coral IPx 800 Cage
Static Wrist Strap
2. Remove all circuit cards from the cage if any have already been inserted.
2
3. Configure the following jumpers (see Table 2-8 through Table 2-9):

Table 2-8 Jumpers in
Jumpers Subject Refer to
the IPx 800M Main Cage
J29 Synchronization slots See Table 6-1 on page 6-39
Table 2-9 Jumpers in

Jumpers Subject Refer to
the 800X Expansion Cage
J37 Synchronization slots See Table 6-4 on page 6-48
J38 Cage number See Table 6-4 on page 6-48
2

0
8 Interconnecting the Main and Expansion Cages

This section describes how to interconnect the cages within the system.
For a complete description of the different cage connectors, see page 6-39, Coral IPx
800M Main Cage, and page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage. For a complete
description of the different system configurations, see page 6-53, System Configuration
Options.
1. Verify that the power switches of all cages in the system are turned OFF.
2. Route the cables from cage to cage according to the configurations defined on page
6-53, System Configuration Options.
3. Push the cable connectors over the cage connector in the rear panel. Do not force
the connectors together. If you encounter more than a slight resistance, remove
and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
4. Fasten the connector screws to the cage.
2

0
9 Installing the Power Supply Card

The power supply is inserted only after the system has been completely grounded and
the jumpers configured. Verify that the cage is grounded and that the configuration
jumpers have been adjusted before performing the procedure described in this section.
For more information, see page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-30, Setting the
Configuration Jumpers.
Coral power supply units (PS19 AC, PS19 DC and PS19 DC-D) are heavy.
Handle with care and do not drop.
Coral power supply circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged
or destroyed by electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the cage while handling the
circuit cards. See Figure 2-17 on page 2-30.
Hold circuit cards by their edges to avoid touching contact surfaces.
The power supplies used in the Coral IPx 800 consist of an AC powered
(PS19 AC) or a –48VDC powered (PS19 DC or DC-D) power supply unit.
The PS19 is installed in the extreme left slot of the peripheral card cage.
See Figure 2-19 on page 2-42 through Figure 2-21 on page 2-44 .
See Chapter 7 - Power Supplies for further details on the PS19 power supply units.
1. Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the strap.
2. The power supply includes a ring generator that is required for single-line
telephone (8SLS, 16SLS, 24SLS, or 16SH/S-LL cards) or magneto telephone (8SM
card) station circuits. Either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency can be supplied, by
configuring jumper located on the power supply card. Verify that the jumper is
configured according to local requirements. The procedure is as follows:
on page 7-9 for PS19 DC
on page 7-25 for PS19 DC-D
2
on page 7-45 for PS19 AC

3. Verify that the PS19 power switch is turned OFF (downwards). See Figure 2-18..
Do not insert or remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON.
Sudden power surges could damage system components.
4. Grasp the power supply with both hands, with your fingers on the top and
bottom of the power supply near the front panel, and thumbs against the extractor
levers at the top and bottom of the front panel.
5. Align the two guide ridges located on the right panel of the power supply (top
and bottom) with the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
marking at the bottom of the card cage and gently slide the power supply straight
into the card slot.
6. Remove the power supply units from their shipping cartons and partially insert
them into the card slots as determined above. Allow the units to protrude from
the card cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
The PS19 DC-D is not for use with 4,8,16SH/S cards in the Coral IPx 800/3000/4000
cages. Using these cards with the PS19DC-D may cause a failure in the start-up or
restart of the Power Supply unit.
The 4,8,16SH/S cards were discontinued and were primarily used in Coral FlexiCom
cabinets.
2

Figure 2-18 PS19 Front
Panel Top
Top Ejector
Captive Screw
ALARM Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 AC
Cat. No. 72440952900
INPUT:
100-240VAC 47-63Hz
CURRENT RATING:
6A/115VAC/60Hz
3A/230VAC/50Hz
OUTPUT: +5VDC 13.0A

+12VDC 3.0A
-5VDC 0.15A
-12VDC 0.15A
-48VDC 7.0A
-120VDC 0.4A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 12VA
Handle
Bottom
Captive Screw Bottom
Ejector
2

0
10 Interconnecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable

The H719 power supply duplication cable may only be connected between two cages
that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit. For a complete description of the
conditions requiring the installation of an H719 power supply duplication cable, see
page 7-28, Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages.
Connecting the power supply duplication connector (located on the cage rear panel) for
PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system.
This connector is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Do not use this connector when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are installed.
1. Verify that all main cages house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit.
2. In all cages that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit, verify that the cage rear
panel fuse is a 30A/125V S.B., otherwise replace the 15A/125V S.B. fuse by a
30A/125V S.B. fuse.
3. Verify that the main cage is connected to any other IPx 800X cage.
2

0
11 Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage

This section describes the process of inserting all control, service, and peripheral cards
into the cages. Verify that the cage is grounded and that the configuration jumpers
have been adjusted before performing the procedure described in this section. For
more information, see page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-30, Setting the Configuration
Jumpers.
Circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by

electro-static discharge (ESD).
Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected to the system cabinet or card
cage while handling circuit cards.
See Figure 2-17 on page 2-30. Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid touching
contact surfaces. Handle with care and do not drop.
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

1. Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and put on the
strap.
2. To insert a circuit card into a card slot, grasp the card with both hands, with your
fingers on the edge of the card near the front panel, and your thumbs against the
ejectors at the top and bottom of the front panel.
3. Verify that the card is oriented correctly (the red diagnostic indicator on front
panel is positioned near the top of the card).
4. Align the edges of the circuit card with the card edge guides in the card cage, and
gently slide the card straight into the card slot.
5. A slight resistance will be felt as the multi-pin connectors on the circuit card meet
mating connectors on the backplane and engage.
6. Push against the ejectors until the front panel of the card is flush with the front
frame of the card cage.
Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is encountered,
remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one. Refer to to determine
2
peripheral interface card types.

Common Control Card Installation
Refer to Figure 2-19 for common control card placement in the Coral IPx 800M cage.
1. Verify that the IMC8/IMC16 Flash Memory card is properly installed in its
connector on the front side of the MEX-IP2 card.
2. Install the SAU plug on its corresponding connector on the front side of the
MEX-IP2 card.
3. Verify that the MEX-IP2 common control card is partially inserted into the card
slot on the extreme right slot of the main cage. The cage is normally shipped with
this card inserted in its card slot. Partially extract it from its card slot, such that the
cards protrudes from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
4. Verify that the HDC card is partially inserted into the second right slot of the main
cage. The cage is normally shipped with this card inserted in its card slot. Partially
extract it from its card slot, such that the cards protrudes from the cage by
approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
5. Insert the PX card into slot 1 of the first expansion cage such that the card
protrudes from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
2

Shared Service and Peripheral Interface Card Installation
Some shared service and peripheral interface cards listed in Table 2-10may
require changes to option straps on the card that determines the electrical
characteristics or operation of each interface circuit. Refer to specific card
descriptions in the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation
Manual for details.
Peripheral Interface cards may be installed in any universal I/O slot of the Coral
system. However, the following considerations must be taken into account when
designing the peripheral card placements.
1. Determine the position of shared service and peripheral interface cards that will
be inserted into the card slots. Observe any order previously directed by a system
designer or any established convention of the distributor. The card placement
diagrams, Figure 2-19 through Figure 2-21, can be used as a worksheet by the
system designer to establish card placement prior to installation. Refer to Table
2-10 to determine shared service and peripheral interface card types. If no other
convention exists, plan the card placement as follows:
In the main cage, insert a shared service card into slot 9.
In a system with one expansion cage, insert a shared service card into slot 1 of
the expansion cage.
In a system with two expansion cages; insert a PX card into slot 1 of the first
expansion cage, and insert a shared service card into slot 1 of the second
expansion cage.
See page 6-68, Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution for time slot / PCM
distribution among the slots. The time slots are evenly divided into three
groups of 128 time slots for each of the slot slots. Therefore, slots 1-4 share 128
time slots, slots 5-8 share an additional 128 time slots, and slots 9-12 share the
last 128 time slots. Distribute heavy consumer cards (cards with a large number
of ports: 2DT, 30T/x, T1, PRI-23, PRI-30, UDT, IPG, PUGW with MRC-32/64,
or UGW/UGW-E with MG-30/60) among the PCM groups evenly.
Distribute trunk interface cards (4ALS, 8ALS, 8BID, 8DID, 4GID, 4T, 8T, 4T-C,
8T-C, 4T-CID, 8T-CID, 4TEM, 4TMR, 4TPF, 8TPF, DPC, 4TBR, 8TBR, 30T, 30T/x,
PRI23, PRI30, 2DT, UDT and T1) evenly among all cages in the system, rather
than concentrate trunk interface cards in one cage. This practice ensures that
the failure of a single cage will have minimal impact to trunk service.
Insert the digital trunk interface cards into slots 4 and 5 of the designated main
or expansion cages. Slots 4 and 5 are wired as the secondary and primary
external clock source, respectively. The cards inserted in these slots can be used
2
to synchronize the Coral system clock with a network clock signal via a digital
trunk circuit. Refer to Coral Synchronization via Digital Trunks section in the Coral

Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual, for more information about
synchronization.
Insert peripheral cards into slots 1 through 8 of the main cage and slots 2
through 12 of the expansion cages.
2. If IPx 500X expansion cages are installed determine the position of peripheral
interface cards that will be inserted into card slots 1 through 10 in the expansion
cage. Observe any order previously directed by a system designer or any
established convention of the distributor. The card placement diagrams, Figure
2-22 through Figure 2-23, may be used as a worksheet by the system designer to
establish card placement prior to installation. Refer to the Coral IPx 500 Installation
Manual Chapter 2 and the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
Place digital trunk interface cards in card slots 4 and/or 5. Slots 4 and 5 are wired
as the primary and secondary external clock source, respectively. The cards
inserted in these slots can be used to synchronize the Coral IPx system clock with
a network clock signal derived from a digital trunk circuit.
If no other convention exists, refer to Section 10, Peripheral Cards Installation of the
Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual.
3. Remove shared service and peripheral interface cards from their shipping cartons
and partially insert them into the card slots as determined above. Allow the cards
to protrude from the card cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5cm).
4. Go to page 2-47, Program Interface Device Connection.
2

Table 2-10 Shared
Card Type Card Names
Service and Peripheral
Interface Card Types
Shared Service 8DTMF, 8DTR, 16MFR, CNF, 4VSN, iDSP, iCMC,
iVMF, IPC/SFC, IPC/uCMC, IPC/WiCMC
Peripheral Analog trunk Interface 4/8T*, 4/8T-C*, 4/8T-CID*, 4TMR*, 4/8TPF*,

4TEM*, 4TEM-P, 4/8T/S, 4/8ALS*, 4/8ALS/M*,
8DID, 8BID, 4GID, 4TWL
Peripheral Digital Trunk Interface PRI-23, PRI-30*, T1, 30T, 30TE, 30TM, 30T/x,
2DT*, UDT*, 4/8TBR, 8TBRP, DPC*, SS7
Peripheral Station Interface 8/16/24SFT, 8SM, 8/24SA*, 8/16/24SLS*,

16SH-LL*, 8/16SKK*
VoIP Interface PUGW*, UGW-E*, UGW*, IPG, FlexiGate-BRI,

FlexiGate-E&M
Peripheral Auxiliary Interface 8DRCM*, 8DRCF*, RMI*
* These cards require changes to option straps which affect interface characteristics or operation
2

Figure 2-19 Coral
IPx 800M Main Cage -
Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram Coral IPx 800M
MAIN CAGE
Shelf Number: 0
Main processor card (MEX-IP2)

with optional DBM/DBX or MAP/CLA
Peripheral service card (HDC)

Universal I/O Card Type:
1
..............
2
..............
3
..............
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
DIGITAL TRUNK

4
..............

5
..............

6
..............

7
..............
8
..............
SHARED
9
SERVICE Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D PS Type: ..............
2

Figure 2-20 Coral
IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage -
Peripheral Card
Coral IPx 800X
Placement Diagram
1st EXPANSION CAGE
Shelf Number: 1
SHARED
PX or SERVICE Card Type: ..............
1
2 Universal I/O Card Type: ..............
3
..............
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
DIGITAL TRUNK

..............
5
Universal I/O Card Type: ..............

6

7

8

9

10

11

12
Power Supply
Note:
Requires a PX card in slot# 1 if a second expansion
cage is installed.
2

Figure 2-21 Coral
IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage -
Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram Coral IPx 800X
2nd EXPANSION CAGE
Shelf Number: 2
SHARED
1
SERVICE Card Type: ..............
2
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5

3
..............
DIGITAL TRUNK

..............
5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12
Power Supply
2

Figure 2-22 Coral
IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage -
Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
Coral IPx 500X Shelf Number:
1st EXP. CAGE 1
Card Type: ..............
1
2
Card Type: ..............
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
3
DIGITAL TRUNK
Card Type: ..............

4
5
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............

6
Card Type: ..............

7
Card Type: ..............

8
Card Type: ..............

9
Card Type: ..............

10
Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS Type: ..............
PS500 AC / DC
Battery Pack
BATTipx Yes/No:
..............
for PS500 AC
2

Figure 2-23 Coral
IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage -
Peripheral Card
Placement Diagram
Coral IPx 500X Shelf Number:
2nd EXP. CAGE 2
Card Type: ..............
1
2
Card Type: ..............
SYNC SLOTS 4, 5
3
DIGITAL TRUNK
Card Type: ..............
4
5
Card Type: ..............
Card Type: ..............

6
Card Type: ..............

7
Card Type: ..............

8
Card Type: ..............

9
Card Type: ..............

10
Card Type: ..............
Power Supply
PS Type: ..............
PS500 AC / DC
Battery Pack
BATTipx Yes/No:
..............
for PS500 AC
2

Program Interface Device Connection
2.3
The data terminal or personal computer that is used as the Program

Interface (PI) device must be equipped with an RS-232E asynchronous
serial data interface. This interface can be configured for a data rate of
115200, 57600, 38400, 19,200, 9600, 4800, 1200, or 300 bps, 8 data bits,
1stop bit, and no parity bit or EVEN, ODD, mark, space, parity. The PI device
must use the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
character set. The earth ground connection to the PI device must be the
same earth ground connection supplied to the Coral system.
1. If the system includes a dedicated PI device on-site permanently, unpack this

device and prepare it for operation. Set the interface for a data rate of 9600 bits per
second, 8 data bits, 1stop bit, and no parity bit. (These are the default settings for
all serial programming ports of the Coral system.)
2. Obtain or prepare a serial data cable to connect the PI device to the KB0 serial
programming port on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card. The KB0 port end of
the serial programming cable requires a male DA-9P style connector, wired as
shown in either Figure 2-24 or Figure 2-25.
3. If the PI device uses a DB-25P or DB-25S connector, wire the connectors according
to the diagram in Figure 2-24. If the PI device is a personal computer equipped
with a DA-9P connector, wire the connectors according to the diagram in Figure
2-25.

4. For installations that have a permanent PI device, route the serial data cable from
the PI device through one of the cable routing slots on the side of the cage. Place
the serial data cable together with other cables entering the cage. Leave
approximately 24 inches (60cm) of cable on the front side of the cabinet so that it
reaches the front panel of the MEX-IP2 card installed on the control cage without
interfering with the insertion or removal of any circuit cards or power supplies.
2

Figure 2-24 25-Pin
Program Interface Device 13
Connections to KBO 25
5 - SIGNAL GROUND SIGNAL GROUND - 7

DATA SET READY - 6
4 - DATA TERMINAL READY
CLEAR TO SEND - 5
3 - TRANSMIT DATA
REQUEST TO SEND - 4
2 - RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE DATA - 3

TRANSMIT DATA - 2
1 14
1
KB0 PC Async. Serial Port

PROGRAMMING PORT or Async.Data Terminal
(USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR) (USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)
Figure 2-25 9-Pin

Program Interface Device 5 SIGNAL GROUND - 5
Connections to KBO 9 9
4 DATA TERMINAL READY - 4
3 TRANSMIT DATA - 3
2 RECEIVE DATA - 2
6 6
1 CARRIER DETECT - 1
KB0
PROGRAMMING PORT 9 PIN PC ASYNC. SERIAL PORT
(USE FEMALE CABLE 9 PIN CONNECTOR) (USE FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR)
2

Chapter 3
Initial Powerup Tests
3.1 Power Supply Test...............................................3-1

Coral
3.2 Common Control Test..........................................3-9
3.3 Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test ........3-19
3.4 Installation Wrap-up..........................................3-27

Cor

Power Supply Test
3.1
0
1 General
This Chapter provides information about initial tests that must be performed when
first installing a Coral IPx 800 system.
.
Before proceeding, verify that all internal power supplies and circuit cards in the Coral
system are only partially inserted into their respective card slots, with the front panels
protruding approximately 1 inch (2.5cm) from the front of the card cage.
The Coral IPx 800 can operate as an AC powered system or as a DC powered system.
For PS19 DC powered systems - skip to page 3-2
For PS19 DC-D powered systems - skip to page 3-4
For PS19 AC powered systems - skip to page 3-6
Power Supply Test

3
Initial Powerup Tests 3-1

0
2 PS19 DC Powered System

1. Verify that the ground wires and the power wires are properly connected.
See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
2. Verify on the cage rear panel that the POWER SUPPLY DUPLICATION connector
is not in use.
Connecting the POWER SUPPLY DUPLICATION connector (located on the cage rear
panel) for PS19 DC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 DC power supply is installed.
3. Turn ON the external 48VDC Main Power Supply (MPS) or battery charger and
close any fuse or circuit breaker required to supply 48 VDC to the Coral
IPx 800cage.
Electrical Hazard. Electrical currents in the system could cause shock, burn, or death.
Exercise extreme caution while opening the DC power cover and while performing the
power checks that follow.
4. Open the DC Power cover on the rear panel of the cage.

5. Measure the DC voltage entering the power input terminals. See figures on
page 2-22, DC Power Terminal Interconnection
page 2-23, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage
page 2-24, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack
Measure the voltage as follows:
Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the 48V RTN IN terminal.
Connect the negative lead to the –48V IN terminal.
Power Supply Test
Verify that the reading is 48 volt DC.

3

If a minus sign (–) appears in the meter display, the polarity of the 48VDC power to the
cage is reversed. Verify the meter settings and connections. If the meter is properly set
and connected, carefully examine the wiring between the external 48VDC power supply
and/or batteries, determine the location of the polarity reversal, and correct the wiring
error before continuing.
6. Verify that the PS19 DC power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
7. Gently insert the PS19 DC power supply completely into its card slot. Push
against the ejectors until the front panel of the power supply is flush with the
front frame of the card cage. A slight resistance can be felt as the multi-pin
connectors on the power supply meet the mating connectors on the backplane and
engage. Do not force the power supply into the slot. If more than slight resistance
is encountered, remove the power supply and examine the connectors for bent
pins or interfering debris.
8. Fasten the two screws located at the top and bottom of the unit front panel, thus
securing the card to the cage as well as grounding the unit.
Do not proceed until the screws of the power supply card have been fastened to the
cage. If the screws are not fastened, the power supply unit will not be grounded, and
could be subject to hazardous voltages.
9. Turn the PS19 DC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
Power Supply Test
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates,
see page 7-13, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC).
10. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 DC.
11. Repeat step 1 through step 10 for each Coral cage in the system.
12. Skip to page 3-9, Common Control Test.
3

0
3 PS19 DC-D Powered System

See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems.
2. Turn ON the external 48VDC Main Power Supply (MPS) or battery charger and
close any fuse or circuit breaker required to supply 48 VDC to the Coral
IPx 800cage.
Electrical Hazard. Electrical currents in the system could cause shock, burn, or death.
Exercise extreme caution while opening the DC power cover and while performing the
power checks that follow.
3. Open the DC Power cover on the rear panel of the cage.

4. Measure the DC voltage entering the power input terminals. See figures on
page 2-22, DC Power Terminal Interconnection
page 2-23, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Cage
page 2-24, Coral IPx 800 Power Wiring for One Rack
Measure the voltage as follows:
Connect the positive lead of the DMM to the 48V RTN IN terminal.
Connect the negative lead to the –48V IN terminal.
Verify that the reading is 48 volt DC.
If a minus sign (–) appears in the meter display, the polarity of the 48VDC power to the
cage is reversed. Verify the meter settings and connections. If the meter is properly set
and connected, carefully examine the wiring between the external 48VDC power supply
and/or batteries, determine the location of the polarity reversal, and correct the wiring
error before continuing.
Power Supply Test
5. Verify that the PS19 DC-D power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
3

6. Gently insert the PS19 DC-D power supply completely into its card slot. Push
8. Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator
is lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator
illuminates, see page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D).
9. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D.
Tip:
In addition, the PS19 DC-D unit needs to be checked to see that it can
supply another cage. See page 3-19, Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test
for further details.
Power Supply Test

3

0
4 AC Powered System
The PS19 AC internal circuitry automatically adjusts itself to the input voltage
(either 115 VAC or 230 VAC). No voltage adjustments need or be performed
during installation.
See page 2-17, Ground Wiring and page 2-25, Wiring AC Powered Systems.
is not in use.
panel) for PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 AC power supply is installed.
3. Verify that the AC voltage supplied by the AC receptacle is 115VAC or 230VAC.

4. See figures on
page 2-25, Coral IPx 800 Cage Rear Panel
page 2-26, Coral IPx 800 Power Connection for AC Systems
5. Insert the male plug of the AC power cord into the AC line outlet or primary
power receptacle designated for the system.
The AC power connector inside the cage includes dangerous currents when the AC
power cord is connected. See Figure 3-1.
Do not connect more than four cages to the same facilities AC fuse. Connecting more
than four cages to the same fuse could result in an overload within the building wiring. It
Power Supply Test
is the customer’s responsibility to supply the facilities AC fuse.

3

6. Verify that the PS19 AC power switch is turned OFF (downwards).
7. Gently insert the PS19 AC power supply completely into its card slot. Push
9. Turn the PS19 AC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates,
see page 7-49, Troubleshooting (PS19 AC), in Chapter 7.
10. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19 AC.
Power Supply Test
3

Figure 3-1 Internal View
of the Coral IPx 800 Cage Configuration
jumpers
Door release
mechanism
Power supply
multi-pin
connector
Multi-pin
connectors
for cards
AC power
supply
connector
(PS19 AC)
Grounding wire
(for door)
Power Supply Test
3

Common Control Test
3.2
This section deals with the Common Control Test.
Coral circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged or destroyed
by electro-static discharge (ESD).
1 Control Card Initialization

1. Remove power from the Coral system.
Verify that all the PS19 units in the system are turned OFF (downwards).
Inserting or removing the MEX-IP2 card into a cage that has been powered will damage
the card. Verify that the power supply unit is switched OFF before inserting the
MEX-IP2.
2. Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the strap.
3. Verify that all control and peripheral cards in the main cage and expansion cages
Common Control Test
protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

4. Remove the MEX-IP2 card from its slot and place it on a static protective surface.
5. Verify that the DBM/DBX or MAP/CLA baby cards are not attached to MEX-IP2
interface connectors P1, P2 or P3. See Figure 3-2 for the location of the memory
interface connectors. See Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5 for the MAP/CLA and
DBM/DBX cards.
3
If installed, remove the MAP/CLA and or the DBM/DBX baby cards, as described
on page 8-1, Common Control Cards.

6. Carefully remove the plastic insulation from under the lithium battery on the
MEX-IP2 card. See Figure 3-2.
7. Insert the MEX-IP2 card fully into its card slot.
8. Verify that the serial number on the SAU device matches the serial number on the
IMC8/IMC16 card (except for the last digit).
Contact your Coral manufacturer’s representative if the numbers do not match.
9. Attach the SAU to the connector on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 just below the
IMC8/IMC16 flash memory card. See Figure 3-3. Use a #2 (1/8 or 4mm)
straight-blade screwdriver to tighten the two screws securing the SAU to the
MEX-IP2 until snug.
10. Insert the IMC8/IMC16 flash memory card into the drive on the front panel of the
MEX-IP2 just above the SAU device. See Figure 3-3.
Insert the IMC8/IMC16 card with its data label facing right (that is, the control
cards exterior) so that the data can be read without removing the card.
11. Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 are set to the right.
12. Attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to the KB0 programming port
connector on the front side of the MEX-IP2 card. Verify that the PI device is
configured to match the data rate, word length, parity, and stop bits of the KB0
port. Default settings for KB0 are 9600 bps, 8 data bit, no parity, and 1 stop bit,
respectively.
13. Turn ON the power switch on the PS19 unit of the main cage.
14. On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green Power indicator is lit,
while the red Alarm indicator is not lit. If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
page 7-13, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC),
page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D),
page 7-49, Troubleshooting (PS19 AC), in Chapter 7.
15. On the front panel of the MEX-IP2, verify that the decimal point (green LED) in
the numeric display illuminates.
16. If the following message appears on the PI device and is repeated continuously:
Common Control Test
For SERVICE/SOFTWARE installation menu HIT <CTRL I> NOW

*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
NO CCS VERSION
The line that reads NO CCS VERSION indicates that no generic feature software
was detected in the IMC8/IMC16 card. To load generic feature software into the
IMC8/IMC16 card, follow the procedure in Section 4.1 - Generic Feature Software
3
Upgrade on page 4-1.

17. If the following message appears on the PI device during system start-up:
*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
CHECKING PROG-MEM
PROG-MEM IS O.K
CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CODING MEMORY IS O.K.
END CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
END CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
CHECKING SAU #
END CHECKING SAU #
Patch Loaded... !
CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CODING MEMORY IS O.K.
END CHECKING CODING MEMORY
CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
END CHECKING MEX CONTROLS
CHECKING SAU #
END CHECKING SAU #
CHECK CHECKSUM...
END CHECK CHECKSUM
And the following second message appears after two or three minutes, following several
Common Control Test
short messages that appear during system start-up:

Initializing CCS ...
Partial initialization phase starting
System configuration identified ......
CCS is on the air ......
(ROOT)
CCS xx.xx.xx
Copyright (c) 2001-yyyy ...............
3
NAME - (site name)

SAU # -

Do the following:
a. If the second message appears, the system initialized properly and is capable of
processing calls. The version number of the generic feature software is indicated
where the x's appear in the line that reads
CCS xx.xx.xx.
b. If the version number shown on the PI does not match the version number
printed on the IMC8/IMC16 flash card supplied with the system, perform the
procedure described in Section 4.1 - Generic Feature Software Upgrade on page
4-1, to install a new generic software version on the IMC8/IMC16 card.
18. Turn OFF (downwards) the power switch on the front panel of the PS19.
19. If the MAP/CLA and or the DBM/DBX cards are not used in the system, skip to
Step 27
20. Remove the MEX-IP2 card from it’s slot and place it on a static protective surface.
21. Some Coral systems may require a DBM baby card to provide additional database
memory storage for a large or complex configuration.
a. If a DBM card is supplied with the system, install a DBM baby card on the
MEX-IP2 card. See Section 8.2, MEX-IP2 on page 8-5 for details.
b. Carefully remove the plastic insulation from under the top contact of the
lithium battery holder on the MEX-IP2 card (refer to Figure 3-2).
22. If a MAP/CLA card is supplied with the system, install the MAP/CLA baby card
on the MEX-IP2 card (refer to Figure 3-4 and see Section 8.7, MAP on page 8-15 for
details).
23. Verify that the plastic insulator protecting the top contact of the battery holder on
the MEX-IP2 and DBX cards are removed. See Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-5.
24. Insert the MEX-IP2 card fully into its card slot in the main cage.
25. Verify that the DIP switches on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 are set to the right.
connector on front panel of MEX-IP2. Verify that the PI device is configured as in
Step 12
27. Insert the HDC card fully into its card slot in the main cage.
Common Control Test
28. In the main cage, turn ON the PS19 power switch, and verify that the green
Power indicator is lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
29. On the front panel of the MEX-IP2, verify that the decimal point (green LED) in
the numeric display illuminates.
3

30. Verify that the following two messages appear on the PI screen:
*************************
CHK RAM
END CHK RAM
Custom Init Code...
The second message may appear after two or three minutes, following several
short messages (as described in Step 17) that appear during system start-up:
CCS is on the air ......
(ROOT)
CCS xx.xx.xx
Copyright (c) 2001-yyyy .........................
NAME - (site name)
SAU # -
The second message indicates that the system has initialized properly and is
capable of processing calls. After entering the password, the version level of the
generic feature software is indicated where the x's appear in the line that reads
CCS xx.xx.xx.
31. Insert the PX card fully into slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage.
Common Control Test

3

Figure 3-2 MEX-IP2
Memory Interface
Connector Locations
P1
P2
DBM / MAP
Connector
1st DBX/
4th DBX/
CLA / MAP
Connector
P3
IMC8,16 Card
(Software & Database
Flash memory card)
2nd DBX/
3rd DBX
Connector
LIU
Front
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
LIU
Rear
Database Memory
Backup Battery
Common Control Test
BATTERY INSULATOR
(PULL AS SHOWN
TO REMOVE)
3

Figure 3-3 MEX-IP2
Front Panel MEX-IP2
Expansion Panel For CLA or MAP

Application cards
7-Segment Status Display

5VDC Indicator (Green)
LAN Indicator (Green)
Option DIP Switches Expansion
2-8 Always Set to the Right panel screws
1 Set to the Left for LAN Watchdog indicator (Red)
Connections Only
KB0 RS-232E Serial KB0
Programming Port Interface

Set DIP Switch# 1 to the
Right for PI-KB0 Connections
Reset CPU Pushbutton

RESET
Flash memory card

Release Button
IMC8,16 (Software and Database)

Flash memory card
RJ-45 Network Interface Connection(LIU) LAN

Set DIP Switch# 1 to the Left
for PI-LAN (LIU) Connections
SAU
Software Authorization
Unit (SAU) Connector
Common Control Test

3

Figure 3-4 MAP and
DBM Baby Card Layouts
ON
MAP/CLA S1
DIP switch selector OFF 1 2 3 4
Status indicator P2
LED MAP
Reset ON
RST 1 2 3 4
S1
pushbutton
Hard disk
Maintenance P6 position
RS-232 port
COM
Green LED indicator
RJ-45 LAN port LAN
Yellow LED indicator

U25 Hard disk
J2 connector
JU1
Reset pushbutton Status indicator LED
P1 Connector
MAP
U24 U25 U26 U27
U28 U29 U30 U31
DBM
Common Control Test
DBM-8
3

Figure 3-5 CLA and
DBX Baby Card Layouts
FCLA
CoraLINK
Status Indicator LED

LED
Compact
Reset Pushbutton RST
Flash Disk
(CFD)
memory
Maintenance
COM 1
RS-232 Port 6
68
le
du
ule Mo
od ore
RJ-45 Network AM C
CL
Interface Ethernet CF
LINE
10/100Base-T 100Base-T
DIP Switches Are All

Set To The Right For
Normal Operation
CLA
REMOVE
BEFORE
USE
Battery Insulator
DBX (pull As Shown To Remove)
Common Control Test

3

0
2 Memory Lithium Battery Condition Test

If the start-up tests detect that the voltage level of a lithium backup battery on the
MEX-IP2 or DBX card is insufficient to reliably maintain the memory contents in
the event of power failure, one of the following messages will appear:
MEX-IP - BATTERY LOW
or
J1 DOWN BATTERY LOW
These messages indicate that the MEX-IP2 card or DBX card battery has an insufficient
voltage level. The first message indicates that the battery located on the MEX-IP2 card has
an insufficient voltage level, while the second message indicates that the battery on a DBX
baby card (in this case, the card attached to memory connector J1) should be replaced. In
this event the Coral system database is in jeopardy of being lost during a power failure. If
this message appears, the database should be saved and the batteries replaced at the first
opportunity.
To ensure that the system database is not lost, save the database to the IMC8/IMC16 flash
memory card via the database controls branch of the system database (PI Route:
ROOT,0,10,2,2,0). See Chapter 4.3 of the Control Card Installation Manual for details.
If the system loses power or is reset for any reason and the database loses memory, the
system will copy the database from the IMC8/IMC16 card into database memory as the
system restarts.
Once the system database is safely saved on the IMC8/IMC16 card, power to the Coral
system may be turned off at a time that will cause the least disruption of service to the
user. At that time, the battery (or batteries) on the MEX-IP2 may be replaced and the
system restarted.
To replace the lithium battery, insert the new battery with the + (positive)
symbol appearing on top.
Common Control Test
Explosion and Environmental Hazards.

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly.
Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to requirements specified by the battery
manufacturer and/or local regulatory agencies.
3

Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test
3.3
1 Introduction
This section describes how to initialize the peripheral cards. Perform this section only
after the MEX-IP2 control card in the main cage has been initialized properly. If the
peripheral cards are inserted before the MEX-IP2 control card, they will not initialize
properly.
The card installation is described on page 3-20, Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card.
The Coral IPx 800 system peripheral cards installation and initialization procedure
includes the following steps:
1. Preparing for Initialization, on page 3-23
2. Main Cage Initialization, on page 3-23
3. First Expansion Cage Initialization, on page 3-24
4. Second Expansion Cage Initialization, on page 3-24
Before proceeding, verify that all the PS19 units in the expansion cages are turned

OFF.

Rules for Inserting a Coral Circuit Card
1. Connect the static dissipating wrist strap connector to the cage and wear the
strap..
Coral circuit cards contain static-sensitive circuitry that could be damaged or destroyed
by electro-static discharge (ESD).
2. To insert a circuit card completely into its slot, gently slide the card straight into
the card slot. A slight resistance is felt as the multi-pin connectors on the circuit
card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage.
3. Push against the ejectors until the front panel of the card is flush with the front
frame of the card cage.
Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is encountered,
remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or interfering debris.
Never place a card in a slot other than the dedicated one. Refer to Table 2-11 on page
2-63 to determine peripheral interface card types.
4. On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green Power indicator is lit,
while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.

If the red alarm indicator illuminates, see:
5. On the front panel of the peripheral card, verify that the red diagnostic LED (near
the top of the card) illuminates. The LED remains illuminated continuously until
the card receives its database from the system. After a few seconds, verify that the
LED extinguishes. An extinguished diagnostic LED indicates that the card has
initialized properly.
If the LED remains on continuously for more than two or three minutes, either
there is a conflict between the system database and its authorizations, or the card
3
may be faulty. Refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual for
further details on LED indication.

connector on the front panel of the MEX-IP2 if not already attached. The
installation of shared service and peripheral interface cards into a Coral system
has considerable impact on the system database. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Program
Interface & Database Reference Manual for more information. Using the PI, verify
that each of the parameters detailed below contain the appropriate information.
7. Access the card list branch of the PI (Route: CLIS) to verify that the cards are
properly recognized and initialized by the Coral IPx 800 main cage MEX-IP2
processor.
The following table appears on the PI terminal:
shelf/slot I_TYPE P_TYPE CDB version subversion status

0 / SLOT No. CARD_NAME CARD_NAME XXX XXX XXX ACTIVE
The following is an explanation of the CLIS fields:

Shelf Number ............ In Coral IPx 800 system, the main cage is designated shelf #0; the
first expansion cage is labeled shelf #1; the second expansion cage
is labeled shelf #2. the Master main cage is designated shelf #0;
the Slave main cage is designated shelf #8; the odd expansion
cages are labeled shelf #1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15; the even expansion
cage is labeled shelf #2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14.
Slot Number .............. Identifies the slot location of the indicated card for display. In the
main cage, the range of slot numbers is 1-8; in the expansion
cage, the range of slot numbers is 1-10.
I_TYPE........................ This field should show the required card name.
If the I_Type lists a different card type this indicates that the card
slot has been previously initialized by a different card type. That
card must be relocated to a clear card slot (where the I_Type field

shows NO_CARD) or the current card slot assignment must be
cleared throughout the PI.
P_TYPE....................... Shows the card type currently located in the slot.
CDB............................. Allows modifying the card database set assigned by the system.
When not applicable for the card, --- is displayed in this field.
Version, Subversion.. Provides information on the card software set loaded. For display
purposes only.
Status .......................... The information provided in this field helps you to troubleshoot
card initialization problems. See Table 3-1.
8. Verify that the cards are identified properly in the card list branch of the system
database (Route: CLIS). The different card slot STATUS messages are described
below in Table 3-1.
3

9. Verify that the STATUS field indicates ACTIVE for each of the cards installed.
If another message is displayed, see Table 3-1. For a complete list of card slot
status messages, see Chapter 6 of the Program Interface & Database Reference Manual.
Table 3-1 Card Slot .
Status Messages Displayed Description Technical

Message Recommendations
ACTIVE Initialization was successfully None

completed.
ACTIVE/P Card is partially active because there Readjust SIZES to

are not enough resources to support support unsupported
the other sub circuits on an sub circuits for
8DRCM/8DRCF card or not all tone 8DRCM/8DRCF card.
generators are being used on the iDSP Partial Active for the
card. iDSP card is not
critical. Readjust the
parameter value only
when needed.
REPLACED P_TYPE and I_TYPE are not Install proper card or

compatible. enter NO_CARD in
Both i_type and p_type fields should the I_TYPE option.
show the required card name.
The card slot has previously been
initialized by a different card type (see
the entry for I_TYPE field, as well).
WAIT_DB Card has not received database, or Continue waiting

has not reported initialization.
NO_RESOURCES Insufficient system memory to initialize Check SIZES

card.
FAULT HDLC problem Check HDLC wiring

UNAUTHORIZED The SAU ports are limited and Install an updated

therefore the card is not authorized for version of the SAU
use in this system. with the appropriate
amount of ports
added. Ask your
dealer for an
authorized upgrade.
3

0
2 System Initialization
Preparing for Initialization
After the software has been installed and initialized:
1. In the expansion cages, verify that the PS19 or PS500 power switch is in the OFF
position (turned downwards).
Before proceeding, verify that all power supply units within the expansion
cages are turned OFF. If the expansion cages are turned ON before the main
cage, the peripheral cards within the expansion cages will not initialize
properly.
2. Check the position of shared service and peripheral interface cards that will be
inserted into the system card cage. Observe any order previously directed or any
established convention of the distributor. See page 2-39, Shared Service and
Peripheral Interface Card Installation and use the Card Placement Diagram, as
described on:
page 2-42, Coral IPx 800M Main Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-43, Coral IPx 800X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-44, Coral IPx 800X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-45, Coral IPx 500X 1st Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
page 2-46, Coral IPx 500X 2nd Exp. Cage - Peripheral Card Placement Diagram
3. Verify that all shared service and peripheral cards in the main cage and expansion
cages protrude from the cage by approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
4. In the main cage, attach the Program Interface (PI) device cable to KB0

programming port connector on the front side of the MEX-IP2.
Main Cage Initialization
1. Verify that the MEX-IP2 control card has been initialized properly.
2. Insert the peripheral cards completely into their card slots. See page 3-20, Rules for
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card.
Insert the cards fully, one by one, from right to left (slot# 1-9) in adjacent card
slots, so that the installation corresponds with the uniform numbering plan.
3

First Expansion Cage Initialization
1. In a system with two expansion cages; verify that the PX card is fully inserted in
slot 1 of the first IPx 800X expansion cage.
2. Turn ON the power supply unit in the first expansion cage.
Turn on the power supply unit within the expansion cage only after powering
the main cage and verifying that the control card has initialized properly,
otherwise the cards in the expansion cages may not initialize properly.
4. On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green power indicator is lit,
while the red alarm indicator is not lit.
Second Expansion Cage Initialization

1. Turn ON the power supply unit in the second expansion cage.
Turn on the power supply unit within the expansion cage only after powering
the main cage and the first expansion cage and verifying that the control
card has initialized properly, otherwise the cards in the expansion cages may
not initialize.
3. On the front panel of the PS19 unit, verify that the green power indicator is lit,
while the red alarm indicator is not lit.
3

0
3 PS 19 DC-D Backup Power Supply Check

The purpose of this procedure is to check that the PS19 DC-D card is capable of
supplying power to another cage via a H719 DC-D cable (Catalog Number
7244-8001907).
To check the PS19 DC-D card, do one of the following:
If the system includes one PS19 DC-D card for every two cages, insert at least one
peripheral card into the cage that does NOT include the PS19 DC-D card. Verify
that the shared service card or peripheral card initializes.
If the system includes a PS19 DC-D for every cage (for backup), remove the H719
cable from the rear panel of one of the cages, and insert at least one peripheral
card or shared service card into a cage slot. Reconnect the H719 cable. Verify that
the card initializes.
For further information see page 7-33, Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D).

3

NOTES:
3

Installation Wrap-up
3.4
This section describes how to close all equipment and prepare the system for normal
operation.
1. Assemble the cage front door. See page 6-25, Assembling the Door.
2. Close the cage front door. See page 6-23, Closing the Door.
3. Close the MDF cover.
4. Repeat step 1to step 3 for all system cages.
5. Remove any other items from the shipping containers.
6. Remove all empty packages, crates, and debris.
7. Verify that you have provided all of the necessary instructions and documentation
to the system operator.
Once the system is completely installed and operating, it is no longer

necessary to keep the shipping containers.
3

NOTES:
3

Chapter 4
Software Installation
Procedure
4.1 Generic Feature Software ...................................4-1

Coral
4.2 MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes ...........................4-3
Cor

Generic Feature Software
4.1 Upgrade
1 Introduction
The IPx 800 is delivered to the site with factory-loaded software on IMC8/IMC16 card.
The IMC8 card is a 8MB flash memory card. The IMC16 card is a 16MB flash memory
card. See Chapter 4 of the Control Card Installation Manual for details. The IMC8/IMC16
card is installed on the MCP-IPx2 card.
The software initialization procedure is described in page 3-7, Common Control Test.
The IMC8/IMC16 card contains three types of data:
Generic Feature Software Version and Boot Code
Authorization
Database Backup
The IMC8/IMC16 card can be inserted into a PC slot using any PCMCIA application
adapter for loading a new Coral software version.
Whenever an updated version of the IPx 800 software is released, the upgrade is
delivered to the sites either on a disk, e-mail, or via other electronic media file transfer.
The upgrade is contained in a self-extracting compressed file that is specific for the
site.
The upgraded generic feature software must be extracted by a PC using the FMprog
tool, and then written from the PC hard disk into the IMC8/IMC16 card. The FMprog
is a tool for Coral dealers who install, upgrade and maintain Coral systems using flash
memory cards. See the FMprog PC-Utility Reference Manual. This reference manual Generic Feature Software Upgrade
describes how to install and operate the FMprog-Utility.
For instructions on how to save, restore, and backup using the IMC8/IMC16 flash
memory card, see Chapter 4.3 of the Coral Control Cards Installation Manual.
4
Software Installation Procedure 4-1

0
2 Upgrading Using FMprog PC-Utility
Use FMprog version 6 and later. Otherwise, the Coral will not initialize.
The upgrade of the generic feature software involves three main steps:
1. Installing the FMprog-Utility (version 6 and later)
2. Extracting the new Coral generic feature software file into the PC hard disk
3. Programming the new generic software upgrade to the IMC8/IMC16 card
The FMprog-utility can be used to backup the Coral software into PCMCIA cards. The
backup file is in a binary format and includes all the software components of the
specific Coral system from which it was copied (i.e. the Coral generic software version,
the switch authorization and the database). The manufacturer highly recommends to
keep a copy of the current files located at each customer site. Copies should be made
per customer site since each site has its unique set of software configuration, i.e. its
main software version, switch authorization and database, as well as specific Software
Authorization Unit (SAU) information. Should the need arise to reinstate or copy
system’s files, copies of all system’s files exist and are available for use via the
FMprog-Utility.
Use the FMprog-Utility to:
Manage your new database versions
Load Coral Generic Version, Authorization and Database information on to
flash memory cards
Extract Version, Authorization and Database information from source files
Generic Feature Software Upgrade
4

MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes
4.2 Numeric Status Display
1 Numeric Status Display

The MEX-IP2 numeric status display (see Figure 3-3 on page 3-15) indicates various
operating and error states of the Coral IPx 800 system, and it can provide valuable
information to assist in the maintenance of the system. Table 4-1 lists the various status
indications and their meaning.
A “.” (dot) appears during normal system operation.

A “0” appears on the status display whenever the system is off-line for maintenance
testing, or to install or update the generic software.
A “b” in the status display indicates that a backup battery on the MEX-IP2 or on a
DBX card no longer has sufficient energy to maintain the memory circuitry if system
power is lost. Each time a programming session is started from the PI, any faulty
battery is identified. The system database should be saved as soon as possible to an
IMC8/IMC16 unit, and the faulty battery must be replaced as soon as the system can
MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes Numeric Status Display

be shut down, to ensure continued system reliability.
An “E” indicates that the main processor has been interrupted to prevent database
corruption during a power fluctuation. This condition should clear itself momentarily.
An “L” indicates that the SAU cannot be detected at the SAU port on the front panel
of the MEX-IP2. Generally, this indicates that:
The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened to the MEX-IP2.
There is a mismatch between the number of the SAU device installed on the
card and the number of the SAU key.
A “P” appears during software backup.
Do not remove the IMC flash memory card from the MEX-IP2, push reset, or switch
power OFF when “P” is illuminated. Doing so might damage the IMC data.
4
Software Installation Procedure 4-3

Table 4-1 lists the MEX-IP2 card status display codes and their meaning.
All other error status indications generally indicate a more serious problem, and are
likely to be accompanied by considerable system malfunction. If an error indication
does not appear to affect system operation, save the database to DB0.DEF
immediately. For further details, see Chapter 4.3 of the Coral Control Cards
Installation Manual. When the system can be restarted without disrupting service,
press the reset pushbutton on the front panel of the MEX-IP2.
Table 4-1 MEX-IP2

Status Display Codes
Status Display System Status
. Normal System Operation
0 Off-Line Monitor/Diagnostics Mode
8 Appears briefly during powerup before other numbers
1,2,3,4,5,6 Appear Briefly During Initialization
b Lithium Backup Battery (MEX-IP2 or DBX) Low
C Flash Memory (IMC8) Checksum Error
E Map RAM, Coding PROM, or Memory Configuration Error
F AC Fail Active (System halted due to power fluctuation)

MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes Numeric Status Display
L The Software Authorization Unit (SAU) cannot be detected at

the SAU port on the front panel of the MEX-IP2. Generally, this
indicates that:
The device is no longer present or is not securely fastened
to the MEX-IP2.
There is a mismatch between the number of the SAU device
installed on the card and the number of the SAU key.
CAUTION
If the SAU is removed from the MEX-IP2, the Coral system
automatically ceases call processing after 14 days. Relevant
messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not
operate without the proper SAU.
See Chapter 5 of the Coral Control Cards Installation Manual.
P Programming the flash memory during software backup

4

Chapter 5
External Connections
5.1 Main Distribution Frame ......................................5-1

Coral
5.2 External Equipment .............................................5-5
5.3 Protection Devices ............................................ 5-11
5.4 Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits ......................5-17

5.5 Terminal Data Communication Ports .................5-21
Cor
5.6 I/O Connections Via Front Panel .......................5-25
5.7 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel .............5-43
5.8 I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors...........5-57

Main Distribution Frame
5.1
0
1 General
This chapter describes the MDF and the pinout connections to the IPx 800 cage and
external equipment. The main distribution frame (MDF) is the wiring interface for the
Coral IPx system and associated peripheral equipment.
The MDF is often located adjacent to other signaling systems, such as:
Paging and public address systems
Voice messaging systems
Alarm and monitoring systems
Closed circuit television
Property management systems
Building and energy management systems
Therefore, care should be taken to plan the MDF layout before fastening components
to the wall or mounting surface, such as:
Trunk circuits
Wired and wireless station equipment
Database programming terminals
Report printers
Music and/or audio sources
External public address or paging equipment

Recording devices
I/O Connections in the Coral

Most connections to the Coral cabinet are made using standard, 25-wire pair, I/O
(input/output) connectors to the Coral IPx 800 rear panel. Cables from the Coral rear
5
panel are connected to the MDF and from there to “punch blocks”. Individual trunk
and station interface circuits can then be cross-connected from Coral I/O punch blocks
External Connections 5-1

to other punch blocks that terminate trunk circuits, station wiring, and other external
equipment. See Figure 5-1.
In some cases, connections are made via RJ-45 or DA-15S connectors on the front panel
of a Coral circuit card. For example, the 2DT, UDT, UGW, IPG, PRI, T1, and 30T digital
trunk interfaces. See page 5-25, I/O Connections Via Front Panel on page 5-25. Similarly,
the KB0 database Programming Interface (PI) port appears on a DB9 connector on the
MEX-IP2 Common Control cards. Plan for permanent wiring to these card types
accordingly.
In some cases, connections are made via RJ-45 connectors on the rear panel of the card
cage. For example, the 2DT (Interface #0), PUGW, UGW-E, UGW (layout B1),
PRI (layout UDT “C”), T1 (layout UDT “C”), and 30T (layout UDT “C”). See page 5-43,
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel on page 5-25.
Tip:
It is recommended to terminate all the I/O connectors available in the
system on punch blocks at the MDF even if some cables are not initially
used. This saves time and effort when the system expands.
MDF Size and Location Considerations

In standard MDF wiring convention, ancillary equipment wiring (key systems, paging,
etc.) is placed to the left of the MDF. Coral I/O cables are placed next to them (on the
left). Next left are protection devices (if any). The outermost cables (on the left) are the
Building Entrance cables (UG, underground, demarcation point cables). Station and
other internal building wiring is placed on the right side of the MDF. This order
ensures the shortest path for block to block cross connect wiring and minimizes
overlap.
Tip:
Anticipated expansion should be taken into consideration (external and
internal cables, protective devices, station wiring, etc.) when planning the
MDF. If a system is installed at near capacity, the MDF should be laid out so
that a move to a larger Coral cabinet can be made easily.
5

Figure 5-1 MDF
Connections
Connection from the

front panel of a circuit card
Connections from
the rear panel of a Routing hole
Coral IPx cage
I/O cables from
upper connectors
-48V 48VRTN
I/O cables from

lower connectors
to CO
RJ45 to
Ethernet
network
5

Improper TIP and Ring Wiring
Due to the high speed digital signaling over the wire pair, it is important to verify that
the wiring is free of potential problems. The wire pair feeding the terminals must be
low capacitance, continuously twisted wire.
The wire gage and type should be consistent for the entire loop length. More than one
type or gage of wire spliced together in the same loop will reduce the maximum
possible loop length of the station or trunk.
Always match the twisted pair of a loop to corresponding tip and ring connections. Do
not connect the wires of the same twisted pair to different tip and ring connections.
See Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Twisted Pair CORAL STATION WIRING or

TIP and Ring Wiring I/O PUNCH BLOCK TRUNK NETWORK INTERFACE
Detail TIP CORRECT CONNECTION TIP
RING RING
TIP TIP
RING RING
TIP INCORRECT CONNECTION TIP
RING RING
TIP TIP
RING RING
RING RING
RING RING
TIP TIP
RING RING
TIP TIP
RING RING
5

External Equipment
5.2
0
1 Station Equipment
Wired Stations
Connections to Coral IPx 800 system station equipment are established by
cross-connecting the station circuit from the appropriate Coral IPx 800 I/O cable punch
block to the corresponding station wiring punch block.
Table 5-1 lists the various station interface cards available for the Coral system, the
type of station equipment that the card supports, and the number of wire pairs
required by the station interface.
Station wiring between the Coral IPx 800 system MDF and the station equipment
should contain at least 2, and preferably 4 wire pairs to ensure adequate wiring
capacity. At the station location, the station wiring should be terminated with a
modular, six position, telephone jack, containing at least 4 conductors (pins 2, 3, 4, and
5).
Figure 5-3 illustrates typical jack configurations with wire designations for four station
types:
2-wire SLT single-line telephones and digital station sets (FlexSet, APDL, CPA,
GKT, DKT, DST, 2-wire DIM, and VDM) need only connect Tip [T] and Ring [R] or
<UpA> and <UpB> as shown.
FlexSet 280 series or FlexSet APDL units with PEX or PEX+APA, DKT 2000 sets
with PEX or APA, or VDM need an extra 2 wires when power is supplied through
the line connector. The polarity of this connection is irrelevant. When using the
TPS (single unit Telephone Power Supply), no additional wires are required. EKT
designations are listed under the wire color in plain text, VDK, 4W-DIM, and TIM
External Equipment
designations are listed in parentheses ( ).

For peripheral device installation, refer to the Coral Terminal Equipment Installation
Manual”.
To prevent a potential shock hazard to station users and damage to the system, make
sure that station circuits extended over cables that exit the building are adequately
protected from lightning and surge currents. See Protection Devices on page 5-11 for
5
protective device specifications.

Table 5-1 Station
Station Interface Supported Station Equipment Pairs
Interface Wire Pair
Requirements Card Type Required
8SM Standard Magneto (Field) Telephone Sets 1
8SA, 8SAipx, Standard Single-Line Telephone (SLT) Sets, 1

8SLS, 8SLSipx, SLT Sets with Message Waiting Lamp
16SAipx, 16SLS,
16SLSipx, 16SH-LL,
24SA, 24SLS,
4SH/S*, 8SH/S*
8SFT, 8SFTipx, FlexSet, APDL, CPA, GKT, DKT, DST, APA, PEX, 1
16SFT, 16SFTipx, PEX/APA
24SFT,
8SKD*, 8SVD*, FlexSet 280 series with PEX, 2
8SDT*,
FlexSet 280S/APDL with PEX or PEX/APA,
16SKD*, 16SDT*,
24SDT* DKT 2000/APDL with PEX or APA,
CPA;
for optional external power via line connector pins

2 and 5 (see Coral Terminal Equipment Installation
Manual).
2SK*, 4SK*, 8SK** EKT*, VIC* (Vision Impaired Console), KSI*, EIS*, 2
ACC, ACC-R, SDU, QLD, QND Special Application
Devices
2SD*, 8SD* VDK*, 4W-DIM*, TIM*, CoraLAN*. 2
SKW/x RBS (Radio Base Station) for CoralAIR wireless 2

handset
8SKK, 16SKK RBS (Radio Base Station) for FlexAir wireless 1

handset
FlexSet-IP 280S, LAN connection 2

T207S, T208S,
T207M, T208M, With power over LAN type-A 4
Coral Sentinel
* discontinued, no longer available

External Equipment
5

Figure 5-3 Modular
Wired Station Jack
Wiring Diagram 654321
Pin 2 Pin 5
Black Yellow
DT (DTR), DR (DRR),
FlexSet/DKT + 48VDC FlexSet/DKT - 48VDC
Pin 3 Pin 4
Red Green
AR (DRT), AT (DTT),
<UpB> [R] [T] <UpA>
Pin 3 Pin 4
Red Green
New Style Surface Jack AR (DRT), AT (DTT),
<UpB> [R] [T] <UpA>
Pin 2 Pin 5
Black Yellow
DT (DTR), DR (DRR),
SE625B Wall Jack

Pin 4 Pin 3
Green Red
AT (DTT), AR (DRT),
<UpA> [T] <UpB> [R]
Pin 2 Pin 5
Black Yellow
DT (DTR), DR (DRR),
Western Electric 42A Modular Cover
Wht / Blu Wht / Blu

AT (DTT), AT (DTT),
Grn / Wht [T] <UpA> Org / Wht [T] <UpA>
DR (DRR),
External Equipment
Blu / Wht DR (DRR),

Blu / Wht
Wht / Grn AR (DRT), AR (DRT),
Wht / Org
DT (DRT), [R] <UpB> [R] <UpB>
DT (DRT),
TIA T568B (AT&T) TIA T568A
5

Wireless and VoIP Stations
The FlexAir handset and the FlexSet-IP 280S models are not connected via the MDF.
Related Documentation
For further information about Coral voice terminals not covered by this section,
consult the following documentation.
Station Type Manual
CoralAIR (wireless) handset, CoralAIR (Wireless Systems) Installation Manual

SKW, RBS
FlexAir (wireless) handset, FlexAir (Wireless Systems) Installation Manual

SKK, RBS
IP device Coral VoIP Installation Manual

FlexSet-IP 280S,
Coral Teleport
Peripheral device Coral I, II, III Installation Manual, Chapter 11

DKT/DST/DPEM
Peripheral device Coral Terminal Equipment Installation Manual

FlexSet 120/280/APDL series
External Equipment
5

2 Trunk Circuits
Generally, trunk circuits are connected to the Coral IPx 800 system simply by
cross-connecting the trunk interface circuit of a Coral trunk card to the point of
demarcation where the trunk circuits appear from the telephone utility company
(telco). For more specific data regarding all trunk types supported by the Coral IPx 800
system, refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
Protective devices are regularly provided by the telecommunication connections on
circuits originating outside the building. Determine if the telecommunication
connection protective devices meet the specifications described in the following
section: Protection Devices on page 5-11. If not, install secondary protector devices that
meet these specifications. To be effective, the protective devices, whether telco or
customer provided, must be grounded to the same ground point as the Coral system.
Figure 5-4 illustrates typical trunk circuit wiring from building entrance to the Coral
IPx 800 system.
Figure 5-4 Typical Trunk

Circuit Wiring Diagram
CORAL SYSTEM
Ground I/O Champ

Terminal Connector
RJ-21X or Similar
Interface Bridging
Clips
Demarcation
Lightning &
Feed Block
Protector
I/O Block
Interface)
(Network
CORAL
TELCO
Circuit
TELCO
Surge
Ground Bus
Earth
Ground
External Equipment
5

3 Auxiliary Connections
Connections to the auxiliary (KB1, KB2, KB3, Music, Page, and Relays) are made with
a standard 25-wire pair, I/O (input/output) ChampTM connectors to the Coral IPx 800
rear panel. Cables from the Coral rear panel are connected to the MDF and from there
to “punch blocks”. Individual auxiliary interface circuits can then be cross-connected
from Coral IPx 800 I/O punch blocks to other punch blocks that terminate music
circuits, relay wiring, and other external equipment.
For more specific data regarding all auxiliary interface circuits (8DRCF, 8DRCM and
RMI) supported by the Coral IPx 800 system, refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral
Cards Installation Manual.
Auxiliary Cards I/O Connections

8DRCF, 8DRCM cards .........................................5-105
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................5-107

External Equipment
5

Protection Devices
5.3
0
1 Introduction to Primary and Secondary Protection Devices
Any circuit connected to the Coral system that is exposed to lightning or electrical
hazards must be protected with approved lightning and surge protection devices to
avoid potentially lethal hazards to all users.
Secondary protection devices should be installed on any circuit requiring primary

lightning protection, which connects electrically to an interface of the Coral system.
Lightning and over-voltage arrestors are used to protect the user and the system from
lightning and other electrical hazards that may occur on external circuits connected to
the system.
Any cable that passes through open air, under open ground (i.e.: across parking lots,
fields, road beds, etc.), across a bridge, or along the exterior or under the non-metallic
roof of a building, is exposed to lightning and electrical hazards.
Telephone circuit protection devices fall into two distinct design categories:
Primary (lightning) protection devices which limit voltages on a telephone circuit
below levels which do not present a hazard to the user. (Table 5-2 lists minimum
Protection Devices
specifications)
Secondary (surge and impulse) protectors that further limit voltages on a
telephone circuit to prevent damage to electronic equipment. (Table 5-3 lists
minimum specifications)
Primary protection absorbs the major impact of infrequent, but dangerous, catastrophic
surges; while secondary protection suppresses constantly occurring impulses which,
5
while not dangerous, can cripple valuable, and in many cases, essential
communications facilities.

Generally, leased or switched circuit facilities provided by the local telephone utility
company are equipped with primary protection devices installed with the circuit.
However, privately owned aerial or buried cable feeding from one building to another
may not be equipped with protection devices. Always consult with whomever
provided the circuits to determine whether protection devices are present, and if so,
what type. Never assume that protection devices have been provided by another party,
or that existing protection devices are adequate.
The secondary protection has to include a leakage current protector in series of every
wire, tip and ring, on every port that is either connected to the public telephone
network or to an out of the building cable. The requirement is in accordance with UL®
Specification 60950, Third Edition or CSA C22.2 No. 60950. The required protectors can
be mounted directly on a 66 block in the MDF.
Table 5-2 Telephone

Specification Measurement
Circuit Primary
Lightning / Surge
Arrestor Device Construction
Specifications Primary Element 3 Electrode Gas Tube
Fail-safe Metallic Shunt 1.0Ω to Ground Max.
Vent Safe Spark Gap Per UL 497
Heat Coil (recommended) 1.0A 100 Sec. Max.
Clamp Points (per REA PE-80)

DC. 350VDC Max.
2kV/S. 400VDC Max.
100V/µS 500VDC Max.
10kV/µS 800VDC Max.
Vent Safe @ 100V/µS 1600VDC Max.
DC Impulse Current (8x20µS wave) 10KA Nom.
AC Discharge Current (60Hz/1S) 10A Nom.
DC Holdover (per IEEE 465.1) 160VDC Max.

Protection Devices
5

Table 5-3 Telephone
Device Type Specification Measurement
Circuit Secondary
Protection Device
Specifications Clamp Points
DC. 230VDC Max.
2kV/S 230VDC Max.
100V/µS 100VDC Max
Surge/Impulse 10kV/µS 30VDC Max.
Protector
Response Time 5nS Max.
Series Resistance 15Ω Max.
Acceptance UL Listed
Voltage Rating 600VDC Min.
Sneak Current
Current Rating 350mA Max.
Protector
Fusing Time Characteristics

100% of Rating 4 Hr. Min.
150% of Rating 10 Sec. Nom., 210 Sec. Max.
Protection Devices
5

2 Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting
To prevent serious damage to the Coral system, the analog trunk and station circuits,
whose cables are laid outside the building, must be protected from the electrical peaks
caused by lightning. Lightning Arrestors must be mounted on the MDF where
telephone circuits are cross-connected.
Figure 5-5 Magazine 10

Surge Arrestor and
Voltage Protectors
1 2
3
4
5 6
7 8
9
10
Krone
Surge Voltage Block
Protector Magazine 10
Surge Arrestor
The mounting procedure is as follows:

1. Identify the MDF disconnecting strips used for telephone connections.
2. Place a Magazine 10 Surge Arrestor (CN# 7244-3190009) on each MDF strip used
for telephone. See Step 1 in Figure 5-6.
3. Use the relevant tables from page 5-57, I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors to
identify the MDF cross connection points that are used for each telephone. (The
connecting cables will be visible).
4. Insert a Surge Voltage Protector (CN# 7244-2350001) in the magazine 10 surge
arrestor where a telephone is connected. See Step 2 in Figure 5-6.
Protection Devices
5

Figure 5-6 Connecting
Surge arrestor to MDF
Step 2
Use a Surge Voltage
1
Step
Mount a Magazine
Protector for 10 Surge Arrestor on
cross-connected each MDF disconnection
telephone circuits only. strip used for telephone
circuit cross-connections.
Add/remove the units
as required. (CN# 7244-3190009)
(CN# 7244-2350001)
Protection Devices
5

NOTES:
Protection Devices
5

Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits
5.4
With the installation of trunk cards that support the PF (Power Fail) transfer option,
four trunks per trunk card may be directed to station sets if power to the Coral system
is interrupted. This arrangement, referred to as power failure transfer, completely
bypasses the system, allowing specific stations to originate outgoing calls and/or
continue answering incoming calls.
0
1 Physical Connection
Stations
Both SLT (single line telephone) sets, and special EKT-PF1 telephones may be used as
power failure stations. Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 illustrate wiring interconnections
between the trunk card, station card, and an SLT and EKT-PF station set, respectively.
Coral FlexSet, GKT, DKT and DST cannot be used as power failure stations.
Trunks
The following Analog Trunk Peripheral cards support Power Fail Transfer:
The following four-trunk cards, each provides four (4) ports with PF transfer:
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4TPF, 4T/S PF-G, 4T/S PF-ES, 4TMR-PF, 4TMR-PF-G,

4TMR/S-12PF-ES, 4TMR/S PF-G, 4TMR/S-50/16PF-G, 4TMR/S-12/16PF,
4TMR-12/16PF, 4ALS, 4ALS/M
The following eight-trunk cards, each provides four (4) ports with PF transfer:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8TPF, 8T/S-PF, 8T/S-PF-G, 8ALS, 8ALS/M,
NOTE: only circuits 2, 3, 4 and 5 support power failure transfer.
For further information on these trunk interface cards see Coral Service and Peripheral
Cards Manual.
5
1. discontinued, no longer available

0
2 Database Programming
To use the power failure transfer features of the Coral system, the station dials
numbers to which power fail trunks transfer should be entered in the system database.
Refer to Power Fail Trunk Definition in Chapter 8 - Program Interface Reference Manual, for
more information.
Power Failure Trunk Definition (Route: TRK,4)
FROM/TO DIAL#
Enter the required range of Loop Start/Ground Start analog trunks.
DEST
Set this parameter to determine the power fail station system dial number to be
connected to the trunk during power failure.
5

Figure 5-7 Power Fail
Wiring To Single-Line
(500/2500) Telephone Set
PSTN
Central Office
Lightning
Protection
TTx
TRx
Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000
Trunk
Circuit
With STTx
PF STRx
Option
SCTx
SCRx
8/24SA,
8/16/24SLS, STy
16SH/S-LL SRy
R (ring)
Green
T (tip)
Red
Modular
Jack
Ground
Start
Button
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
2500 * 0 #
Single-Line Set
5

Figure 5-8 Power Fail
Wiring To EKT-PF1 Set
(Discontinued)
CENTRAL
OFFICE
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
TTx
TRx
Trunk STTx
Circuit STRx
with PF
CORAL Option SCTx
SYSTEM SCRx
ATy
ARy
2SK
4SK
DTy
8SK
DRy
YELLOW
GREEN
BLACK
MODULAR
RED
DR
AR
DT
AT
JACK
VOL VOL
Power Fail
EKT301PF ABC DEF Ground-Start
1 2 3
EKT321PF GHI
4
JKL
5
MNO
6 Button
POWER FAIL PRS
7
TUV
8
WXY
9
EKT SET OPER

0
5
1. discontinued, no longer available

Terminal Data Communication Ports
5.5 RS-232E
The Coral switching system is capable of switching digital data information as well as
voice signals. Coral system data communications devices are available for packet
switched data for low volume applications. The packet data communications are
provided using the APA (Application Processor Adapter), PEX+APA or APDL
(Applications Processor Data Link). The data communication devices provide a serial
interface wired as Data Communications Equipment (DCE). That is, they transmit data
is data to the APA/APDL, and receive data from the device.
The APA provides a proprietary data link to an external Applications Processor. The
link uses an asynchronous RS-232E (V.24) serial data interface, operating at a data rate
of up to 19.2Kbps. The interface appears at a:
DB-25S connector on the rear panel of the APDL and DKT2000 with an APA
RJ-45 jack connector on the rear panel of the FlexSet 80, GKT, FlexSet APDL,
FlexSet APA or FlexSet PEX+APA.
Through the link, a proprietary signaling protocol allows the Coral system Master
Processor to send call status messages to the Applications Processor, and the
Applications Processor to send call control instructions to the APA / APDL.
Application processors available for the Coral system include the Computerized
Attendant Position (CAP), the ACD Group Supervisor and Management position,
Coral CallMaster (CCM), Coral World Wide Office (WWO), TAPIdriver, GKT
Terminal Data Communication Ports RS-232E

PC-Utility, or any other application that complies with proprietary API products.
Use the following RS-232 cables:
CN#7244-8001195 for DKT2000 with APA or APDL
CN#7244-6914055 for FlexSet 80, GKT, FlexSet APDL, FlexSet APA or
FlexSet PEX+APA.
Tables below lists the pin designations for the RS-232 interface module of the various
Coral terminals.
5

FlexSet APA, PEX+APA and APDL RS-232E Port
The serial interface of the FlexSet APA port via the provided RS-232 cable
(CN# 7244-6914055) conforms to the EIA RS-232E specification, and is wired as a Data
Communications Equipment (DCE) device, using a D-type (female) connector. The
interface allows connection of a common, asynchronous CTI products such as the
CCM, CAP, FlexCT PathFinder, etc.
Figure 5-9 shows use of the pin number and function assignments on the FlexSet APA
cable.
Figure 5-9 Coral

FlexSet APA/APDL RS-232 cable CN#7244-6914055
RS-232E Cable
Connections NC 9
APDL Clear To Send (CTS) 8
RS-232 orange 8
brown 7 Request To Send (RTS) 7
1 8 Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 9
8 green 6
gray 5 Signal Ground (GND) 5
yellow 4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4
1
black 3 Transmit Data (TR) 3 6
RJ-45 plug (male) blue 2 Receive Data (RD) 2
RJ-45 socket (female) clip at rear
red 1 Data Carrier Detector (DCD) 1
external view
To FlexSet To Server/PC Serial Port COM ½

APDL RS-232 (9 pin female connector)
Table 5-4 Coral FlexSet

Pin Number
APA/APDL RS-232E
Interface Pin Functions
RJ-45 9-Pin
Pin Designation Connector D-Type Function
Data Carrier Detector (DCD) 2 1

Receive Data (RD) 5 2 Output from APA
Transmit Data (TR) 6 3 Input to APA
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 3 4 Input to APA
Signal Ground (GND) 4 5 Signal Return
Data Set Ready (DSR) 1 6 Output from APA
Request to Send (RTS) 8 7 Input to APA
Clear to Send (CTS) 7 8 Output from APA
Not Connected (NC) 9 Not used

5

FlexSet 80 (GKT) RS-232E Port
Figure 5-10 FlexSet 80 or

GKT RS-232E (v.24) Pin NC 9
Functions GKT
orange 8 Clear To Send (CTS) 8
RS-232
brown 7 Request To Send (RTS) 7
1 8 Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 9
8 green 6
gray 5 Signal Ground (GND) 5
yellow 4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4
1
black 3 Transmit Data (TR) 3 6
RJ-45 plug (male) blue 2 Receive Data (RD) 2
RJ-45 socket (female) clip at rear
red 1 Data Carrier Detector (DCD) 1
external view
To GKT To PC Serial Port COM 1/2

RS-232 (9 pin female connector)
DKT2000 with APA/APDL RS-232E Port
Table 5-5 DKT2000

with APA/APDL RS-232E Pin Designation Pin # Function
(V.24) Interface Module
Transmit Data 2 Input to APA/APDL
Pin Functions
Receive Data 3 Output from APA/APDL
Request to Send 4 Input to APA/APDL
Clear to Send 5 Output from APA/APDL
Data Set Ready 6 Output from APA/APDL
Signal Ground 7
Carrier Detect 8 Output from APA/APDL
Data Terminal Ready 20 Input to APA/APDL

5

NOTES:
5

I/O Connections Via Front Panel
5.6 For Coral Interface and Control Cards
1 General
The I/O connections of the following interface cards are performed via cables
connected to their front panel:
2DT Card (PRI-23, PRI-30, T1, 30T, or 30TM Configuration) on page 5-27
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card on page 5-29
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card on page 5-33
DPC Card (Discontinued) on page 5-37
UGW Card on page 5-38
IPG Card on page 5-41
I/O Connections Via Front Panel For Coral Interface and Control Cards
PUGW, UGW-E and UGW cards include front panel and rear panel I/O
options. However, there are various factors involved. Therefore, their
description is not included in this section. For details, see the Coral VoIP
Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual.
8SKK and 16SKK cards include front panel I/O options. However, there are
various factors involved. Therefore, their description is not included in this
section. For details, see the FlexAir Installation Procedure and Hardware
Reference Manual.
2SKW and 4SKW cards include front panel I/O options. However, there are
various factors involved. Therefore, their description is not included in this
section. For details, see the CoralAIR Installation Procedure and Hardware
Reference Manual.
5

0
2 Connections on the Cage Rear Panel

In the Coral IPx 800 the I/O connections the following cards may be connected via the
cage rear panel, with an RJ-45 connector for each card slot.
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT “C” and later) on page 5-48
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT “C” and later) on page 5-49
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E on page 5-50
5

0
3 2DT Card (PRI-23, PRI-30, T1, 30T, or 30TM Configuration)

The external network connections to the 2DT digital circuit can be made via the RJ-45
telephony connectors on the front and rear panels. This section describes the
connections to the front panel. See Table 5-6, Figure 5-11, and Figure 5-12. For further
information on fabricating the network interface connection, refer to the Coral Service
and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
2DT RJ-45 Network Connector Pinout
Table 5-6 2DT Network RJ-45 Pin # Nomination Functions

Interface Connections
Pin 1 RxB Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 2 RxA Receive Data (tip) from Network
Pin 3 Shield Cable Shield, GND
Pin 4 TxB Transmit Data (ring) to Network
Pin 5 TxA Transmit Data (tip) to Network.
Pin 6 — Not Used
Pin 7 — Not Used
Pin 8 — Not Used
Figure 5-11 2DT RJ-45

Interface Connector PIN 12345678 1 - RxB
Assignment 2 - RxA
3 - Shield (GND)
4 - TxB
5 - TxA
RJ-45
Connector
Due to logistical requirements, the card is labelled: "PRI-2DT” ,

on the front panel and on attached shipping documentation.
5

Figure 5-12 2DT Interface
Connections to the
PSTN/LTU/CSU
2DT
Card status
Indicator
L R C G
O A R E
S I C N RJ-45
0
Trunk alarm status 1 Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 RxB
Pin 2 RxA
#0
RJ-45 Pin 3 Shield (GND)
network interface Pin 4 TxB
connectors #1 Pin 5 TxA
Pin 6 Not Used
Pin 7 Not Used
Pin 8 Not Used
Maintenance port
RS-232 serial
9-pin male
Front and Rear Panel Network Interface Connections

The rear panel includes one RJ-45 connector per card slot. Therefore, only one interface
can be connected to the rear panel (interface #0).
Verify that interface #0 is not connected from the front and rear panels
simultaneously.
Table 5-15 and Figure 5-32 on page 5-47 describe the possible network interface
connections from the card front panel and the cage rear panel.
5

0
4 PRI-23, PRI-30 Card

The I/O connections of the following PRI options are described below:
PRI (Layout A&B)................ page 5-29

PRI (Layout UDT)................ page 5-30
For further information, on how to make the connection, refer also to the
Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
PRI (Layout A & B)
Table 5-7 PRI-23, DA-15S Pin # Nomination Function

PRI-30 (layout A&B)
Network Interface Pin 1 Tx A Transmit Data (tip) to Network.
Connections
Pin 9 Tx B Transmit Data (ring) to Network
Pin 3 Rx A Receive Data (tip) from Network
Pin 11 Rx B Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 8, 15 GND Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Pin 13 –48VDC Power for CSU/LTU from Layout B and later
Figure 5-13 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout A&B) DA-15S D-TYPE
DA-15S Interface
Connector PIN
Assignment
GND (Shield) 15 8 GND (Shield)
-48 VDC 13 *
Rx B 11
3 Rx A
Tx B 9
1 Tx A
* From Layout B and Later

5

PRI (Layout UDT)
The external network connections to the PRI-23 and PRI-30 (layout UDT B & C) digital
circuit are made via one of the two connectors available at the front panel:
DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-8 and Figure 5-14).
RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-8 and Figure 5-15).
Do not use both connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-16 describes the optional connection cable (H-UDT) from the front panel to the
LTU/CSU, towards PSTN, CN# 7244-6914040.
Figure 5-17 describes the connection from the front panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Table 5-8 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT) DA-15S RJ-45 Nomination Functions
Network Interface Pin # Pin #
Connections
Pin 11 Pin 1 RxB Receive Data (ring) from Network

Pin 3 Pin 2 RxA Receive Data (tip) from Network
Pin 8 Pin 3,6 Shield Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Pin 9 Pin 4 TxB Transmit Data (ring) to Network
Pin 1 Pin 5 TxA Transmit Data (tip) to Network.
Pin 13 Pin 7 -48VDC Power for CSU/LTU
Pin 15 Pin 8 GND Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
2,4,5,6,7,10,12,14 Not Used Not Used
Figure 5-14 PRI-23,

1 - RxB
PRI-30 (layout UDT)
RJ-45 Interface 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 2 - RxA
Connector PIN
Assignment 3 - Shield
4 - TxB
5 - TxA
6 - Shield
RJ-45
7 - -48VDC
Connector
8 - GND
5

Figure 5-15 PRI-23,
PRI-30 (layout UDT)
DA-15S Interface
Connector PIN GND 15 8 Shield
Assignment
-48 VDC 13
Rx B 11
3 Rx A
Tx B 9
1 Tx A
DA-15S D-TYPE Connector
Figure 5-16 PRI-23,

C
PRI-30 (layout UDT)

DA-15S to LTU/CSU
Connection Cable
1 8
10 meters 9 15
Slide Latch Down
to Lock
Up to Release
GND
15
14
-48 VDC
13
12
Rx B (Ring)
11
10
Tx B (Ring)
9
SHIELD GND
8 8
8
15 -48 VDC 7
7
SHIELD 6
6
Rx A (Tip) 5
5
Rx B (Ring) 4
4
Rx A (Tip) SHIELD 1
9 3 3
1 Tx A (Tip)
2 2 8
Tx A (Tip) Tx B (Ring)
DA-15P 1 1
D-Type Plug RJ-45 Plug
to PRI, T1, 30T to CSU/LTU
Front Panel towards PSTN
10 meters Lengths
5
H-UDT Cable
CN#7244-6914040

Figure 5-17 PRI-23,
PRI-30 (layout UDT)
Interface Connections to RJ-45
the PSTN/LTU/CSU
Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 RxB
PRI-23 PRI-30
Pin 2 RxA
Card Pin 3 Shield
Status Pin 4 TxB
Indicator
L R C G L R C G Pin 5 TxA
O A R E O A R E
Trunk S I C N S I C N Pin 6 Shield
Alarm
Status
Pin 7 -48VDC
Indicators Pin 8 Ground
RJ-45
RJ-45
DA-15S D-Type
DA-15S D-Type
Network
Interface
Connectors
DA-15S D-Type
Pin # Nomination
Pin 11 RxB
Pin 3 RxA
Pin 8 Shield
Pin 9 TxB
Pin 1 TxA
Pin 13 -48VDC
Pin 15 Ground
Pin 2,4,5,6, Not Used
7,10,12,14
DA-9S D-Type
DA-9S D-Type
Maintenance
Port
5

0
5 T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card

The I/O connections of the following T1 and 30T options are described below:
T1 and 30T (Layout A&B)................ page 5-33

T1 and 30T (Layout UDT)................. page 5-34
T1, 30T/x, 30T (Layout A & B) [discontinued]
Table 5-9 T1, 30T

Pin No Name Signal
(layout A&B) Network
Pin 1 Tx Tip Send Data
Pin 9 Tx Ring Send Data
Pin 3 Rx Tip Receive Data
Pin 11 Rx Ring Receive Data
Pin 14,15 Ground Cable Shield
Figure 5-18 T1, 30T

(layout A&B) RJ-45
Interface Connector PIN
Assignment
15
GND& Shield
14
Rx RING 11 3 Rx TIP
Tx RING
9 Tx TIP
1
DA-15S D-TYPE
5

T1, 30T/x, 30T (Layout UDT)
The external network connections to the T1 and 30T digital circuit are made via one of
the two connectors available at the front panel:
DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-10 and Figure 5-19).
RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-10 and Figure 5-20).
Do not use both connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-21 describes the optional connection cable (H-UDT) from the front panel to the
LTU/CSU, towards PSTN, CN# 7244-6914040.
Figure 5-22 describes the connection from the front panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Table 5-10 T1, 30T

(layout UDT) Network DA-15S RJ-45 Nomination Functions
Interface Connections Pin # Pin #
Pin 11 Pin 1 Rx Ring Receive Data from Network

Pin 3 Pin 2 Rx Tip Receive Data from Network
Pin 8 Pin 3,6 Shield Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Pin 9 Pin 4 Tx Ring Transmit Data to Network
Pin 1 Pin 5 Tx Tip Transmit Data to Network.
Pin 13 Pin 7 -48VDC Power for CSU/LTU
Pin 15 Pin 8 GND Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
2,4,5,6,7,10,12,14 Not Used Not Used
Figure 5-19 T1, 30T 1 - Rx Ring

(layout UDT) RJ-45
Interface Connector PIN 1 2 345 6 7 8 2 - Rx Tip
Assignment 3 - Shield
4 - Tx Ring
5 - Tx Tip
6 - Shield
RJ-45
7 - -48VDC
Connector
8 - GND
5

Figure 5-20 T1, 30T
(layout UDT) DA-15S
Assignment 15 8 Shield
GND
-48 VDC 13
Rx Ring 11
3 Rx Tip
Tx Ring 9
1 Tx Tip
DA-15S D-TYPE Connector
Figure 5-21 T1, 30T

C
(layout UDT) DA-15S to

LTU/CSU Connection
Cable
1 8
10 meters 9 15
Slide Latch Down
to Lock
Up to Release
GND
15
14
-48 VDC
13
12
Rx B (Ring)
11
10
Tx B (Ring)
9
SHIELD GND
8 8
8
15 -48 VDC 7
7
SHIELD 6
6
Rx A (Tip) 5
5
Rx B (Ring) 4
4
Rx A (Tip) SHIELD 1
9 3 3
1 Tx A (Tip)
2 2 8
Tx A (Tip) Tx B (Ring)
DA-15P 1 1
D-Type Plug RJ-45 Plug
to PRI, T1, 30T to CSU/LTU
Front Panel towards PSTN
10 meters Lengths
5
H-UDT Cable
CN#7244-6914040

Figure 5-22 T1, 30T/x,
30T/E (layout UDT)
Interface Connections to RJ-45
the PSTN/LTU/CSU
Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 Rx Ring
T1 30T
Pin 2 Rx Tip
Card Pin 3 Shield
Status Pin 4 Tx Ring
Indicator
R Y B G R Y B G Pin 5 Tx Tip
E E P E E E P E
Trunk D L V N D L V N Pin 6 Shield
Alarm
Status
Pin 7 -48VDC
Indicators Pin 8 Ground
RJ-45
RJ-45
DA-15S D-Type
DA-15S D-Type
Network
Interface
Connectors
DA-15S D-Type
Pin # Nomination
Pin 11 Rx Ring
Pin 3 Rx Tip
Pin 8 Shield
Pin 9 Tx Ring
Pin 1 Tx Tip
Pin 13 -48VDC
Pin 15 Ground
Pin 2,4,5,6, Not Used
7,10,12,14
DA-9S D-Type
DA-9S D-Type
Maintenance
Port
5

0
6 DPC Card (Discontinued)
Table 5-11 DA-15S

Pin No Nomination Function
D-Type connector for
DPC card
Pin 1 Tx Tip Send Data
Pin 9 Tx Ring Send Data
Pin 3 Rx Tip Receive Data
Pin 11 Rx Ring Receive Data
Pin 15 Ground Shield
Figure 5-23 DPC TO:CO

& TO:CORAL Connector
Pin Assignments
GND& Shield 15
Rx RING 11 3 Rx TIP
Tx RING
9 Tx TIP
1
DA-15S D-TYPE 5

0
7 UGW Card
The UGW card communicates via the RJ-45 connection on the:
cage rear panel for Coral IPx 800, 3000
card front panel for Coral IPx 4000.
The ULI-1 daughterboard is attached to the UGW board before shipment as shown in
Figure 5-24 to facilitate RJ-45 connection from the front panel as required in the Coral
IPx 4000 system.
Therefore, if the RJ-45 connection is to be made in the from the cage rear panel,
reposition the ULI-1 unit as described in the “Coral Voice Over IP Installation Manual”.
Figure 5-24 UGW Card
MAC : 00208F0718FE
MAC address
UGW (MG)
MG MG
(Media Gateway module)
MAINT
LNK
MAC : 00208F0718FD
ETHERNET
10/100
MAC address
(UGW)
ULI-1 shipped location ULI-1 location

for Coral IPx 4000 for Coral IPx 800, 3000
5

Table 5-12 and Figure 5-25 show the interface connections of the pins on the UGW RJ-45
connector. The interface connections are the same for the front and rear panels.
Figure 5-26 describes the connection from the front panel to the LAN/WAN.
Table 5-12 UGW

Network Interface Pin # Nomination Function
Connections
Pin 1 Tx(+) Transmit Data (+) to Network
Pin 2 Tx(-) Transmit Data (-) to Network
Pin 3 Rx(+) Receive Data (+) from Network
Pin 4 not used not connected
Pin 6 Rx(-) Receive Data (-) from Network
Figure 5-25 UGW

Network Interface
Connector PIN 1 2 345 6 7 8
Assignment 1 - Tx+
2 - Tx- 4, 5, 7, 8
not
3 - Rx+ connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
For further information on how to make the connection, refer also to the
“Coral Voice Over IP Installation Manual”.

Connection to the
LAN/WAN
UGW
System LED (red)
MG MG Status Indicator (green)
MAINT UGW Maintenance Status Indicator (red)
LINK/ACTIVE Green
lit when cable correctly

connected to LAN LAN / WAN
LNK
SPEED Yellow
lit when running at 100Mbps ETHERNET
10/100
Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 Tx(+)
Pin 2 Tx(-)
Pin 3 Rx(+)
Pin 4 not used
Pin 5 not used
Pin 6 Rx(-)
Pin 7 not used
Pin 8 not used
5

0
8 IPG Card
Table 5-13 and Figure 5-27 show the interface connections of the pins on the IPG RJ-45
connector.
Figure 5-28 describes the connection from the front panel to the LAN/WAN.
Table 5-13 IPG Interface

Connections Pin # Nomination Connection
Pin 1 Tx(+) Transmit Data (+) to Network.
Figure 5-27 IPG Network
Assignment 1 2 345 6 7 8
1 - Tx+
2 - Tx- 4, 5, 7, 8
not
3 - Rx+ connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
For further information, see the “VoIP Gateway (IPG) Card” Installation
Manual.
5

Figure 5-28 IPG Card
Connection to the
LAN/WAN
System LED (red)

IPG
Data packets are being
received (yellow)
Rcv
Data packets are being Tx
transmitted (green) LINK
LINK lit when cable

correctly connected to
LAN (yellow)
RJ45
LAN / WAN
ETHERNET
Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 Tx(+)
DA-9S D-Type
Pin 2 Tx(-)
Pin 3 Rx(+)
Pin 4 not used
Pin 5 not used
SERIAL Pin 6 Rx(-)
Pin 7 not used
Pin 8 not used
5

I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel
5.7 For Coral Interface Cards
1 Cards with Rear Panel I/O Connections

In the Coral IPx 800 the I/O connections of the following interface cards are performed
via cables connected to their rear panel:
PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT “C” and later) on page 5-48
T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT “C” and later) on page 5-49
UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E on page 5-50
PUGW Card on page 5-54
I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel For Coral Interface Cards
PUGW, UGW-E and UGW cards include front panel and rear panel I/O
options. However, there are various factors involved. Therefore, their
description is not included in this section. For details, see the Coral VoIP
Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual.
There are two types of Coral IPx 800 systems backplane:

With two RJ-45 connectors per card slot (discontinued)
With one connector per card slot, as shown in Figure 5-29
5

Back Panel and RJ-45
Rear Connectors
RJ-45
Connectors
5

0
2 2DT Card (PRI-23, PRI-30, T1, 30T, or 30TM Configuration)

The external network connections to the 2DT digital circuit can be made via the RJ-45
telephony connectors on the front and rear panels. This section describes the
connections to the rear panel. See Figure 5-30 and Figure 5-31. For further information
on fabricating the network interface connection, refer to the Coral Service and Peripheral
Cards Installation Manual.
2DT RJ-45 Network Connector Pinout
Table 5-14 2DT Network RJ-45 Pin # Nomination Functions

Pin 1 RxB Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 3 Shield Cable Shield, GND
Pin 6 — Not Used
Pin 7 — Not Used
Pin 8 — Not Used
Figure 5-30 2DT RJ-45
Front and Rear Panel 12345678 1 - RxB
Interface Connector PIN 2 - RxA
Assignment
3 - Shield (GND)
4 - TxB
5 - TxA
RJ-45
Connector

5

Figure 5-31 2DT Network
Interface Connections to
the PSTN/LTU/CSU
2DT
Card status
Indicator
L R C G
O A R E
S I C N RJ-45
0
Trunk alarm status 1 Pin # Nomination
Pin 1 RxB
Pin 2 RxA
#0
RJ-45 Pin 3 Shield (GND)
network interface Pin 4 TxB
connectors #1 Pin 5 TxA
Pin 6 Not Used
Pin 7 Not Used
Pin 8 Not Used
Maintenance port
RS-232 serial
9-pin male

5

Front and Rear Panel Network Interface Connections
The rear panel includes one RJ-45 connector per card slot. Therefore, only one interface
can be connected to the rear panel (interface #0).
Verify that interface #0 is not connected from the front and rear panels
simultaneously.
Table 5-15 and Figure 5-32 describe the possible network interface connections from the
card front panel and the cage rear panel.
Table 5-15 2DT Possible

Front or Rear Panel Front Panel Rear Panel
Network Interface Connected
Network Interface
Connections to 2DT
#0 #1 #0 #1
Interface #0 ✔
Interface #0 ✔
Interfaces #0 and #1 ✔ ✔
Interfaces #0 and #1 ✔ ✔
Figure 5-32 2DT Network
Interface Connection
from the Rear Panel
One RJ-45
connector
per card slot
2DT
#0
Available
#1
Not Available
5

0
3 PRI-23, PRI-30 Card (Layout UDT “C” and later)

0
The external network connections to the PRI-23 and PRI-30 (layout UDT “C”) digital
circuit are made via one of the three connectors available at the front and rear panels:
Front Panel: RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-8 and Figure 5-14 on page 5-30)
Front Panel: DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-8 and Figure 5-14 on
page 5-31).
Rear Panel: RJ-45 telephony connector (Table 5-16 and Figure 5-33).
Use one connector only.

Do not use two or three connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-33 describes the connection from the rear panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Table 5-16 PRI-23,

PRI-30 (layout UDT “C”) RJ-45 Nomination Functions
Rear Panel RJ-45 Pin #
Network Interface
Connections Pin 1 RxB Receive Data (ring) from Network
Pin 3,6 Shield Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Pin 7 -48VDC Power for CSU/LTU
Pin 8 GND Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Figure 5-33 PRI-23, 1 - RxB

PRI-30 (layout UDT “C”)
Rear Panel RJ-45 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 2 - RxA
Interface Connector PIN 3 - Shield
Assignment to the
PSTN/LTU/CSU 4 - TxB
5 - TxA
6 - Shield
RJ-45
7 - -48VDC
Connector
8 - GND
5

0
4 T1, 30T/x, 30T/E Card (Layout UDT “C” and later)

0
The external network connections to the T1 and 30T (layout UDT “C”) digital circuit
are made via one of the three connectors available at the front and rear panels:
Front Panel: DA-15S, 15 pin female D-type connector (Table 5-10 and Figure 5-20
on page 5-35).

Do not use two or three connectors at the same time.
Figure 5-34 describes the connection from the rear panel to the PSTN/LTU/CSU.
Table 5-17 T1, 30T
(layout UDT “C”) Rear RJ-45 Nomination Functions
Panel RJ-45 Network Pin #
Pin 1 Rx Ring Receive Data from Network
Pin 2 Rx Tip Receive Data from Network
Pin 3,6 Shield Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Pin 4 Tx Ring Transmit Data to Network
Pin 5 Tx Tip Transmit Data to Network.
Pin 7 -48VDC Power for CSU/LTU
Pin 8 GND Cable Shield, 48VDC Return
Figure 5-34 T1, 30T 1 - Rx Ring

(layout UDT “C”) Rear
Panel RJ-45 Interface 1 2 345 6 7 8 2 - Rx Tip
Connector PIN 3 - Shield
Assignment to the
4 - Tx Ring
PSTN/LTU/CSU
5 - Tx Tip
6 - Shield
RJ-45
7 - -48VDC
Connector
8 - GND
5

0
5 UGW Card (layout B1) and UGW-E
UGW Layout A can not be connected to the Coral IPx 800 rear panel.
The external network connections to the UGW (layout B1) and to the UGW-E are made
via one of the two connectors available at the front and rear panels:

Do not use the two connectors at the same time.
The UGW and UGW-E cards communicate via the RJ-45 connection on the:

The ULI-1 daughterboard is attached to the UGW and UGW-E boards before shipment
as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure 5-39 to facilitate RJ-45 connection from the front
panel as required in the Coral IPx 4000 system. Therefore, if the RJ-45 connection is to
be made in the Coral IPx 800 from the rear panel:
1. Disconnect the three screws that secure the ULI-1 daughter board to the UGW or
UGW-E board.
2. Rotate the ULI-1 daughter board as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure 5-39.
3. Secure the ULI-1 daughter board to the UGW board.
5

MAC : 00208F0718FE
MAC address
UGW (MG)
MG MG
(Media Gateway module)
MAINT
LNK
MAC : 00208F0718FD
ETHERNET
10/100
MAC address
(UGW)

for Coral IPx 4000 for Coral IPx 800, 3000

Figure 5-36 UGW-E Card MG-15/30/60
MG-24/48/72/96/120
UGW-E
MG
MG (Media Gateway)
MAINT
module
MG-72 type
TPM 1100A - 72MT
00908F04B356
MAC Address:
DC to DC
power supply
Present ONLY MAC address
in UGW-E (MG)
MAC address
(UGW)
LNK
MAC : 00208F0718FD
SPD
ETHERNET
10/100
Layout C
UGW-E

for Coral IPx 4000 and Coral for Coral IPx 800, 3000
FlexiCom 300,400,5000,6000 Strap
Normally
Open
Table 5-19 and Figure 5-38 show the interface connections of the pins on the Coral
IPx 800 rear panel RJ-45 connector for the UGW and UGW-E cards. The interface
connections are the same for the front and rear panels.
5

Table 5-18 UGW and
UGW-E Rear Panel RJ-45 Pin # Nomination Function
Network Interface
Connections
Figure 5-37 UGW and

UGW-E Rear Panel RJ-45
Interface Connector PIN 1 2 345 6 7 8
Assignment to the 1 - Tx+
LAN/WAN 2 - Tx- 4, 5, 7, 8
not
3 - Rx+ connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
5

0
6 PUGW Card
The external network connections to the PUGW card is made via one of the two
connectors available at the front and rear panels:

Do not use the two connectors at the same time.
The PUGW card communicates via the RJ-45 connection on the:

Table 5-19 and Figure 5-38 show the interface connections of the pins on the Coral
IPx 800 rear panel RJ-45 connector for the PUGW card. The interface connections are
the same for the front and rear panels.
Table 5-19 PUGW Rear

Panel RJ-45 Network Pin # Nomination Function
Figure 5-38 PUGW

Rear Panel RJ-45
Interface Connector PIN 1 2 345 6 7 8
Assignment to the 1 - Tx+
LAN/WAN 2 - Tx- 4, 5, 7, 8
not
3 - Rx+ connected
6 - Rx-
RJ-45 Connector
5

Figure 5-39 PUGW Card
maintenance port
Not used
PUGW
MG
MAINT
Strap
Normally
Open
Media gateway
(MRC)
card location
LNK
SPD
ETHERNET
10/100
MAC : 000A6B004DFB MRC C
MAC : 000A6B004DFA IXP-0 B
MAC : 000A6B004DF9 IXP-0 A
MAC addresses MRC-8/16/32/64

coded during manufacturing process
5

5 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel For Coral Interface Cards
5-56
Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual
NOTES:
I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors
5.8 For Coral Interface Cards
1 General
The following section contains the I/O Connector Pin Designation tables for all the
peripheral cards currently available for the Coral IPx 800, 3000, 4000 cabinets.
The respective tables for the front panel connections are shown in Section 5.6, I/O
Connections Via Front Panel on page 5-25. While the respective tables for the rear panel
connections are shown in Section 5.7, I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel on page 5-43.
Table Presentation
Each I/O connector services two universal I/O slots.
There are two I/O connection tables for each peripheral card:
I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors For Coral Interface Cards

Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables
Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables
Connector - to - Peripheral Card tables (see Table 5-20)

The Connector-to-Peripheral Card tables, located on the left-hand pages, display the
pin-to-port designations from the connector's point of view.
Tip:
These tables can be very helpful for a first-time installation.
Tip:
These tables can be used for Block 66 MDF connections as their terminals
follow the same numbering pattern.
5

Peripheral Card - to - Connector tables (see Table 5-21)
The Card-to-Connector tables, located on the right hand pages, indicate the port-to-pin
designations from the card's point of view.
Tip:
These tables can help when changing, adding, or removing specific ports in
an existing structure.
Table Legend
Table 5-20 illustrates the Connector-to-Peripheral Card relationship tables.
The table is divided into two major columns. The first applies when the card is
inserted in the even-numbered slots; the second is for cards inserted into the
odd-numbered slots. Each column then divides for the upper or lower connector pins.
The possible connections for each card are marked by the shaded areas.
If the card is inserted in the even-numbered slots, the upper left area will apply.
If the card is inserted in the odd-numbered slots, the lower right area will apply.
Table 5-21 illustrates the Peripheral Card-to-Connector relationship tables.
The possible connections for each cards are highlighted by the shaded areas. The table
is divided in two sections: The upper section represent the connections for cards
inserted in even-numbered slots, while the lower section stands for the connections of
cards inserted into the odd-numbered slots.
Each section shows the pins associated with a specific port - group. Given that some of
the peripheral cards can support up to 24 ports, the ports are divided into groups of
eight (for connection purposes only). Thus, each group is associated with either the
upper or lower connector (see sub-columns) and with the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd group of
pins (see rows).
The pins associated with the first two port columns are listed in the right column
while the pins for the last group of ports (left column) are listed in the adjacent
column on their left.
Finding a Specific Peripheral Card's Table

To help identify the peripheral cards, they are listed below in two indexes. The first
index is grouped according to the functional type of each card, the second is in
alpha-numeric order.
For Card Index: Listed by Function Category on page 5-61.
For Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order on page 5-63.
5

Table 5-20 Connector - Even Slots Odd Slots
to - Peripheral Card
tables Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
Connector Connector* Connector Connector*
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh 1st Port 2nd Port
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
Group Group
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or 3rd Port 2nd
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn Group Port
13 Gn/Bk Group

39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl 1st 3rd
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
Port Port
21 Bl/Vi Group Group
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
25 Sl/Vi
5

Table 5-21 Peripheral Even Slots
Card - to - Connector tables
Card - to - Connector
tables Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
Connector Connector Connector
26 Wh/Bl 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh 1st Port 2nd Port 12 Or/Bk 3rd Port
30 Wh/Sl Group Group 38 Bk/Gn Group
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Lower
Connector Connector Connector *
42 Yw/Or 34 Rd/Br
17 Or/Yw 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn 35 Rd/Sl
18 Gn/Yw 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br 36 Bk/Bl
19 Br/Yw 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl 37 Bk/Or
20 Sl/Yw 1st Port 3rd Port 12 Or/Bk 2nd Port
46 Vi/Bl Group Group 38 Bk/Gn Group
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
5

0
2 Card Index: Listed by Function Category

Key Set Telephone
2SK cards..............................................................5-83
4SK, 8SK cards .....................................................5-85
2SD, 8SD cards ....................................................5-87
8SKD, 16SKD cards .............................................5-89
8SVD cards ...........................................................5-91
8SFT, 16SFT, 24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT, 24SDT cards...5-93
Table 5-22 Possible

Terminals 8/16/24SFT 8/16/24SDT 8/16SKD 8SVD
Terminal/Card
combinations
FlexSet Yes No No No
DKT/DST (Ver. 5.xx) Yes Yes Yes Yes
DKT/DST (Ver. 2.xx-4.xx) No No Yes Yes
DKT2000 + VDM No No No Yes

CPA Yes Yes Yes Yes
GKT Yes Yes Yes No
Single Line Telephone

4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) cards.....................................5-95
8SA, 8SLS, 8SH/S(-LL), 8S, 8S/SH cards...........5-97
16SLS, 16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH cards ...............5-99
8SM cards .............................................................5-103
24SA, 16SLS, 24SLS cards ...................................5-101
Digital Trunks
5
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, 8TBRP cards .....................5-65

Analog Trunks
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards .............................5-81
4T-C, 4T-CID cards..............................................5-67
4TMR - PF (/S) (12/16) <G> <ES> cards...........5-67
4TPF .....................................................................5-67
4TWL....................................................................5-79
8T-C, 8T-CID cards..............................................5-69
8TPF, 8T/S - PF <G> <ES> cards .......................5-69
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards ................5-71
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards.............................................5-73
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ...........................5-75
8BID cards ............................................................5-77
4GID, 4TWL cards................................................5-79
Auxiliary Cards
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards .........................................5-105
RMI, ASU cards ....................................................5-107
Wireless (Radio Base Station) Cards

SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) ...........................5-109
8SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station)5-111
16SKK card for Wireless FlexAir (Radio Base Station)5-113

5

0
3 Card Index: Listed by Alpha-Numerically Order

RMI, ASU cards....................................................5-107
SKW/x cards (Issue 4 and later) ...........................5-109
16S, 16SH, 16S/SH, 16SH/S(-LL),

16SLS cards..........................................................5-99
16SDT cards.........................................................5-93
16SKD ..................................................................5-89
16SKK ..................................................................5-113
16SLS cards..........................................................5-99
24SA cards ...........................................................5-101
2SD cards .............................................................5-87
2SK cards..............................................................5-83
24SDT cards.........................................................5-93
24SLS cards..........................................................5-101
I/O Connections: 4ALS, 4ALS/M cards................ 5-71

4GID, 4TWL cards ............................................... 5-79
4S/SH, 4SH/S(-LL) .............................................. 5-95
4SK, 8SK cards ..................................................... 5-85
4T-C, 4T-CID cards.............................................. 5-67
4T, 4TPF, /S (12/16) <G> <ES> cards ................ 5-67
4TBR, 4TBRP cards ............................................. 5-65
4TEM, 4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards............................. 5-81
4TMR, 4TMR - PF /S (12/16)

<G> <ES> cards .................................................. 5-67
4TWL.................................................................... 5-79
4T/S, 4TMR/S (12/16) (PF)

<G> <ES> cards .................................................. 5-67
8ALS, 8ALS/M cards ............................................ 5-73
8BID cards............................................................ 5-77
8DID, 8DID/S, 8DID/S-Z cards ........................... 5-75

5
8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, (-LL)...................................... 5-95

8SA ....................................................................... 5-95
8SD ....................................................................... 5-87
8SDT.....................................................................5-93
8SK ....................................................................... 5-85
8SKD, 16SKD ...................................................... 5-89
8SKK..................................................................... 5-111
8SLS...................................................................... 5-95
8SM cards ............................................................. 5-103
8SVD cards ...........................................................5-91
8T-C, 8T-CID cards.............................................. 5-69
8T, 8TPF, 8T/S, 8T/S - PF cards .......................... 5-69
8T/S-G, 8T/S PF-G cards ..................................... 5-69
8TBR, 8TBRP cards ............................................. 5-65
8DRCF, 8DRCM cards ......................................... 5-105

cabinets.
5

Table 5-23 4TBR, 8TBR, Even Slots Odd Slots
4TBRP, 8TBRP cards
Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
Connector Connector* Connector Connector*
26 Wh/Bl T(+) 0 T(+) 4
1 Bl/Wh T(-) 0 T(-) 4
27 Wh/Or R(+) 0 R(+) 4
2 Or/Wh R(-) 0 R(-) 4
28 Wh/Gn T(+) 1 T(+) 5
3 Gn/Wh T(-) 1 T(-) 5
29 Wh/Br R(+) 1 R(+) 5
4 Br/Wh R(-) 1 R(-) 5
30 Wh/Sl T(+) 2 T(+) 6
5 Sl/Wh T(-) 2 T(-) 6
31 Rd/Bl R(+) 2 R(+) 6
6 Bl/Rd R(-) 2 R(-) 6
32 Rd/Or T(+) 3 T(+) 7
7 Or/Rd T(-) 3 T(-) 7
33 Rd/Gn R(+) 3 R(+) 7
8 Gn/Rd R(-) 3 R(-) 7
34 Rd/Br T(+) 4
9 Br/Rd T(-) 4
35 Rd/Sl R(+) 4
10 Sl/Rd R(-) 4
36 Bk/Bl T(+) 5
11 Bl/Bk T(-) 5
37 Bk/Or R(+) 5
12 Or/Bk R(-) 5
38 Bk/Gn T(+) 6
13 Gn/Bk T(-) 6

39 Bk/Br R(+) 6
14 Br/Bk R(-) 6
40 Bk/Sl T(+) 7
15 Sl/Bk T(-) 7
41 Yw/Bl R(+) 7
16 Bl/Yw R(-) 7
42 Yw/Or T(+) 0
17 Or/Yw T(-) 0
43 Yw/Gn R(+) 0
18 Gn/Yw R(-) 0
44 Yw/Br T(+) 1
19 Br/Yw T(-) 1
45 Yw/Sl R(+) 1
20 Sl/Yw R(-) 1
46 Vi/Bl T(+) 2
21 Bl/Vi T(-) 2
47 Vi/Or R(+) 2
22 Or/Vi R(-) 2
48 Vi/Gn T(+) 3
23 Gn/Vi T(-) 3
49 Vi/Br R(+) 3
24 Br/Vi R(-) 3
25 Sl/Vi
* Trunk Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8TBR and 8TBR-P cards.
5

Table 5-24 I/O Even Slots
Connections:
4TBR, 8TBR, 4TBRP, Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
8TBRP cards Connector Connector * Connector
26 Wh/Bl T(+) 0 T(+) 4 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh T(-) 0 T(-) 4 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or R(+) 0 R(+) 4 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh R(-) 0 R(-) 4 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn T(+) 1 T(+) 5 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh T(-) 1 T(-) 5 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br R(+) 1 R(+) 5 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh R(-) 1 R(-) 5 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl T(+) 2 T(+) 6 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh T(-) 2 T(-) 6 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl R(+) 2 R(+) 6 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd R(-) 2 R(-) 6 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or T(+) 3 T(+) 7 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd T(-) 3 T(-) 7 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn R(+) 3 R(+) 7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd R(-) 3 R(-) 7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or T(+) 0 34 Rd/Br T(+) 4

17 Or/Yw T(-) 0 9 Br/Rd T(-) 4
43 Yw/Gn R(+) 0 35 Rd/Sl R(+) 4

18 Gn/Yw R(-) 0 10 Sl/Rd R(-) 4
44 Yw/Br T(+) 1 36 Bk/Bl T(+) 5

19 Br/Yw T(-) 1 11 Bl/Bk T(-) 5
45 Yw/Sl R(+) 1 37 Bk/Or R(+) 5

20 Sl/Yw R(-) 1 12 Or/Bk R(-) 5
46 Vi/Bl T(+) 2 38 Bk/Gn T(+) 6

21 Bl/Vi T(-) 2 13 Gn/Bk T(-) 6
47 Vi/Or R(+) 2 39 Bk/Br R(+) 6

22 Or/Vi R(-) 2 14 Br/Bk R(-) 6
48 Vi/Gn T(+) 3 40 Bk/Sl T(+) 7

23 Gn/Vi T(-) 3 15 Sl/Bk T(-) 7
49 Vi/Br R(+) 3 41 Yw/Bl R(+) 7

24 Br/Vi R(-) 3 16 Bl/Yw R(-) 7
* Trunk Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8TBR and 8TBR-P cards.
5

Table 5-25 I/O Even Slots Odd Slots
Connections:
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
Connector Connector Connector Connector
4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S)
(12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> 26 Wh/Bl TT2
1 Bl/Wh TR2
cards
27 Wh/Or STT2*
2 Or/Wh STR2*
28 Wh/Gn TT0 SCT2*
3 Gn/Wh TR0 SCR2*
29 Wh/Br STT0* TT3
4 Br/Wh STR0* TR3
30 Wh/Sl SCT0* STT3*
5 Sl/Wh SCR0* STR3*
31 Rd/Bl TT1 SCT3*
6 Bl/Rd TR1 SCR3*
32 Rd/Or STT1*
7 Or/Rd STR1*
33 Rd/Gn SCT1*
8 Gn/Rd SCR1*
34 Rd/Br TT2
9 Br/Rd TR2
35 Rd/Sl STT2*
10 Sl/Rd STR2*
36 Bk/Bl SCT2*
11 Bl/Bk SCR2*
37 Bk/Or TT3
12 Or/Bk TR3
38 Bk/Gn STT3*
13 Gn/Bk STR3*

39 Bk/Br SCT3*
14 Br/Bk SCR3*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br TT0
19 Br/Yw TR0
45 Yw/Sl STT0*
20 Sl/Yw STR0*
46 Vi/Bl SCT0*
21 Bl/Vi SCR0*
47 Vi/Or TT1
22 Or/Vi TR1
48 Vi/Gn STT1*
23 Gn/Vi STR1*
49 Vi/Br SCT1*
24 Br/Vi SCR1*
25 Sl/Vi
* STT, STR, SCT and SCR are power failure transfer connections which are provided
only on 4T-C, 4T-CID cards and cards with the suffix PF. See page 5-17, Power Fail (PF)
5
Transfer Circuits for Power Failure Transfer wiring interconnections diagram and
database programming.

Connections:
4T-C, 4T-CID, 4T, 4TMR, Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
4TPF, 4TMR-PF (/S) Connector Connector Connector
(12/16) (PF) <G> <ES> 26 Wh/Bl TT2 34 Rd/Br
cards 1 Bl/Wh TR2 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or STT2* 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh STR2* 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn TT0 SCT2* 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh TR0 SCR2* 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br STT0* TT3 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh STR0* TR3 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl SCT0* STT3* 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh SCR0* STR3* 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl TT1 SCT3* 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd TR1 SCR3* 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or STT1* 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd STR1* 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn SCT1* 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SCR1* 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or 34 Rd/Br
TT2
17 Or/Yw 9 Br/Rd TR2
43 Yw/Gn 35 Rd/Sl STT2*

18 Gn/Yw 10 Sl/Rd STR2*
44 Yw/Br TT0 36 Bk/Bl SCT2*

19 Br/Yw TR0 11 Bl/Bk SCR2*
45 Yw/Sl STT0* 37 Bk/Or TT3

20 Sl/Yw STR0* 12 Or/Bk TR3
46 Vi/Bl SCT0* 38 Bk/Gn STT3*

21 Bl/Vi SCR0* 13 Gn/Bk STR3*
47 Vi/Or TT1 39 Bk/Br SCT3*

22 Or/Vi TR1 14 Br/Bk SCR3*
48 Vi/Gn STT1* 40 Bk/Sl

23 Gn/Vi STR1* 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br SCT1* 41 Yw/Bl

24 Br/Vi SCR1* 16 Bl/Yw
5

Connections:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF)
<G> <ES> cards 26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4
1 Bl/Wh TR0 TR4
27 Wh/Or TT1 STT4*
2 Or/Wh TR1 STR4*
28 Wh/Gn TT2 SCT4*
3 Gn/Wh TR2 SCR4*
29 Wh/Br STT2* TT5
4 Br/Wh STR2* TR5
5 Sl/Wh SCR2* STR5*
31 Rd/Bl TT3 SCT5*
6 Bl/Rd TR3 SCR5*
32 Rd/Or STT3* TT6
7 Or/Rd STR3* TR6
33 Rd/Gn SCT3* TT7
8 Gn/Rd SCR3* TR7
34 Rd/Br TT4
9 Br/Rd TR4
35 Rd/Sl STT4*
10 Sl/Rd STR4*
36 Bk/Bl SCT4*
11 Bl/Bk SCR4*
37 Bk/Or TT5
12 Or/Bk TR5
38 Bk/Gn STT5*
13 Gn/Bk STR5*

39 Bk/Br SCT5*
14 Br/Bk SCR5*
40 Bk/Sl TT6
15 Sl/Bk TR6
41 Yw/Bl TT7
16 Bl/Yw TR7
42 Yw/Or TT0
17 Or/Yw TR0
43 Yw/Gn TT1
18 Gn/Yw TR1
44 Yw/Br TT2
19 Br/Yw TR2
45 Yw/Sl STT2*
20 Sl/Yw STR2*
46 Vi/Bl SCT2*
21 Bl/Vi SCR2*
47 Vi/Or TT3
22 Or/Vi TR3
48 Vi/Gn STT3*
23 Gn/Vi STR3*
49 Vi/Br SCT3*
24 Br/Vi SCR3*
25 Sl/Vi
5

Connections:
8T-C, 8T-CID, 8T, 8TPF, Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
8T/S, 8T/S-PF (/S) (PF) Connector Connector * Connector
<G> <ES> cards 26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh TR0 TR4 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or TT1 STT4* 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh TR1 STR4* 10 Sl/Rd
32 Rd/Or STT3* TT6 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd STR3* TR6 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn SCT3* TT7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SCR3* TR7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or TT0 34 Rd/Br TT4

17 Or/Yw TR0 9 Br/Rd TR4
43 Yw/Gn TT1 35 Rd/Sl STT4*

18 Gn/Yw TR1 10 Sl/Rd STR4*




48 Vi/Gn STT3* 40 Bk/Sl TT6

23 Gn/Vi STR3* 15 Sl/Bk TR6
49 Vi/Br SCT3* 41 Yw/Bl TT7

24 Br/Vi SCR3* 16 Bl/Yw TR7
5

Connections:
4ALS, 4ALS/M cards Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl TT2
1 Bl/Wh TR2
27 Wh/Or STT2*
2 Or/Wh STR2*
28 Wh/Gn TT0 SCT2*
3 Gn/Wh TR0 SCR2*
29 Wh/Br STT0* TT3
4 Br/Wh STR0* TR3
5 Sl/Wh SCR0* STR3*
31 Rd/Bl TT1 SCT3*
6 Bl/Rd TR1 SCR3*
32 Rd/Or STT1*
7 Or/Rd STR1*
33 Rd/Gn SCT1*
8 Gn/Rd SCR1*
34 Rd/Br TT2
9 Br/Rd TR2
35 Rd/Sl STT2*
10 Sl/Rd STR2*
36 Bk/Bl SCT2*
11 Bl/Bk SCR2*
37 Bk/Or TT3
12 Or/Bk TR3
38 Bk/Gn STT3*
13 Gn/Bk STR3*

39 Bk/Br SCT3*
14 Br/Bk SCR3*
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br TT0
19 Br/Yw TR0
45 Yw/Sl STT0*
20 Sl/Yw STR0*
46 Vi/Bl SCT0*
21 Bl/Vi SCR0*
47 Vi/Or TT1
22 Or/Vi TR1
48 Vi/Gn STT1*
23 Gn/Vi STR1*
49 Vi/Br SCT1*
24 Br/Vi SCR1*
25 Sl/Vi
only on cards with the suffix PF. See page 5-17, Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits for
5
Power Failure Transfer wiring interconnections diagram and database programming.

For Coral Europe only

Connections:
4ALS, 4ALS/M cards Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
26 Wh/Bl TT2 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh TR2 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or STT2* 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh STR2* 10 Sl/Rd
32 Rd/Or STT1* 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd STR1* 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn SCT1* 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SCR1* 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots

42 Yw/Or 34 Rd/Br TT2
43 Yw/Gn 35 Rd/Sl STT2*

18 Gn/Yw 10 Sl/Rd STR2*




48 Vi/Gn STT1* 40 Bk/Sl

23 Gn/Vi STR1* 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br SCT1* 41 Yw/Bl

24 Br/Vi SCR1* 16 Bl/Yw
5

Table 5-31 8ALS, Even Slots Odd Slots
8ALS/M cards
26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4
1 Bl/Wh TR0 TR4
27 Wh/Or TT1 STT4*
2 Or/Wh TR1 STR4*
28 Wh/Gn TT2 SCT4*
3 Gn/Wh TR2 SCR4*
29 Wh/Br STT2* TT5
4 Br/Wh STR2* TR5
5 Sl/Wh SCR2* STR5*
31 Rd/Bl TT3 SCT5*
6 Bl/Rd TR3 SCR5*
32 Rd/Or STT3* TT6
7 Or/Rd STR3* TR6
33 Rd/Gn SCT3* TT7
8 Gn/Rd SCR3* TR7
34 Rd/Br TT4
9 Br/Rd TR4
35 Rd/Sl STT4*
10 Sl/Rd STR4*
36 Bk/Bl SCT4*
11 Bl/Bk SCR4*
37 Bk/Or TT5
12 Or/Bk TR5
38 Bk/Gn STT5*
13 Gn/Bk STR5*

39 Bk/Br SCT5*
14 Br/Bk SCR5*
40 Bk/Sl TT6
15 Sl/Bk TR6
41 Yw/Bl TT7
16 Bl/Yw TR7
42 Yw/Or TT0
17 Or/Yw TR0
43 Yw/Gn TT1
18 Gn/Yw TR1
44 Yw/Br TT2
19 Br/Yw TR2
45 Yw/Sl STT2*
20 Sl/Yw STR2*
46 Vi/Bl SCT2*
21 Bl/Vi SCR2*
47 Vi/Or TT3
22 Or/Vi TR3
48 Vi/Gn STT3*
23 Gn/Vi STR3*
49 Vi/Br SCT3*
24 Br/Vi SCR3*
25 Sl/Vi
only on cards with the suffix PF. See Section 5.4, Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits for
5

Table 5-32 8ALS, Even Slots
8ALS/M cards
Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4 34 Rd/Br
27 Wh/Or TT1 STT4* 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh TR1 STR4* 10 Sl/Rd
32 Rd/Or STT3* TT6 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd STR3* TR6 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn SCT3* TT7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SCR3* TR7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots

43 Yw/Gn TT1 35 Rd/Sl STT4*

18 Gn/Yw TR1 10 Sl/Rd STR4*




48 Vi/Gn STT3* 40 Bk/Sl TT6

23 Gn/Vi STR3* 15 Sl/Bk TR6
49 Vi/Br SCT3* 41 Yw/Bl TT7

24 Br/Vi SCR3* 16 Bl/Yw TR7
5

Table 5-33 8DID, 8DID/S, Even Slots Odd Slots
8DID/S-Z cards
26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4
1 Bl/Wh TR0 TR4
27 Wh/Or TT1 TT5
2 Or/Wh TR1 TR5
28 Wh/Gn TT2 TT6
3 Gn/Wh TR2 TR6
29 Wh/Br TT3 TT7
4 Br/Wh TR3 TR7
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br TT4
9 Br/Rd TR4
35 Rd/Sl TT5
10 Sl/Rd TR5
36 Bk/Bl TT6
11 Bl/Bk TR6
37 Bk/Or TT7
12 Or/Bk TR7

38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or TT0
17 Or/Yw TR0
43 Yw/Gn TT1
18 Gn/Yw TR1
44 Yw/Br TT2
19 Br/Yw TR2
45 Yw/Sl TT3
20 Sl/Yw TR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
5
Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used

25 Sl/Vi

Table 5-34 8DID, 8DID/S, Even Slots
8DID/S-Z cards
27 Wh/Or TT1 TT5 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh TR1 TR5 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn TT2 TT6 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh TR2 TR6 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br TT3 TT7 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh TR3 TR7 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots

43 Yw/Gn TT1 35 Rd/Sl TT5

18 Gn/Yw TR1 10 Sl/Rd TR5
44 Yw/Br TT2 36 Bk/Bl TT6

19 Br/Yw TR2 11 Bl/Bk TR6
45 Yw/Sl TT3 37 Bk/Or TT7

20 Sl/Yw TR3 12 Or/Bk TR7
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
5

Table 5-35 8BID cards Even Slots Odd Slots
26 Wh/Bl TT0 TT4
1 Bl/Wh TR0 TR4
27 Wh/Or TT1
2 Or/Wh TR1
28 Wh/Gn TT2
3 Gn/Wh TR2
29 Wh/Br TT5
4 Br/Wh TR5
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl TT3
6 Bl/Rd TR3
32 Rd/Or TT6
7 Or/Rd TR6
33 Rd/Gn TT7
8 Gn/Rd TR7
34 Rd/Br TT4
9 Br/Rd TR4
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or TT5

12 Or/Bk TR5
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl TT6
15 Sl/Bk TR6
41 Yw/Bl TT7
16 Bl/Yw TR7
42 Yw/Or TT0
17 Or/Yw TR0
43 Yw/Gn TT1
18 Gn/Yw TR1
44 Yw/Br TT2
19 Br/Yw TR2
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or TT3
22 Or/Vi TR3
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
5

25 Sl/Vi

Table 5-36 8BID cards Even Slots
Connector Connector * Connector
27 Wh/Or TT1 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh TR1 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn TT2 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh TR2 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br TT5 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh TR5 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl TT3 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd TR3 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or TT6 40 Bk/Sl

7 Or/Rd TR6 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn TT7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd TR7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots

43 Yw/Gn TT1 35 Rd/Sl

18 Gn/Yw TR1 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br TT2 36 Bk/Bl

19 Br/Yw TR2 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl 37 Bk/Or TT5

20 Sl/Yw 12 Or/Bk TR5
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or TT3 39 Bk/Br

22 Or/Vi TR3 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl TT6

23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk TR6
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl TT7

24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw TR7
5

Table 5-37 4GID, 4TWL Even Slots Odd Slots
cards
26 Wh/Bl TT2
1 Bl/Wh TR2
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn TT0
3 Gn/Wh TR0
29 Wh/Br TT3
4 Br/Wh TR3
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl TT1
6 Bl/Rd TR1
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br TT2
9 Br/Rd TR2
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or TT3
12 Or/Bk TR3

38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br TT0
19 Br/Yw TR0
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or TT1
22 Or/Vi TR1
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
5

25 Sl/Vi

Table 5-38 4GID cards
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl TT2 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh TR2 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn TT0 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh TR0 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br TT3 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh TR3 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl TT1 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd TR1 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or 34 Rd/Br TT2

43 Yw/Gn 35 Rd/Sl
18 Gn/Yw 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br TT0 36 Bk/Bl

19 Br/Yw TR0 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl 37 Bk/Or TT3

20 Sl/Yw 12 Or/Bk TR3
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or TT1 39 Bk/Br

22 Or/Vi TR1 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
5

Table 5-39 4TEM, Even Slots Odd Slots
4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards
26 Wh/Bl ETT0 ETT2
1 Bl/Wh ETR0 ETR2
27 Wh/Or ERT0 ERT2
2 Or/Wh ERR0 ERR2
28 Wh/Gn E0 E2
3 Gn/Wh SG0 SG2
29 Wh/Br M0 M2
4 Br/Wh SB0 SB2
30 Wh/Sl ETT1 ETT3
5 Sl/Wh ETR1 ETR3
31 Rd/Bl ERT1 ERT3
6 Bl/Rd ERR1 ERR3
32 Rd/Or E1 E3
7 Or/Rd SG1 SG3
33 Rd/Gn M1 M3
8 Gn/Rd SB1 SB3
34 Rd/Br ETT2
9 Br/Rd ETR2
35 Rd/Sl ERT2
10 Sl/Rd ERR2
36 Bk/Bl E2
11 Bl/Bk SG2
37 Bk/Or M2
12 Or/Bk SB2
38 Bk/Gn ETT3
13 Gn/Bk ETR3

39 Bk/Br ERT3
14 Br/Bk ERR3
40 Bk/Sl E3
15 Sl/Bk SG3
41 Yw/Bl M3
16 Bl/Yw SB3
42 Yw/Or ETT0
17 Or/Yw ETR0
43 Yw/Gn ERT0
18 Gn/Yw ERR0
44 Yw/Br E0
19 Br/Yw SG0
45 Yw/Sl M0
20 Sl/Yw SB0
46 Vi/Bl ETT1
21 Bl/Vi ETR1
47 Vi/Or ERT1
22 Or/Vi ERR1
48 Vi/Gn E1
23 Gn/Vi SG1
49 Vi/Br M1
24 Br/Vi SB1
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: The ERR, ERT pairs are used only when a port is strapped for 4-wire operation.
5

Table 5-40 4TEM,
4TEM/S, 4TEMP cards
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl ETT0 ETT2 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh ETR0 ETR2 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or ERT0 ERT2 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh ERR0 ERR2 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn E0 E2 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh SG0 SG2 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br M0 M2 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh SB0 SB2 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl ETT1 ETT3 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh ETR1 ETR3 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl ERT1 ERT3 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd ERR1 ERR3 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or E1 E3 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd SG1 SG3 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn M1 M3 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SB1 SB3 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or ETT0 34 Rd/Br ETT2

17 Or/Yw ETR0 9 Br/Rd ETR2
43 Yw/Gn ERT0 35 Rd/Sl ERT2

18 Gn/Yw ERR0 10 Sl/Rd ERR2
44 Yw/Br E0 36 Bk/Bl E2
19 Br/Yw SG0 11 Bl/Bk SG2
45 Yw/Sl M0 37 Bk/Or M2
20 Sl/Yw SB0 12 Or/Bk SB2
46 Vi/Bl ETT1 38 Bk/Gn ETT3

21 Bl/Vi ETR1 13 Gn/Bk ETR3
47 Vi/Or ERT1 39 Bk/Br ERT3

22 Or/Vi ERR1 14 Br/Bk ERR3
48 Vi/Gn E1 40 Bk/Sl E3
23 Gn/Vi SG1 15 Sl/Bk SG3
49 Vi/Br M1 41 Yw/Bl M3
24 Br/Vi SB1 16 Bl/Yw SB3
NOTE: The ERR, ERT pairs are used only when a port is strapped for 4-wire operation.
5

Table 5-41 2SK cards Even Slots Odd Slots
26 Wh/Bl
1 Bl/Wh
27 Wh/Or
2 Or/Wh
28 Wh/Gn
3 Gn/Wh
29 Wh/Br
4 Br/Wh
30 Wh/Sl AT0
5 Sl/Wh AR0
31 Rd/Bl DT0
6 Bl/Rd DR0
32 Rd/Or AT1
7 Or/Rd AR1
33 Rd/Gn DT1
8 Gn/Rd DR1
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn AT0
13 Gn/Bk AR0

39 Bk/Br DT0
14 Br/Bk DR0
40 Bk/Sl AT1
15 Sl/Bk AR1
41 Yw/Bl DT1
16 Bl/Yw DR1
42 Yw/Or
17 Or/Yw
43 Yw/Gn
18 Gn/Yw
44 Yw/Br
19 Br/Yw
45 Yw/Sl
20 Sl/Yw
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: AT, AR are the Audio Duplex pairs to/from the station set.
DT, DR are the Data Duplex pairs to/from the station set.
5

Table 5-42 2SK cards
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl AT0 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh AR0 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl DT0 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd DR0 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or AT1 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd AR1 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn DT1 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd DR1 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or 34 Rd/Br
17 Or/Yw 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn 35 Rd/Sl
18 Gn/Yw 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br 36 Bk/Bl
19 Br/Yw 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl 37 Bk/Or
20 Sl/Yw 12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn AT0

21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk AR0
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br DT0

22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk DR0
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl AT1

23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk AR1
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl DT1

24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw DR1
DT, DR are the Data Duplex pairs t/from the station set.
5

Table 5-43 4SK, 8SK Even Slots Odd Slots
cards
Connector Connector * Connector Connector *
26 Wh/Bl AT0 AT4
1 Bl/Wh AR0 AR4
27 Wh/Or DT0 DT4
2 Or/Wh DR0 DR4
28 Wh/Gn AT1 AT5
3 Gn/Wh AR1 AR5
29 Wh/Br DT1 DT5
4 Br/Wh DR1 DR5
30 Wh/Sl AT2 AT6
5 Sl/Wh AR2 AR6
31 Rd/Bl DT2 DT6
6 Bl/Rd DR2 DR6
32 Rd/Or AT3 AT7
7 Or/Rd AR3 AR7
33 Rd/Gn DT3 DT7
8 Gn/Rd DR3 DR7
34 Rd/Br AT4
9 Br/Rd AR4
35 Rd/Sl DT4
10 Sl/Rd DR4
36 Bk/Bl AT5
11 Bl/Bk AR5
37 Bk/Or DT5
12 Or/Bk DR5
38 Bk/Gn AT6
13 Gn/Bk AR6

39 Bk/Br DT6
14 Br/Bk DR6
40 Bk/Sl AT7
15 Sl/Bk AR7
41 Yw/Bl DT7
16 Bl/Yw DR7
42 Yw/Or AT0
17 Or/Yw AR0
43 Yw/Gn DT0
18 Gn/Yw DR0
44 Yw/Br AT1
19 Br/Yw AR1
45 Yw/Sl DT1
20 Sl/Yw DR1
46 Vi/Bl AT2
21 Bl/Vi AR2
47 Vi/Or DT2
22 Or/Vi DR2
48 Vi/Gn AT3
23 Gn/Vi AR3
49 Vi/Br DT3
24 Br/Vi DR3
25 Sl/Vi
* Station Interface Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8SK cards
5

Table 5-44 4SK, 8SK
cards
Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl AT0 AT4 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh AR0 AR4 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or DT0 DT4 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh DR0 DR4 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn AT1 AT5 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh AR1 AR5 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br DT1 DT5 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh DR1 DR5 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl AT2 AT6 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh AR2 AR6 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl DT2 DT6 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd DR2 DR6 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or AT3 AT7 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd AR3 AR7 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn DT3 DT7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd DR3 DR7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or AT0 34 Rd/Br AT4

17 Or/Yw AR0 9 Br/Rd AR4
43 Yw/Gn DT0 35 Rd/Sl DT4

18 Gn/Yw DR0 10 Sl/Rd DR4
44 Yw/Br AT1 36 Bk/Bl AT5

19 Br/Yw AR1 11 Bl/Bk AR5
45 Yw/Sl DT1 37 Bk/Or DT5

20 Sl/Yw DR1 12 Or/Bk DR5
46 Vi/Bl AT2 38 Bk/Gn AT6

21 Bl/Vi AR2 13 Gn/Bk AR6
47 Vi/Or DT2 39 Bk/Br DT6

22 Or/Vi DR2 14 Br/Bk DR6
48 Vi/Gn AT3 40 Bk/Sl AT7

23 Gn/Vi AR3 15 Sl/Bk AR7
49 Vi/Br DT3 41 Yw/Bl DT7

24 Br/Vi DR3 16 Bl/Yw DR7
* Station Interface Circuits 4,5,6 and 7 are present only on 8SK cards
5

Table 5-45 2SD, 8SD Even Slots Odd Slots
cards
26 Wh/Bl DTT0* DTT4
1 Bl/Wh DRT0* DRT4
27 Wh/Or DTR0* DTR4
2 Or/Wh DRR0* DRR4
28 Wh/Gn DTT1* DTT5
3 Gn/Wh DRT1* DRT5
29 Wh/Br DTR1* DTR5
4 Br/Wh DRR1* DRR5
30 Wh/Sl DTT2 DTT6
5 Sl/Wh DRT2 DTR6
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 DTR6
6 Bl/Rd DRR2 DRR6
32 Rd/Or DTT3 DTT7
7 Or/Rd DRT3 DRT7
33 Rd/Gn DTR3 DTR7
8 Gn/Rd DRR3 DRR7
34 Rd/Br DTT4
9 Br/Rd DRT4
35 Rd/Sl DTR4
10 Sl/Rd DRR4
36 Bk/Bl DTT5
11 Bl/Bk DRT5
37 Bk/Or DTR5
12 Or/Bk DRR5
38 Bk/Gn DTT6
13 Gn/Bk DTR6

39 Bk/Br DTR6
14 Br/Bk DRR6
40 Bk/Sl DTT7
15 Sl/Bk DRT7
41 Yw/Bl DTR7
16 Bl/Yw DRR7
42 Yw/Or DTT0*
17 Or/Yw DRT0*
43 Yw/Gn DTR0*
18 Gn/Yw DRR0*
44 Yw/Br DTT1*
19 Br/Yw DRT1*
45 Yw/Sl DTR1*
20 Sl/Yw DRR1*
46 Vi/Bl DTT2
21 Bl/Vi DRT2
47 Vi/Or DTR2
22 Or/Vi DRR2
48 Vi/Gn DTT3
23 Gn/Vi DRT3
49 Vi/Br DTR3
24 Br/Vi DRR3
25 Sl/Vi
* 2SD cards only provide station interface circuits 0 and 1
5
NOTE: DTT, DRT are the Transmit Data pairs to the station set.
DTR, DRR are the Receive Data pairs from the station set.

Table 5-46 2SD, 8SD Even Slots
cards
26 Wh/Bl DTT0* DTT4 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh DRT0* DRT4 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or DTR0* DTR4 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh DRR0* DRR4 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn DTT1* DTT5 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh DRT1* DRT5 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br DTR1* DTR5 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh DRR1* DRR5 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl DTT2 DTT6 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh DRT2 DTR6 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 DTR6 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd DRR2 DRR6 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or DTT3 DTT7 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd DRT3 DRT7 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn DTR3 DTR7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd DRR3 DRR7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or DTT0* 34 Rd/Br DTT4

17 Or/Yw DRT0* 9 Br/Rd DRT4
43 Yw/Gn DTR0* 35 Rd/Sl DTR4

18 Gn/Yw DRR0* 10 Sl/Rd DRR4
44 Yw/Br DTT1* 36 Bk/Bl DTT5

19 Br/Yw DRT1* 11 Bl/Bk DRT5
45 Yw/Sl DTR1* 37 Bk/Or DTR5

20 Sl/Yw DRR1* 12 Or/Bk DRR5
46 Vi/Bl DTT2 38 Bk/Gn DTT6

21 Bl/Vi DRT2 13 Gn/Bk DTR6
47 Vi/Or DTR2 39 Bk/Br DTR6

22 Or/Vi DRR2 14 Br/Bk DRR6
48 Vi/Gn DTT3 40 Bk/Sl DTT7

23 Gn/Vi DRT3 15 Sl/Bk DRT7
49 Vi/Br DTR3 41 Yw/Bl DTR7

24 Br/Vi DRR3 16 Bl/Yw DRR7
* 2SD cards only provide station interface circuits 0 and 1
NOTE: DTT, DRT are the Transmit Data pairs to the station set.
DTR, DRR are the Receive Data pairs from the station set.
5

Table 5-47 8SKD, Even Slots Odd Slots
16SKD cards
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8
27 Wh/Or B1 B9
2 Or/Wh A1 A9
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10
3 Gn/Wh A2 A10
29 Wh/Br B3 B11
4 Br/Wh A3 A11
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12
5 Sl/Wh A4 A12
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13
6 Bl/Rd A5 A13
32 Rd/Or B6 B14
7 Or/Rd A6 A14
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15
8 Gn/Rd A7 A15
34 Rd/Br B8
9 Br/Rd A8
35 Rd/Sl B9
10 Sl/Rd A9
36 Bk/Bl B10
11 Bl/Bk A10
37 Bk/Or B11
12 Or/Bk A11

38 Bk/Gn B12
13 Gn/Bk A12
39 Bk/Br B13
14 Br/Bk A13
40 Bk/Sl B14
15 Sl/Bk A14
41 Yw/Bl B15
16 Bl/Yw A15
42 Yw/Or B0
17 Or/Yw A0
43 Yw/Gn B1
18 Gn/Yw A1
44 Yw/Br B2
19 Br/Yw A2
45 Yw/Sl B3
20 Sl/Yw A3
46 Vi/Bl B4
21 Bl/Vi A4
47 Vi/Or B5
22 Or/Vi A5
48 Vi/Gn B6
23 Gn/Vi A6
49 Vi/Br B7
24 Br/Vi A7
25 Sl/Vi
5
* Circuits 8 through 15 are present only on 16SKD cards.

Table 5-48 8SKD, Even Slots
16SKD cards
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or B1 B9 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh A1 A9 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10 36 Bk/Bl

3 Gn/Wh A2 A10 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br B3 B11 37 Bk/Or

4 Br/Wh A3 A11 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12 38 Bk/Gn

5 Sl/Wh A4 A12 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13 39 Bk/Br

6 Bl/Rd A5 A13 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or B6 B14 40 Bk/Sl

7 Or/Rd A6 A14 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15 41 Yw/Bl

8 Gn/Rd A7 A15 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots

42 Yw/Or B0 34 Rd/Br B8
17 Or/Yw A0 9 Br/Rd A8
43 Yw/Gn B1 35 Rd/Sl B9
18 Gn/Yw A1 10 Sl/Rd A9
44 Yw/Br B2 36 Bk/Bl B10
19 Br/Yw A2 11 Bl/Bk A10
45 Yw/Sl B3 37 Bk/Or B11
20 Sl/Yw A3 12 Or/Bk A11
46 Vi/Bl B4 38 Bk/Gn B12
21 Bl/Vi A4 13 Gn/Bk A12
47 Vi/Or B5 39 Bk/Br B13
22 Or/Vi A5 14 Br/Bk A13
48 Vi/Gn B6 40 Bk/Sl B14
23 Gn/Vi A6 15 Sl/Bk A14
49 Vi/Br B7 41 Yw/Bl B15
24 Br/Vi A7 16 Bl/Yw A15
* Circuits 8 through 15 are present only on 16SKD cards.
See Table 5-22 on page 5-61 for possible card combinations.

5

Table 5-49 8SVD cards Even Slots Odd Slots
26 Wh/Bl B0
1 Bl/Wh A0
27 Wh/Or B1
2 Or/Wh A1
28 Wh/Gn B2
3 Gn/Wh A2
29 Wh/Br B3
4 Br/Wh A3
30 Wh/Sl B4
5 Sl/Wh A4
31 Rd/Bl B5
6 Bl/Rd A5
32 Rd/Or B6
7 Or/Rd A6
33 Rd/Gn B7
8 Gn/Rd A7
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk

38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or B0
17 Or/Yw A0
43 Yw/Gn B1
18 Gn/Yw A1
44 Yw/Br B2
19 Br/Yw A2
45 Yw/Sl B3
20 Sl/Yw A3
46 Vi/Bl B4
21 Bl/Vi A4
47 Vi/Or B5
22 Or/Vi A5
48 Vi/Gn B6
23 Gn/Vi A6
49 Vi/Br B7
24 Br/Vi A7
50 Vi/Sl
5

25 Sl/Vi

Table 5-50 8SVD cards Even Slots
26 Wh/Bl B0 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh A0 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or B1 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh A1 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn B2 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh A2 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br B3 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh A3 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl B4 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh A4 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl B5 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd A5 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or B6 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd A6 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn B7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd A7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or B0 34 Rd/Br
17 Or/Yw A0 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn B1 35 Rd/Sl
18 Gn/Yw A1 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br B2 36 Bk/Bl
19 Br/Yw A2 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl B3 37 Bk/Or
20 Sl/Yw A3 12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl B4 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi A4 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or B5 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi A5 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn B6 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi A6 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br B7 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi A7 16 Bl/Yw

5

Table 5-51 8SFT, 16SFT, Even Slots Odd Slots
24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT,
24SDT cards Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8 *
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8 *
27 Wh/Or B1 B9 *
2 Or/Wh A1 A9 *
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10 *
3 Gn/Wh A2 A10 *
29 Wh/Br B3 B11 *
4 Br/Wh A3 A11 *
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12 *
5 Sl/Wh A4 A12 *
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13 *
6 Bl/Rd A5 A13 *
32 Rd/Or B6 B14 *
7 Or/Rd A6 A14 *
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15 *
8 Gn/Rd A7 A15 *
34 Rd/Br B16 ** B8 *
9 Br/Rd A16 ** A8 *
35 Rd/Sl B17 ** B9 *
10 Sl/Rd A17 ** A9 *
36 Bk/Bl B18 ** B10 *
11 Bl/Bk A18 ** A10 *
37 Bk/Or B19 ** B11 *
12 Or/Bk A19 ** A11 *
38 Bk/Gn B20 ** B12 *
13 Gn/Bk A20 ** A12 *

39 Bk/Br B21 ** B13 *
14 Br/Bk A21 ** A13 *
40 Bk/Sl B22 ** B14 *
15 Sl/Bk A22 ** A14 *
41 Yw/Bl B23 ** B15 *
16 Bl/Yw A23 ** A15 *
42 Yw/Or B0 B16 **
17 Or/Yw A0 A16 **
43 Yw/Gn B1 B17 **
18 Gn/Yw A1 A17 **
44 Yw/Br B2 B18 **
19 Br/Yw A2 A18 **
45 Yw/Sl B3 B19 **
20 Sl/Yw A3 A19 **
46 Vi/Bl B4 B20 **
21 Bl/Vi A4 A20 **
47 Vi/Or B5 B21 **
22 Or/Vi A5 A21 **
48 Vi/Gn B6 B22 **
23 Gn/Vi A6 A22 **
49 Vi/Br B7 B23 **
24 Br/Vi A7 A23 **

25 Sl/Vi
* Circuits 8 through 15 are not present on 8SFT and 8SDT cards.
** Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SFT and 24SDT cards.
5
*** See Table 5-22 on page 5-61 for possible card combinations.

Table 5-52 8SFT, 16SFT, Even Slots
24SFT, 8SDT, 16SDT,
24SDT cards Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
Connector Connector * Connector **
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8 34 Rd/Br B16
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8 9 Br/Rd A16
27 Wh/Or B1 B9 35 Rd/Sl B17

2 Or/Wh A1 A9 10 Sl/Rd A17
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10 36 Bk/Bl B18

3 Gn/Wh A2 A10 11 Bl/Bk A18
29 Wh/Br B3 B11 37 Bk/Or B19

4 Br/Wh A3 A11 12 Or/Bk A19
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12 38 Bk/Gn B20

5 Sl/Wh A4 A12 13 Gn/Bk A20
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13 39 Bk/Br B21

6 Bl/Rd A5 A13 14 Br/Bk A21
32 Rd/Or B6 B14 40 Bk/Sl B22

7 Or/Rd A6 A14 15 Sl/Bk A22
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15 41 Yw/Bl B23

8 Gn/Rd A7 A15 16 Bl/Yw A23
Odd Slots
Connector Connector ** Connector *
42 Yw/Or B0 B16 34 Rd/Br B8

17 Or/Yw A0 A16 9 Br/Rd A8
43 Yw/Gn B1 B17 35 Rd/Sl B9

18 Gn/Yw A1 A17 10 Sl/Rd A9
44 Yw/Br B2 B18 36 Bk/Bl B10

19 Br/Yw A2 A18 11 Bl/Bk A10
45 Yw/Sl B3 B19 37 Bk/Or B11

20 Sl/Yw A3 A19 12 Or/Bk A11
46 Vi/Bl B4 B20 38 Bk/Gn B12

21 Bl/Vi A4 A20 13 Gn/Bk A12
47 Vi/Or B5 B21 39 Bk/Br B13

22 Or/Vi A5 A21 14 Br/Bk A13
48 Vi/Gn B6 B22 40 Bk/Sl B14

23 Gn/Vi A6 A22 15 Sl/Bk A14
49 Vi/Br B7 B23 41 Yw/Bl B15

24 Br/Vi A7 A23 16 Bl/Yw A15
* Circuits 8 through 15 are not present on 8SFT and 8SDT cards.

** Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SFT and 24SDT cards.

5

Table 5-53 4S/SH, Even Slots Odd Slots
4SH/S(-LL) cards
26 Wh/Bl ST0
1 Bl/Wh SR0
27 Wh/Or ST1
2 Or/Wh SR1
28 Wh/Gn ST2
3 Gn/Wh SR2
29 Wh/Br ST3
4 Br/Wh SR3
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk

39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or ST0
17 Or/Yw SR0
43 Yw/Gn ST1
18 Gn/Yw SR1
44 Yw/Br ST2
19 Br/Yw SR2
45 Yw/Sl ST3
20 Sl/Yw SR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
25 Sl/Vi
See CAUTION note for SH/S cards with PS19 DC-D, on page 5-64
5

Table 5-54 4S/SH, Even Slots
4SH/S(-LL) cards
26 Wh/Bl ST0 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh SR0 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or ST1 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh SR1 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn ST2 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh SR2 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br ST3 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh SR3 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or ST0 34 Rd/Br

17 Or/Yw SR0 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn ST1 35 Rd/Sl

18 Gn/Yw SR1 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br ST2 36 Bk/Bl

19 Br/Yw SR2 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl ST3 37 Bk/Or

20 Sl/Yw SR3 12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
5

Table 5-55 8SA, 8SLS, Even Slots Odd Slots
8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S(-LL)
cards Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST4
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR4
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST5
2 Or/Wh SR1 SR5
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST6
3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR6
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST7
4 Br/Wh SR3 SR7
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br ST4
9 Br/Rd SR4
35 Rd/Sl ST5
10 Sl/Rd SR5
36 Bk/Bl ST6
11 Bl/Bk SR6
37 Bk/Or ST7
12 Or/Bk SR7
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk

39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or ST0
17 Or/Yw SR0
43 Yw/Gn ST1
18 Gn/Yw SR1
44 Yw/Br ST2
19 Br/Yw SR2
45 Yw/Sl ST3
20 Sl/Yw SR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: Cards 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, 8SA and 8SLS are interchangeable.
5

Table 5-56 8SA, 8SLS, Even Slots
8S, 8S/SH(-LL), 8SH/S
cards Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST4 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR4 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST5 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh SR1 SR5 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST6 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR6 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST7 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh SR3 SR7 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or ST0 34 Rd/Br ST4

17 Or/Yw SR0 9 Br/Rd SR4
43 Yw/Gn ST1 35 Rd/Sl ST5

18 Gn/Yw SR1 10 Sl/Rd SR5
44 Yw/Br ST2 36 Bk/Bl ST6

19 Br/Yw SR2 11 Bl/Bk SR6
45 Yw/Sl ST3 37 Bk/Or ST7

20 Sl/Yw SR3 12 Or/Bk SR7
46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
NOTE: Cards 8S, 8S/SH, 8SH/S, 8SA and 8SLS are interchangeable.
5

Table 5-57 16SLS, Even Slots Odd Slots
16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH,
16S/SH cards Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST8
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR8
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST9
2 Or/Wh SR1 SR9
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST10
3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR10
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST11
4 Br/Wh SR3 SR11
30 Wh/Sl ST4 ST12
5 Sl/Wh SR4 SR12
31 Rd/Bl ST5 ST13
6 Bl/Rd SR5 SR13
32 Rd/Or ST6 ST14
7 Or/Rd SR6 SR14
33 Rd/Gn ST7 ST15
8 Gn/Rd SR7 SR15
34 Rd/Br ST8
9 Br/Rd SR8
35 Rd/Sl ST9
10 Sl/Rd SR9
36 Bk/Bl ST10
11 Bl/Bk SR10
37 Bk/Or ST11
12 Or/Bk SR11
38 Bk/Gn ST12
13 Gn/Bk SR12

39 Bk/Br ST13
14 Br/Bk SR13
40 Bk/Sl ST14
15 Sl/Bk SR14
41 Yw/Bl ST15
16 Bl/Yw SR15
42 Yw/Or ST0
17 Or/Yw SR0
43 Yw/Gn ST1
18 Gn/Yw SR1
44 Yw/Br ST2
19 Br/Yw SR2
45 Yw/Sl ST3
20 Sl/Yw SR3
46 Vi/Bl ST4
21 Bl/Vi SR4
47 Vi/Or ST5
22 Or/Vi SR5
48 Vi/Gn ST6
23 Gn/Vi SR6
49 Vi/Br ST7
24 Br/Vi SR7
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: All the cards listed above are interchangeable.

5

Table 5-58 16SLS, Even Slots
16SH/S(-LL), 16S, 16SH,
16S/SH cards Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
30 Wh/Sl ST4 ST12 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh SR4 SR12 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl ST5 ST13 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd SR5 SR13 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or ST6 ST14 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd SR6 SR14 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn ST7 ST15 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd SR7 SR15 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots




46 Vi/Bl ST4 38 Bk/Gn ST12

21 Bl/Vi SR4 13 Gn/Bk SR12
47 Vi/Or ST5 39 Bk/Br ST13

22 Or/Vi SR5 14 Br/Bk SR13
48 Vi/Gn ST6 40 Bk/Sl ST14

23 Gn/Vi SR6 15 Sl/Bk SR14
49 Vi/Br ST7 41 Yw/Bl ST15

24 Br/Vi SR7 16 Bl/Yw SR15
NOTE: All the cards listed above are interchangeable.
5

Table 5-59 24SA, Even Slots Odd Slots
16SLS, 24SLS cards
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST8
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR8
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST9
2 Or/Wh SR1 SR9
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST10
3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR10
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST11
4 Br/Wh SR3 SR11
30 Wh/Sl ST4 ST12
5 Sl/Wh SR4 SR12
31 Rd/Bl ST5 ST13
6 Bl/Rd SR5 SR13
32 Rd/Or ST6 ST14
7 Or/Rd SR6 SR14
33 Rd/Gn ST7 ST15
8 Gn/Rd SR7 SR15
34 Rd/Br ST16 * ST8
9 Br/Rd SR16 * SR8
35 Rd/Sl ST17 * ST9
10 Sl/Rd SR17 * SR9
36 Bk/Bl ST18 * ST10
11 Bl/Bk SR18 * SR10
37 Bk/Or ST19 * ST11
12 Or/Bk SR19 * SR11

38 Bk/Gn ST20 * ST12
13 Gn/Bk SR20 * SR12
39 Bk/Br ST21 * ST13
14 Br/Bk SR21 * SR13
40 Bk/Sl ST22 * ST14
15 Sl/Bk SR22 * SR14
41 Yw/Bl ST23 * ST15
16 Bl/Yw SR23 * SR15
42 Yw/Or ST0 ST16 *
17 Or/Yw SR0 SR16 *
43 Yw/Gn ST1 ST17 *
18 Gn/Yw SR1 SR17 *
44 Yw/Br ST2 ST18 *
19 Br/Yw SR2 SR18 *
45 Yw/Sl ST3 ST19 *
20 Sl/Yw SR3 SR19 *
46 Vi/Bl ST4 ST20 *
21 Bl/Vi SR4 SR20 *
47 Vi/Or ST5 ST21 *
22 Or/Vi SR5 SR21 *
48 Vi/Gn ST6 ST22 *
23 Gn/Vi SR6 SR22 *
49 Vi/Br ST7 ST23 *
24 Br/Vi SR7 SR23 *
25 Sl/Vi
5
* Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SA and 24SLS cards.

Table 5-60 24SA, Even Slots
16SLS, 24SLScards
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST8 34 Rd/Br ST16
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR8 9 Br/Rd SR16
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST9 35 Rd/Sl ST17

2 Or/Wh SR1 SR9 10 Sl/Rd SR17
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST10 36 Bk/Bl ST18

3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR10 11 Bl/Bk SR18
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST11 37 Bk/Or ST19

4 Br/Wh SR3 SR11 12 Or/Bk SR19
30 Wh/Sl ST4 ST12 38 Bk/Gn ST20

5 Sl/Wh SR4 SR12 13 Gn/Bk SR20
31 Rd/Bl ST5 ST13 39 Bk/Br ST21

6 Bl/Rd SR5 SR13 14 Br/Bk SR21
32 Rd/Or ST6 ST14 40 Bk/Sl ST22

7 Or/Rd SR6 SR14 15 Sl/Bk SR22
33 Rd/Gn ST7 ST15 41 Yw/Bl ST23

8 Gn/Rd SR7 SR15 16 Bl/Yw SR23
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or ST0 ST16 34 Rd/Br ST8

17 Or/Yw SR0 SR16 9 Br/Rd SR8
43 Yw/Gn ST1 ST17 35 Rd/Sl ST9

18 Gn/Yw SR1 SR17 10 Sl/Rd SR9
44 Yw/Br ST2 ST18 36 Bk/Bl ST10

19 Br/Yw SR2 SR18 11 Bl/Bk SR10
45 Yw/Sl ST3 ST19 37 Bk/Or ST11

20 Sl/Yw SR3 SR19 12 Or/Bk SR11
46 Vi/Bl ST4 ST20 38 Bk/Gn ST12

21 Bl/Vi SR4 SR20 13 Gn/Bk SR12
47 Vi/Or ST5 ST21 39 Bk/Br ST13

22 Or/Vi SR5 SR21 14 Br/Bk SR13
48 Vi/Gn ST6 ST22 40 Bk/Sl ST14

23 Gn/Vi SR6 SR22 15 Sl/Bk SR14
49 Vi/Br ST7 ST23 41 Yw/Bl ST15

24 Br/Vi SR7 SR23 16 Bl/Yw SR15
* Circuits 16 through 23 are present only on 24SA and 24SLS cards.

5

Table 5-61 8SM cards Even Slots Odd Slots
26 Wh/Bl ST0 ST4
1 Bl/Wh SR0 SR4
27 Wh/Or ST1 ST5
2 Or/Wh SR1 SR5
28 Wh/Gn ST2 ST6
3 Gn/Wh SR2 SR6
29 Wh/Br ST3 ST7
4 Br/Wh SR3 SR7
30 Wh/Sl
5 Sl/Wh
31 Rd/Bl
6 Bl/Rd
32 Rd/Or
7 Or/Rd
33 Rd/Gn
8 Gn/Rd
34 Rd/Br ST4
9 Br/Rd SR4
35 Rd/Sl ST5
10 Sl/Rd SR5
36 Bk/Bl ST6
11 Bl/Bk SR6
37 Bk/Or ST7
12 Or/Bk SR7

38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk
39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or ST0
17 Or/Yw SR0
43 Yw/Gn ST1
18 Gn/Yw SR1
44 Yw/Br ST2
19 Br/Yw SR2
45 Yw/Sl ST3
20 Sl/Yw SR3
46 Vi/Bl
21 Bl/Vi
47 Vi/Or
22 Or/Vi
48 Vi/Gn
23 Gn/Vi
49 Vi/Br
24 Br/Vi
50 Vi/Sl
5

25 Sl/Vi

Table 5-62 8SM cards Even Slots
30 Wh/Sl 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots




46 Vi/Bl 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi 16 Bl/Yw
5

Table 5-63 8DRCF, Even Slots Odd Slots
8DRCM cards
26 Wh/Bl TXD1 TXD3
1 Bl/Wh RXD1 RXD3
27 Wh/Or RTS1 RTS3
2 Or/Wh CTS1 CTS3
28 Wh/Gn DTR1 DTR3
3 Gn/Wh DSR1 DSR3
29 Wh/Br TXD2 RLY1
4 Br/Wh RXD2 RLY1
30 Wh/Sl RTS2 RLY2
5 Sl/Wh CTS2 RLY2
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 RLY3
6 Bl/Rd DSR2 RLY3
32 Rd/Or M1 PAGE *
7 Or/Rd M1 PAGE *
33 Rd/Gn M2 Not Used
8 Gn/Rd M2 SGRND
34 Rd/Br TXD3
9 Br/Rd RXD3
35 Rd/Sl RTS3
10 Sl/Rd CTS3
36 Bk/Bl DTR3
11 Bl/Bk DSR3
37 Bk/Or RLY1
12 Or/Bk RLY1
38 Bk/Gn RLY2
13 Gn/Bk RLY2
39 Bk/Br RLY3

14 Br/Bk RLY3
40 Bk/Sl PAGE *
15 Sl/Bk PAGE *
41 Yw/Bl Not Used
16 Bl/Yw SGRND
42 Yw/Or TXD1
17 Or/Yw RXD1
43 Yw/Gn RTS1
18 Gn/Yw CTS1
44 Yw/Br DTR1
19 Br/Yw DSR1
45 Yw/Sl TXD2
20 Sl/Yw RXD2
46 Vi/Bl RTS2
21 Bl/Vi CTS2
47 Vi/Or DTR2
22 Or/Vi DSR2
48 Vi/Gn M1
23 Gn/Vi M1
49 Vi/Br M2
24 Br/Vi M2
25 Sl/Vi Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
* When replacing RMI with 8DRCM or 8DRCF, mind the PAGE I/O connections, since their MDF
location may vary.
NOTE: M1 - Audio Music Input (Internal/External)); M2 - Audio Music Input (External only)
RLY1 - External Paging Contact; RLY2 - UNA Bell Contact
5
RLY3 - System Alarm or Dial-Operated Contact

RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232E Data Ports

Table 5-64 8DRCF, Even Slots
8DRCM cards
26 Wh/Bl TXD1 TXD3 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh RXD1 RXD3 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or RTS1 RTS3 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh CTS1 CTS3 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn DTR1 DTR3 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh DSR1 DSR3 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br TXD2 RLY1 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh RXD2 RLY1 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl RTS2 RLY2 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh CTS2 RLY2 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 RLY3 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd DSR2 RLY3 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or M1 PAGE * 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd M1 PAGE * 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn M2 Not Used 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd M2 SGRND 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or TXD1 34 Rd/Br TXD3

17 Or/Yw RXD1 9 Br/Rd RXD3
43 Yw/Gn RTS1 35 Rd/Sl RTS3

18 Gn/Yw CTS1 10 Sl/Rd CTS3
44 Yw/Br DTR1 36 Bk/Bl DTR3

19 Br/Yw DSR1 11 Bl/Bk DSR3
45 Yw/Sl TXD2 37 Bk/Or RLY1

20 Sl/Yw RXD2 12 Or/Bk RLY1
46 Vi/Bl RTS2 38 Bk/Gn RLY2

21 Bl/Vi CTS2 13 Gn/Bk RLY2
47 Vi/Or DTR2 39 Bk/Br RLY3

22 Or/Vi DSR2 14 Br/Bk RLY3
48 Vi/Gn M1 40 Bk/Sl PAGE *

23 Gn/Vi M1 15 Sl/Bk PAGE *
49 Vi/Br M2 41 Yw/Bl Not Used

24 Br/Vi M2 16 Bl/Yw SGRND
* When replacing RMI with 8DRCM or 8DRCF, mind the PAGE I/O connections, since their MDF
location may vary.
NOTE: M1 - Audio Music Input (Internal/External));

M2 - Audio Music Input (External only)
RLY1 - External Paging Contact;
RLY2 - UNA Bell Contact
5

RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232E Data Ports

Table 5-65 RMI, ASU Even Slots Odd Slots
cards
26 Wh/Bl TXD1 * TXD3 *
1 Bl/Wh RXD1 * RXD3 *
27 Wh/Or RTS1 * RTS3 *
2 Or/Wh CTS1 * CTS3 *
28 Wh/Gn DTR1 * DTR3 *
3 Gn/Wh DSR1 * DSR3 *
29 Wh/Br TXD2 * RLY1
4 Br/Wh RXD2 * RLY1
30 Wh/Sl RTS2 * RLY2
5 Sl/Wh CTS2 * RLY2
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 * RLY3
6 Bl/Rd DSR2 * RLY3
32 Rd/Or M/P1
7 Or/Rd M/P1
33 Rd/Gn M/P2 Not Used
8 Gn/Rd M/P2 SGRND *
34 Rd/Br TXD3 *
9 Br/Rd RXD3 *
35 Rd/Sl RTS3 *
10 Sl/Rd CTS3 *
36 Bk/Bl DTR3 *
11 Bl/Bk DSR3 *
37 Bk/Or RLY1
12 Or/Bk RLY1
38 Bk/Gn RLY2
13 Gn/Bk RLY2
39 Bk/Br RLY3

14 Br/Bk RLY3
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl Not Used
16 Bl/Yw SGRND *
42 Yw/Or TXD1 *
17 Or/Yw RXD1 *
43 Yw/Gn RTS1 *
18 Gn/Yw CTS1 *
44 Yw/Br DTR1 *
19 Br/Yw DSR1 *
45 Yw/Sl TXD2 *
20 Sl/Yw RXD2 *
46 Vi/Bl RTS2 *
21 Bl/Vi CTS2 *
47 Vi/Or DTR2 *
22 Or/Vi DSR2 *
48 Vi/Gn M/P1
23 Gn/Vi M/P1
49 Vi/Br M/P2
24 Br/Vi M/P2
25 Sl/Vi Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
* RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232C Data Ports, are present only on RMI cards.
NOTE: M/P1 - Audio Input (MOH, Background Music)

M/P2 - 2nd Audio Input or External Paging Audio Output
RLY1 - External Paging Contact
5


Table 5-66 RMI, ASU Even Slots
cards
26 Wh/Bl TXD1 * TXD3 * 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh RXD1 * RXD3 * 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or RTS1 * RTS3 * 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh CTS1 * CTS3 * 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn DTR1 * DTR3 * 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh DSR1 * DSR3 * 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br TXD2 * RLY1 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh RXD2 * RLY1 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl RTS2 * RLY2 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh CTS2 * RLY2 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl DTR2 * RLY3 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd DSR2 * RLY3 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or M/P1 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd M/P1 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn M/P2 Not Used 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd M/P2 SGRND * 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or TXD1 * 34 Rd/Br TXD3 *

17 Or/Yw RXD1 * 9 Br/Rd RXD3 *
43 Yw/Gn RTS1 * 35 Rd/Sl RTS3 *

18 Gn/Yw CTS1 * 10 Sl/Rd CTS3 *
44 Yw/Br DTR1 * 36 Bk/Bl DTR3 *

19 Br/Yw DSR1 * 11 Bl/Bk DSR3 *
45 Yw/Sl TXD2 * 37 Bk/Or RLY1

20 Sl/Yw RXD2 * 12 Or/Bk RLY1
46 Vi/Bl RTS2 * 38 Bk/Gn RLY2

21 Bl/Vi CTS2 * 13 Gn/Bk RLY2
47 Vi/Or DTR2 * 39 Bk/Br RLY3

22 Or/Vi DSR2 * 14 Br/Bk RLY3
48 Vi/Gn M/P1 40 Bk/Sl

23 Gn/Vi M/P1 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br M/P2 41 Yw/Bl Not Used

24 Br/Vi M/P2 16 Bl/Yw SGRND *
* RXD, TXD, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR, SGRND - RS232C Data Ports, are present only
on RMI cards.
NOTE: M/P1 - Audio Input (MOH, Background Music)

M/P2 - 2nd Audio Input or External Paging Audio Output
RLY1 - External Paging Contact
5

Table 5-67 SKW/x cards Even Slots Odd Slots
(Issue 4 and later)
26 Wh/Bl TT BS1 *
1 Bl/Wh TR BS1 *
27 Wh/Or RT BS1 *
2 Or/Wh RR BS1 *
28 Wh/Gn TT BS2 *
3 Gn/Wh TR BS2 *
29 Wh/Br RT BS2 *
4 Br/Wh RR BS2 *
30 Wh/Sl CLK 2M (-)
5 Sl/Wh CLK 2M (+)
31 Rd/Bl CLK 8K (-)
6 Bl/Rd CLK 8K (+)
32 Rd/Or PLS 320 ms (-)
7 Or/Rd PLS 320 ms (+)
33 Rd/Gn RS 485 (-)
8 Gn/Rd RS 485 (+)
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk

39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or TT BS1 *
17 Or/Yw TR BS1 *
43 Yw/Gn RT BS1 *
18 Gn/Yw RR BS1 *
44 Yw/Br TT BS2 *
19 Br/Yw TR BS2 *
45 Yw/Sl RT BS2 *
20 Sl/Yw RR BS2 *
46 Vi/Bl CLK 2M (-)
21 Bl/Vi CLK 2M (+)
47 Vi/Or CLK 8K (-)
22 Or/Vi CLK 8K (+)
48 Vi/Gn PLS 320 ms (-)
23 Gn/Vi PLS 320 ms (+)
49 Vi/Br RS 485 (-)
24 Br/Vi RS 485 (+)
25 Sl/Vi
* TR BS and TT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Rx plug.
RR BS and RT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Tx plug.
5

Table 5-68 SKW/x cards Even Slots
(Issue 4 and later)
26 Wh/Bl TT BS1 * 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh TR BS1 * 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or RT BS1 * 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh RR BS1 * 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn TT BS2 * 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh TR BS2 * 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br RT BS2 * 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh RR BS2 * 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl CLK 2M (-) 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh CLK 2M (+) 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl CLK 8K (-) 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd CLK 8K (+) 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or PLS 320 ms (-) 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd PLS 320 ms (+) 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn RS 485 (-) 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd RS 485 (+) 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or TT BS1 * 34 Rd/Br

17 Or/Yw TR BS1 * 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn RT BS1 * 35 Rd/Sl

18 Gn/Yw RR BS1 * 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br TT BS2 * 36 Bk/Bl

19 Br/Yw TR BS2 * 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl RT BS2 * 37 Bk/Or

20 Sl/Yw RR BS2 * 12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl CLK 2M (-) 38 Bk/Gn

21 Bl/Vi CLK 2M (+) 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or CLK 8K (-) 39 Bk/Br

22 Or/Vi CLK 8K (+) 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn PLS 320 ms (-) 40 Bk/Sl

23 Gn/Vi PLS 320 ms (+) 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br RS 485 (-) 41 Yw/Bl

24 Br/Vi RS 485 (+) 16 Bl/Yw
* TR BS and TT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Rx plug

RR BS and RT BS pairs are connected to pins 3,4 of base stations Tx plug.
5

Table 5-69 8SKK card Even Slots Odd Slots
for Wireless FlexAir
(Radio Base Station) Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl B0
1 Bl/Wh A0
27 Wh/Or B1
2 Or/Wh A1
28 Wh/Gn B2
3 Gn/Wh A2
29 Wh/Br B3
4 Br/Wh A3
30 Wh/Sl B4
5 Sl/Wh A4
31 Rd/Bl B5
6 Bl/Rd A5
32 Rd/Or B6
7 Or/Rd A6
33 Rd/Gn B7
8 Gn/Rd A7
34 Rd/Br
9 Br/Rd
35 Rd/Sl
10 Sl/Rd
36 Bk/Bl
11 Bl/Bk
37 Bk/Or
12 Or/Bk
38 Bk/Gn
13 Gn/Bk

39 Bk/Br
14 Br/Bk
40 Bk/Sl
15 Sl/Bk
41 Yw/Bl
16 Bl/Yw
42 Yw/Or B0
17 Or/Yw A0
43 Yw/Gn B1
18 Gn/Yw A1
44 Yw/Br B2
19 Br/Yw A2
45 Yw/Sl B3
20 Sl/Yw A3
46 Vi/Bl B4
21 Bl/Vi A4
47 Vi/Or B5
22 Or/Vi A5
48 Vi/Gn B6
23 Gn/Vi A6
49 Vi/Br B7
24 Br/Vi A7
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: For 16SKK cards see Table 5-71 below.

5

Table 5-70 8SKK card Even Slots
(Radio Base Station) Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
26 Wh/Bl B0 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh A0 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or B1 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh A1 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn B2 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh A2 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br B3 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh A3 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl B4 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh A4 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl B5 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd A5 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or B6 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd A6 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn B7 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd A7 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or B0 34 Rd/Br
17 Or/Yw A0 9 Br/Rd
43 Yw/Gn B1 35 Rd/Sl
18 Gn/Yw A1 10 Sl/Rd
44 Yw/Br B2 36 Bk/Bl
19 Br/Yw A2 11 Bl/Bk
45 Yw/Sl B3 37 Bk/Or
20 Sl/Yw A3 12 Or/Bk
46 Vi/Bl B4 38 Bk/Gn
21 Bl/Vi A4 13 Gn/Bk
47 Vi/Or B5 39 Bk/Br
22 Or/Vi A5 14 Br/Bk
48 Vi/Gn B6 40 Bk/Sl
23 Gn/Vi A6 15 Sl/Bk
49 Vi/Br B7 41 Yw/Bl
24 Br/Vi A7 16 Bl/Yw
NOTE: For 16SKK cards see Table 5-72 below.

5

Table 5-71 16SKK card Even Slots Odd Slots
(Radio Base Station) Pin Color Upper Lower Upper Lower
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8
27 Wh/Or B1 B9
2 Or/Wh A1 A9
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10
3 Gn/Wh A2 A10
29 Wh/Br B3 B11
4 Br/Wh A3 A11
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12
5 Sl/Wh A4 A12
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13
6 Bl/Rd A5 A13
32 Rd/Or B6 B14
7 Or/Rd A6 A14
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15
8 Gn/Rd A7 A15
34 Rd/Br B8
9 Br/Rd A8
35 Rd/Sl B9
10 Sl/Rd A9
36 Bk/Bl B10
11 Bl/Bk A10
37 Bk/Or B11
12 Or/Bk A11
38 Bk/Gn B12
13 Gn/Bk A12

39 Bk/Br B13
14 Br/Bk A13
40 Bk/Sl B14
15 Sl/Bk A14
41 Yw/Bl B15
16 Bl/Yw A15
42 Yw/Or B0
17 Or/Yw A0
43 Yw/Gn B1
18 Gn/Yw A1
44 Yw/Br B2
19 Br/Yw A2
45 Yw/Sl B3
20 Sl/Yw A3
46 Vi/Bl B4
21 Bl/Vi A4
47 Vi/Or B5
22 Or/Vi A5
48 Vi/Gn B6
23 Gn/Vi A6
49 Vi/Br B7
24 Br/Vi A7
25 Sl/Vi
NOTE: Radio Base Station ports 8 through 15 are not present only on 8SKK cards.
5

Table 5-72 16SKK card Even Slots
(Radio Base Station) Pin Color Upper Lower Pin Color Upper
26 Wh/Bl B0 B8 34 Rd/Br
1 Bl/Wh A0 A8 9 Br/Rd
27 Wh/Or B1 B9 35 Rd/Sl
2 Or/Wh A1 A9 10 Sl/Rd
28 Wh/Gn B2 B10 36 Bk/Bl
3 Gn/Wh A2 A10 11 Bl/Bk
29 Wh/Br B3 B11 37 Bk/Or
4 Br/Wh A3 A11 12 Or/Bk
30 Wh/Sl B4 B12 38 Bk/Gn
5 Sl/Wh A4 A12 13 Gn/Bk
31 Rd/Bl B5 B13 39 Bk/Br
6 Bl/Rd A5 A13 14 Br/Bk
32 Rd/Or B6 B14 40 Bk/Sl
7 Or/Rd A6 A14 15 Sl/Bk
33 Rd/Gn B7 B15 41 Yw/Bl
8 Gn/Rd A7 A15 16 Bl/Yw
Odd Slots
42 Yw/Or B0 34 Rd/Br B8
17 Or/Yw A0 9 Br/Rd A8
43 Yw/Gn B1 35 Rd/Sl B9
18 Gn/Yw A1 10 Sl/Rd A9
44 Yw/Br B2 36 Bk/Bl B10

19 Br/Yw A2 11 Bl/Bk A10
45 Yw/Sl B3 37 Bk/Or B11

20 Sl/Yw A3 12 Or/Bk A11
46 Vi/Bl B4 38 Bk/Gn B12

21 Bl/Vi A4 13 Gn/Bk A12
47 Vi/Or B5 39 Bk/Br B13

22 Or/Vi A5 14 Br/Bk A13
48 Vi/Gn B6 40 Bk/Sl B14

23 Gn/Vi A6 15 Sl/Bk A14
49 Vi/Br B7 41 Yw/Bl B15

24 Br/Vi A7 16 Bl/Yw A15
NOTE: Radio Base Station ports 8 through 15 are not present only on 8SKK cards.
5

0
Chapter 6
Cage Description
6.1 Cage Description and Installation........................6-3

Coral
6.2 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage ...............................6-39
6.3 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage .......................6-45
6.4 System Configuration Options...........................6-53
Cor

Cage Description and Installation
6.1
This section describes the Coral IPx 800 cage. Upon completing this section, you will
be familiar with cage components and the general procedure of installing a cage onto a
19" or 23" rack. The Coral IPx 800 system is housed in one or more rack-mounted
cages. Each system consists of one main cage, which contains the common control
cards and peripheral cards, and one or two optional expansion cages. There are up to
three cages per system.
Coral IPx 800 is sold as a separate unit that is mounted on a rack supplied
by the customer.
For more detailed information about specific cages (main or expansion), refer to the
following:
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage, on page 6-39
Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage, on page 6-45
The actual instructions for installing the cage are found in Chapter 2.
1 Cage Structure
0
The cage houses all hardware components of the Coral IPx 800 system including the
power supply unit, control cards, peripheral cards, and the I/O connections. The cages
are designed to provide a simple, reliable method for installing and removing the Cage Description and Installation
printed circuit cards and assemblies that contain the active circuitry of the system.
The cage is field mounted in separate cages onto a rack supplied by the customer.
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 display the cage mounted onto a 19" rack. The cage can be
mounted onto a 23" rack by removing and reconfiguring mounting brackets. The cage
includes rack-mounted brackets and a door.
The main and expansion cages are easily accommodated into a standard 19 inch or 23
inch rack. The Coral IPx 800 system can be expanded by adding more cages.
A hinged, removable latching door in the front enables easy access to circuit cards. All
cages are convection cooled in such a manner that allows cool air inflow to the cage
6
from the bottom of the front door and out from the top panel.
Cage Description 6-3

All cages are fully protected against electrical surge and electromagnetic and
radio-frequency interference (EMI and RFI). They meet or exceed all specifications of
telecommunications and electrical safety authorities world-wide. Peripheral interface
connections are made via the rear panel.

Cage with Door Closed

Cage with Door Opened
6

Figure 6-3 displays the system configuration with three cages mounted onto a rack
with the door closed.

System with Three Cages

6

0
2 Cage Front, Top, and Side Panels

The Coral IPx 800 cage is designed to provide a simple, reliable method for installing
and removing the printed circuit cards and assemblies that contain the active circuitry
of the system.
The Coral IPx 800 cage includes slots for control, service, and peripheral cards, a slot
for the power supply unit, door locking studs, free space at the bottom of the cage
designed for cool air intake, holes on the top panel for hot air outflow, I/O cable
routing from the front of the cage to the left and right panels, and a door release
mechanism on the right side of the cabinet adjacent to the door hinge.
6

Front of the Cage
The front view of the cage displays the cage door. See Figure 6-4. The cage door
includes a ventilation grille near the bottom for incoming cool air and locking studs on
the left side of the door.
Figure 6-4 Front, Left,

Right, and Top Views of Ventilation holes Right mounting
bracket
Coral IPx 800 Cage
Rear panel
Cage door
Left cable
routing hole
Door
fasteners
Left mounting
bracket
Left mounting Ventilation holes

bracket
Rear panel
Cage door
Right cable
Ventilation grille routing hole
Right mounting
6
bracket

Left and Right Panels
Figure 6-5 displays the left and right panels of the cage including the mounting
bracket, which is used to attach the cage to the rack. The mounting bracket for the rack
can be fitted to interface with both 19” and 23” racks. The cage is supplied with the
bracket mounted to interface with 19” racks. If the cage is to be mounted on a 23”
rack, the bracket must be reassembled accordingly, as described on page 2-13, Preparing
the Cage for Mounting onto a 23” Rack.
Routing holes at the bottom of the left and right panels enable I/O connection wires to
be routed from the front of the cards.
Figure 6-5 Left and

Right Panels of the Cage Mounting bracket
19" configuration
Hanging pin
Left side
Top door fastener
Rear panel
Cage door
Bottom door fastener
Cable routing
hole
Mounting bracket
19" configuration
Hanging pin
Right side
Cage door Rear panel
Cable routing
6
hole

Top Panel
The top panel includes ventilation holes that allow warm air from the cage to flow
outwards. Do not block the top panel of the cage. If the ventilation holes are blocked,
heat will not be removed from the cage and the heat build-up could cause a fire. When
two Coral cages are installed one on top of the other, heat from the lower cage is
released through the bottom rear side of the cage above. When other systems are
installed directly above the Coral cage, a heat buffer bracket must be installed. See page
6-29, Mounting Brackets for specific conditions that require this bracket and the number
of brackets supplied per system.
Fire Hazard. The top panel ventilation holes are designed to allow warm air to flow out of
the cage. Placing objects on top of the cage will interfere with the heat dissipation
process and could result in fire.
Figure 6-6 Top Panel of

Cage Clear of Objects
X
6

Door
The door on the front of the cage provides physical protection to internal circuitry
during normal operation while still allowing access to the interior for maintenance
activities. The cage is also protected from RFI when the door is closed.
The cage door includes a ventilation grille near the bottom that allows cool air to enter
the cage. See Figure 6-7 for details. Locking studs are included on the left side of the
door that prevent the door from opening during normal operation. The locking stud is
moved from the unlocked position to the locked position by inserting a screwdriver
blade into the stud slot and turning counter-clockwise half a turn.
Figure 6-7 Front View of

Cage Door
Lock
Locking studs
Ventilation grille
The inside of the door includes a grounding wire connection designed to ground the
door. See Figure 6-8 for details. Door hinge mounts are mounted onto the hinges on the
right side of the cage. The door release mechanism on the right side of the cage
prevents the door from being removed from the cage accidentally from the two door
hinges.
Figure 6-8 Cage Door release

Including Components mechanism
Relevant to the Door
Door
fastening Door hinges Door hinge
holes (Male) mounts
(Female)
Locking
studs
Free space
Grounding wire
6
connection
Ventilation grille

0
3 Rear Panel
The rear panel includes the I/O Champ and RJ-45 cable connectors, cable connectors
between cages, AC power cord, AC power cover, DC power cover, spare fuse, and the
cage ground terminal. The rear panel of the cage is RFI protected. The Champ
connectors are secured to the rear panel with a set of Hook and Loop VelcroTM nylon
straps. See Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-9 Coral

Four upper DC-D power supply
IPx 800M Rear Panel Champ I/O duplication connector
connectors
Connector to 9 RJ-45 I/O

expansion connectors
cage
Spare fuse
RJ-45 LAN
connector DC power
Not used cover
LIU AC power
RJ-45 LAN cover
connector
Four lower
Champ I/O Set of Velcro Ground AC power
connectors nylon straps for terminal cord
securing cables
Figure 6-10 Coral

IPx 800X Rear Panel Six upper
Champ I/O DC-D power supply
connectors duplication connector
11 RJ-45 I/O
connectors
Connectors
Spare fuse
to other cages
DC power
cover
AC power
cover
Six lower
Champ I/O
connectors
Set of Velcro Ground AC power
6
nylon straps for terminal cord

securing cables

Connectors to Other Cages
Each cage includes connectors that allow cable connection between cages. The type
and quantity of cable depends on the cage number. For further information, see page
6-53, System Configuration Options.
I/O RJ-45 Connectors

Every peripheral card slot includes a single RJ-45 connector on the rear panel that is
used for digital cards (E1, T1, PRI, 2DT, UDT, PUGW, etc.). The RJ-45 connectors
provide the connections for the LAN and the digital trunks.
Digital Trunks
Place TBR, 2DT, UDT, PRI, T1, 30T, or 30T/x digital trunk interface cards in slot #4 (the
primary synchronization slot) or slot #5 (the secondary synchronization slot). These
slots have been pre-wired to function as the primary and secondary external clock
sources. For further details, see the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Manual - Chapter 3.
LAN RJ-45 Connectors

The Coral IPx 800M cage includes two RJ-45 LAN connectors on the rear panel. The
left connector is used for LAN connection to LIU. The right connector is for future use.
Cage Ground Terminal

The ground terminal is used to connect the cage to the master ground unit.
See Figure 6-13.
Odd and Even Slots

Each universal I/O slot is referred to as an odd slot (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11) or an even slot (2,
4, 6, 8, 10, 12).
I/O Champ Connectors

Half of the I/O Champ connectors are positioned on the cage rear panel on the top,
and are referred to as the upper connectors. The remaining half connectors are mounted
on the bottom, and are referred to as the lower connectors.
Each Champ connector includes a set of straps that allow the connectors to be secured
in place and prevent them from being inadvertently disconnected. Mating male plugs
should be industry standard (Amphenol®, AMPTM, or equivalent). The connectors
provide metallic paths from the peripheral cards to station and trunk equipment
6
external to the system. The upper and lower champs are generally connected to the

MDF while the RJ-45 connectors are generally connected to the LAN or to digital
equipment.
Card Slot to I/O Champ Connector Relationship

Each peripheral card has a maximum of twenty four wire pairs. The twenty four wire
pairs are connected to the top and bottom I/O Champ connectors. Each pair of I/O
Champ connectors (upper and lower) serve two peripheral cards (even and odd).
Figure 6-11 illustrates the card slot to I/O Champ connector relationship. Pair 25 on
each I/O connector is not used.
Figure 6-12 illustrates the layout of I/O connectors for any pair of odd and even
universal I/O slots, as they appear on industry standard, 66 type punch blocks.
Refer to the specific card tables in Chapter 5 for I/O connector pin assignments. There
are no I/O connector pin assignments for the power supplies, common control cards,
or shared service cards.

6

Connection Pair 25 1 UPPER
I/O CHAMP
Allocation CONNECTOR
50 26
EVEN SLOTS
2,4,6,8,10,12
NOT
USED
ODD SLOTS
1,3,5,7,9,11
LOWER
25 1 I/O CHAMP
CONNECTOR
50 26

Connection Layout for 66 To LOWER I/O To UPPER I/O
Type Punch Blocks CHAMP CONNECTOR CHAMP CONNECTOR
Wht/Blu Wht/Blu 1/26 White/blue
2/27 White/orange
3/28 White/green
Pairs 1-8
Pairs 1-8
4/29 White/brown
EVEN EVEN
SLOTS SLOTS 5/30 White/slate
6/31 Red/blue
7/32 Red/orange
Red/Grn Red/Grn 8/33 Red/green
Red/Brn Red/Brn 9/34 Red/brown
10/35 Red/slate
11/36 Black/blue
Pairs 9-16
Pairs 9-16
ODD EVEN 12/37 Black/orange
SLOTS SLOTS 13/38 Black/green
14/39 Black/brown
15/40 Black/slate
Ylw/Blu Ylw/Blu 16/41 Yellow/blue
Ylw/Org Ylw/Org 17/42 Yellow/orange
18/43 Yellow/green
19/44 Yellow/brown
Pairs 17-24
Pairs 17-24
ODD ODD 20/45 Yellow/slate

SLOTS SLOTS
21/46 Violet/blue
22/47 Violet/orange
23/48 Violet/green
Vio/Brn Vio/Brn 24/49 Violet/brown
Not used Pair 25 Not used Pair 25 25/50 Violet/slate

Coral IPx 800,3000, 4000
ODD SLOTS 1-11

EVEN SLOTS 2-12
Note: These connections are identical for IPx 800, 3000, and 4000 systems.
AC Power Cord
The AC power cord is attached to the rear panel beneath the DC power cover. For
more information, see page 6-15, Coral IPx 800 DC Power Cover. If the system runs on
6
DC current, the AC power cord is not in use and can be disconnected from the cage.
See page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord for more details. If the system runs on AC

current, the AC power cord must be connected to the cage. See page 6-21, Installing the
AC Power Cord.
AC Power Cover
The AC power cover protects the AC power cord housing when it is not in use and the
cord has been disconnected (for DC systems). For detailed instructions on how to
install the AC power cover, see page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord.
DC Power Cover
The DC power cover is attached to the rear panel with two M4 screws on the top side
of the cover. See Figure 6-14. The bottom side of the cover includes two angles that
form extrusions, which are inserted into two mating slots on the rear panel of the cage
and secure the bottom part of the DC cover to the rear panel. A spare DC fuse is
attached to the DC cover.
Figure 6-13 DC Power

Cover Closure
Requirement for both AC
and DC Powered Coral
IPx 800 Systems
DC power cover
AC power cover
Cage ground terminal
AC power cord
to wall socket
M4 screws
DC Power Cover inserted through
these holes
Spare fuse for

DC powered
systems
Extrusions
6

0
4 DC Power Terminals and Fuse

The DC power terminals and fuse are protected by a cover that is secured to the rear
panel. See Figure 6-18.
Opening the DC Power Cover

1. Unfasten the two M4 screws at the top of the DC power cover by turning a
Phillips screwdriver in the counter clockwise direction.
2. Lift and unhook the extrusion at the bottom of the DC cover from the rear panel.
Place the screws in a safe place for reassembly.
3. Remove the DC power cover.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live wires could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that
all DC power is disconnected from the cage before opening.
Figure 6-15 DC Cover

Removal
Unscrew the two

screws in the
Step counter clockwise
direction.
Lift and raise

Step cover.
Step Remove cover.

6

Closing the DC Power Cover
1. Insert the extrusion at the bottom of the DC cover into the two mating slots on the
rear panel.
2. Push the DC cover closed.
3. Fasten the two M4 screws in the clockwise direction.
Figure 6-16 DC Cover

Installation
Insert bottom
Step extrusion into
mating slot on
rear panel.
Push cover
Step closed.

Fasten cover
Step clockwise.
6

DC Power Terminals
Beneath the DC power cover (Figure 6-17) are two 48 VRTN terminals, two –48V
terminals, and two GND terminals. Upper and lower terminals are connected with a
bonding bar. This allows interconnection of (up to four) cages. The terminals marked
GND are not used. See page 2-22, Wiring DC Powered Systems for a description of how to
connect the power wiring of the cage.
DC Power Fuse
The DC power fuse is attached to the rear panel of the cage underneath the DC power
cover. All cages include a fuse rated 30A/125V/S.B. All cages are shipped with a spare
fuse attached to the DC power cover. The spare fuse can be easily removed from the
DC power cover.
Figure 6-17 Rear Panel

of Coral IPx 800 Cage Spare fuse
with DC Power Cover 30A/125V/S.B.
Removed
DC power
cover
DC power fuse
30A/125V/S.B.
DC power terminals
AC power cord
AC power cover

DC Power Terminals DC power fuse
30A/125V/S.B.
Fuse
48V
-48V RTN GND
-48V 48V GND

6
RTN
Bonding bars

Replacing a DC Power Fuse
1. Verify that the DC power source is disconnected from the cage.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live wires could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that
all DC power is disconnected from the cage before opening.
2. Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover for details.
3. Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse. A spare fuse is located on the
DC power cover.
4. Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover for details.
5. Replace the spare fuse on the DC power cover with the same type and rating of
fuse.

6

5 AC Power Cord and Cover
When the system runs on DC power, you do not need the AC power cord, and it can
be disconnected from the cage.
Removing the AC Power Cord

To disconnect the AC power cord from the cage (See Figure 6-19):
1. Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover.
2. Unfasten the two screws that secure the AC power cord to the cage backplane and
remove the AC power cord.
Unfasten the screws with extreme caution, taking care that they do not fall into the
space between the rear panel and backplane. If the screws fall into that space, the
rear panel will have to be removed, and the screws extracted. Otherwise, the system
may malfunction due to short circuit.
3. Unfasten the two screws that secure the AC connector cover to the rear panel.
4. Reassemble the AC power cover over the space vacated by the AC connector.
5. Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover.
6. Store the AC power cord and screws for future reassembly.
Figure 6-19 AC Power

Cord Disassembly Unfasten screws
1 securing AC cord
to cage and remove
cord
Unfasten captive
2 screws securing
AC connector cover
to cage
Reassemble AC
3 connector cover
6
over space vacated

by AC cord

Installing the AC Power Cord
When the system runs on AC power, you need the AC power cord, and it must be
connected to the cage.
To connect the AC power cord to the cage (see Figure 6-20):
1. Open the DC power cover. See page 6-16, Opening the DC Power Cover.
2. Unfasten the two screws and washers that secure the AC power cover to the cage
backplane.
3. Reassemble the AC power cover adjacent to the AC power opening.
4. Assemble the AC power cord with the two M3 screws.
Fasten the screws with extreme caution, taking care that they do not fall into the space
between the rear panel and backplane. If the screws fall into that space, the rear
panel will have to be removed, and the screws extracted. Otherwise, the system may
malfunction due to a short circuit.
5. Close the DC power cover. See page 6-17, Closing the DC Power Cover.
Figure 6-20 AC Power

Cord Assembly
Unfasten captive
1 screws securing
AC connector cover
to cage
Reassemble AC
2 connector cover
adjacent to the
AC power
connector opening.
Assemble AC power
3 cord to the cage.
6

0
6 Accessing the Cage Interior

Opening the Door
1. Unfasten the two locking studs on the left side of the door with a straight blade
screwdriver (half a turn counter clockwise). See Figure 6-21.
2. Pull the door open using moderate force. The door opens to 110°.
Electrical Hazard. Contact with live internal components could cause shock, burn, or
death. During system operation, the cage door must remain closed at all times. Exercise
extreme caution while handling the internal components of the cage.
Figure 6-21 Opening the

Door
Unfasten two studs

half a turn counter
Step clockwise.
Step Open door.

WARNING:
Avoid dangerous electric
shock. Do not touch electrical
components of Coral cards.
Note Door opens to 110.

6

Closing the Door
1. Verify that all cards and the power supply unit are properly installed and all
cables are properly connected. See Figure 6-22.
2. Verify that the free space at the bottom of the cage is free of objects with the
exception of cables routed from the front of the cage.
Fire Hazard. The free space at the bottom of the cage is designed to allow cool air to
flow into the cage. Foreign objects placed inside this space will interfere with the heat
dissipation and could cause a fire.
3. Close the door firmly.

4. Fasten the locking studs with a straight blade screwdriver (half a turn clockwise).
Figure 6-22 Closing the

Door
Verify that all cards

are properly
Step installed.
Verify that the

free space is
Step
free of objects.
WA R N I N G
Prevent fire. Do not place any
object inside the free space
at the bottom of the cage.

Step Close door firmly.
Tighten two
Step studs half a turn
clockwise.
6

Removing the Door
1. Open the door to an angle of at least 90°. See Figure 6-23.
2. Pull the grounding wire from the connection on the door to disconnect it.
3. Insert a straight blade screwdriver between the door release mechanism and the
right panel of the cage, and pry the door release mechanism outwards while
lifting the door upwards.
4. At the same time, lift and remove the door.
Figure 6-23 Removing

the Door
Open cage door to

an angle of at least
Step 90 degrees.
Unplug grounding
Step wire.
Pry the door release

mechanism outwards,
Step and at the same time
lift the door upwards.
Step Remove door.

6

Assembling the Door
1. Align the door hinge mount above the cage hinges, such that the door and the
cage form an angle that is greater than 90°. See Figure 6-24.
2. Lower the door onto the hinges and push down until the door clicks into place.
3. From the bottom of the cage, connect the grounding wire plug to the grounding
connection.
Figure 6-24 Assembling

the Door
Step1 Align door with

hinge.
Push door
Step 2 down
onto hinge.
Connect
Step 3 grounding
wire.
6

0
7 Cage Interior
The cage houses the power supply unit, control, service, buffer, and peripheral cards.
The bottom of the cage includes six slots that allow I/O cables to be routed from the
front side of the cage to the routing holes on the side panels. The free space at the
bottom of the cage allows cables from the front of the panel to be routed from the front
side of the cage to the routing holes on the left and right panels. It also allows cool air
to flow inside the cage from the ventilation grille on the cage door. See Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 Coral IPx

800 Cage Interior Door release
mechanism
Door locking Ground wire

bar
Card slots
Cable routing Free space

hole
Wire routing
slot
IPx 800M Main Cage

The IPx 800M main cage is designated as the common control cage and is used to
house two common control cards, eight peripheral cards and one service card. The
Coral IPx 800 includes one IPx 800M cage for all configurations. See Figure 6-26 for a
view of the IPx 800M backplane. For more information, see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M
Main Cage.
IPx 800X Expansion Cage

The IPx 800X expansion cage is used to house eleven peripheral cards and one service
or PX card. The Coral IPx 800 system includes up to two IPx 800X cages for all
configurations. See Figure 6-27 for a view of the IPx 800X backplane. For more
information, see page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
Card Slots
Guides at the top and bottom of the card cage align the cards and assemblies during
their insertion with multi-pin connectors mounted on the card cage backplane. The
6
guides and associated connectors comprise a card slot. See Figure 6-25.

The connectors provide metallic paths from the cards to the various power and signal
busses of the system and for peripheral cards, to the Input/Output (I/O) connectors.
Power Supply Unit

The Coral IPx 800 cage includes one PS19 AC, DC, or DC-D power supply unit located
on the left side of the cage. The power supply unit is attached to the cage with two
screws that ensure that the unit is grounded. These power supply units are described
in detail in Chapter 7.
Control Cards
The control cards are housed in the right side of the main cage. These cards are
described in detail in Chapter 8.
The Coral IPx 800 includes the MEX-IP2 and the HDC control cards.
Peripheral Cards
Coral IPx 800 includes eight peripheral cards in the main cage and 11 peripheral cards
in the expansion cage.
Service Cards
A service card can be housed in slot 9 of the IPx 800M cage and in slot 1 of the IPx
800X cage.
Buffer Card
A PX card is installed in slot 1 of the first IPx 800X cage when two expansion cages are
installed.
Configuration Jumpers Cage Description and Installation
The configuration jumpers in the all cages are located on the backplane. See Figure 6-26
and Figure 6-27. For further information see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M Main Cage.
6

Figure 6-26 Coral Power supply
IPx 800M Backplane connector Configuration
jumpers
AC power
input
Shared service 8 Peripheral card Control and HDC

card connectors card connectors
Figure 6-27 Coral

IPx 800X Backplane Power supply Configuration
connector jumpers
AC power
input
11 peripheral card Service or PX

connectors card connectors
Front I/O Connections

Certain Coral cards (for example, MEX-IP2, 2DT, UDT, IPG, PRI, T1, and 30T) include
I/O connectors on the front that are routed via the free space at the bottom of the cage,
through the hole either on the left or right side. See Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-28 Cable

Routing from the Front of
the Cage
Left routing Free space

hole Right routing
hole
6

0
8 Mounting Brackets
The cage is supplied with the bracket mounted on the cage to interface with 19" racks.
If the cage is to be mounted on a 23" rack, the bracket must be reassembled
accordingly, as described on page 2-13, Preparing the Cage for Mounting onto a 23” Rack.
Figure 6-29 displays the cage mounted onto a 19" rack and Figure 6-30 displays the cage
mounted onto a 23" rack.
Figure 6-29 Cage

Mounted onto 19” Rack
19“ Configuration
19“ Rack Mounting

bracket
Figure 6-30 Cage

Mounted onto 23” Rack

23“ Configuration
Mounting
23“ Rack bracket
6

0
9 Heat Buffer Bracket

This section describes the conditions that necessitate the use of a heat buffer bracket on
the cage. The Coral IPx cage is designed such that cool air flows into the cage from the
ventilation grille at the bottom of the cage door. See Figure 6-31. The free space at the
bottom section of the cage allows cool air to flow into the cage via the ventilation grille
on the door, and then upwards past the cards and power supply. The cool air absorbs
the heat from the circuitry and flows out of the cage via the holes on the top panel.
The top panel must remain clear of objects, as they will interfere with the heat removal
from the cage and could result in a fire.
The bottom panel of the cage is angled such that it forms a gap between the bottom
panel and the top panel of the cage underneath. This gap allows the warm air to be
released. See Figure 6-33 through Figure 6-35. For this reason, whenever a Coral IPx
cage is installed directly above another Coral IPx cage, there is no need to install a heat
buffer bracket. Whenever a Coral IPx cage is NOT installed directly above, a heat
buffer bracket must be installed.
The heat buffer bracket is positioned such that it is impossible to install equipment
directly above the Coral IPx cage. See Figure 6-32. This ensures that a minimum space
of 1U (1.75" or 45 mm) is maintained between the top panel of the Coral IPx cage and
any equipment that may be installed above.

Cage Ventilation Flow Warm air outflow
Free space Ventilation grille

6

Number of Heat Buffer Brackets Supplied
The IPx 800 cage includes one heat buffer bracket as part of the standard shipment.
The customer can order additional heat buffer brackets independently.
Unless otherwise specified, the cages are shipped with 19" brackets. It is the
customer’s responsibility to order 23" brackets instead of 19" brackets if
required.

Cage with Heat Buffer Heat buffer Heat buffer
1U 19“ top bracket 1U 23“ top bracket
Bracket Installed Directly
cat. num. 7244-4123640 cat. num. 7244-4123750
Above
19“ Configuration
23“ Configuration

6

Two Coral IPx Cages Mounted Together
When a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 1) is installed directly below another Coral IPx 800
cage (cage 2) warm air flows out from the top panel of the cage 1 and through the
bottom of cage 2. See Figure 6-33. For this reason, whenever a Coral IPx 800 cage is
mounted directly above another Coral IPx 800 cage, there is no need to install a heat
buffer bracket between the cages.

Cage Mounted Beneath
another Coral IPx 800
Cage Rear Panel Cage Door
2
Coral IPx
cage
Air
flow
1
Coral IPx
cage
Air
flow
Customer
supplied
cage
Heat buffer bracket between Coral IPx cages is not required.

6

Coral IPx Cage Mounted Below a Customer Supplied Cage
Wherever a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 1) is mounted below a customer-supplied cage
(cage 2) a free space of 1 U (1.75" or 45 mm) must be maintained above the top panel
of the Coral IPx 800 cage. See Figure 6-34. To meet this requirement, a heat bracket
must be installed directly above the Coral IPx 800 cage.

Cage Mounted Beneath a
Customer Supplied Cage
Customer 2
supplied
cage Heat buffer
bracket
Coral IPx 1
cage
Air
flow

6

Coral IPx Cage Mounted at the Top of the Rack
Wherever a Coral IPx 800 cage (cage 2) is mounted at the top of the rack, a heat buffer
bracket must be installed on top of the cage to ensure that no equipment can be
installed directly above the cage. See Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Left View of Heat buffer

Coral IPx 800 Cage bracket
Mounted at Top of Rack
Top cage
in rack Cage door
Coral IPx
cage 2
Air
flow
1
6

0I
10 Cage Labels
There are six labels on the cage: four on the rear panel, one on the bottom of the free
space, and one in the inside of the door. See Figure 6-36 and Figure 6-37.
Surge Arrestor Warning Label (B)

The red warning label on the rear panel warns against installing any telephony
equipment that is not protected by a surge arrestor. For further information, see page
5-14, Surge Arrestor Magazine Mounting.
Power Rating Label (C)

Figure 6-36 displays the label on the cage where the power wires are fed into the
system. The Coral IPx 800 cage can be powered by any of the following power sources.
For further information, see:
PS19 DC (DC Power Supply) Specifications, on page 7-16
PS19 DC-D (DC Power Supply-Duplication) Specifications, on page 7-37
PS19 AC (AC Power Supply) Specifications, on page 7-52
FCC Compliance Label (D)

The FCC compliance label states the rules under which the equipment was tested and
the terms of use.
Nameplate Label (E)

The nameplate includes the name of the cage (IPx 800M and IPx 800X) as well as the
CE approval mark.

Static Dissipation Warning Labels (S)
The static dissipation warning labels alert the technician to the presence of static
electricity that could damage the circuitry within the system. See Figure 6-37. Always
wear a static dissipating wrist strap before handling internal components of the cage.
For further information, see page 2-37, Inserting the Coral Circuit Cards into the Cage.
6

Figure 6-36 Labels on E
Rear Panel I.T.E.
C UL US
LISTED
E161352
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH
PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1)THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND
(2)THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT
ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,
INCLUDING INTERFERENCE [PRODUCT NAME]
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED
OPERATION.
CAT. NO. 72448242200
COMPLIES WITH SER. NO. 0400240

PART 68. FCC RULES
DATE 11 - 04
FCC : E3XISR
71141 - KF - E llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
*724482422007244824220072448242200*
REN : 4.7B
llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
ONLY FCC REGISTERED *7244824220048242200*
GRANDFATHER ED EQPT. MAY

BE USED WITH THIS FCC
REGISTERED COMMON EQT. CE
C D E
E
I.T.E.
C UL US
WARNING! LISTED
E161352
FOR USE ONLY ON TELEPHONE THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH

PART 15 OF THE FCC RULE S.
OPERATION IS SUBJE CT TO THE
WIRING PROTECTED BY ITW LINX

FOLLOWING TWO CO NDITIONS:
(1)THIS DEV ICE MAY NO T CAUSE
HARMFUL INTE RFERENCE AND
(2)THIS DEV ICE MUST ACCEPT
ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED,
MODEL SCP-2, RATED 350 MA, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE

THAT MAY CAUSE UNDES IRED
O PERATION.
[PRODUCT NAME]
CAT. NO. 72448242200
600 V. SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL COMPLIES WITH

PART 68. FCC RULES
SER. NO. 0400240
DATE 11 - 04
FCC : E3XISR
71141 - KF - E llllllll llll llllllll llllllll llll llllllll llll llll l ll llll
* 72448 2422007 2448242 200724 4824220 0*
REN : 4.7B
WARNING!
ONLY FCC REGISTERED llllllllllll lllllllll lllllllll llllllll llll
B
FOR USE ONLY ON TELEPHONE *72 448242 20048242 200*
WIRING PROTECTED BY ITW LINX GRANDFATHER ED EQPT. MAY

MODEL SCP-2, RATED 350 MA, BE USED WITH THIS FCC
600 V. SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL REGISTERED COMMON EQT.
CE
B C D E
Connectors and DC power not shown
Figure 6-37 Labels Inside

Cage and Door
Static Wrist Strap
S
6

0I
11 Dismounting the Cage from the Rack

1. Turn OFF the power supply unit on the left front side of the cage.
In the event that more than one cage is supplied by a PS19 DC-D power
supply unit, all supplied cages must be turned OFF.
2. Do one of the following:

If the cage is supplied with DC electrical power, shut down the external power
supply unit that supplies power to the cage.
If the cage is supplied with AC electrical power, remove the AC power cable.
See page 6-20, Removing the AC Power Cord.
Electrical Hazard! This procedure requires the handling of power wires. Contact with live
cables could cause shock, burn, or death. Verify that no power cables are connected to
the system before handling and that the main power switch supplying the system is OFF.
3. Disconnect all wires and cables between the cage and other cages.
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the cage.
5. Disconnect all I/O cables from the rear panel.
6. Disconnect all I/O cables from the front panel, and remove them from the free
space beneath the cage. For more information, see page 6-26, Cage Interior.
7. For 19" cages, remove the front door to obtain access to the cage bracket. For more
information, see page 6-24, Removing the Door.
8. Unfasten the four screws that secure the cage to the rack.
Ergonomic Hazard! Serious back injury could result due to improper handling. Use
proper lifting techniques to mount the cage onto the rack.
9. Remove the cage from the rack using proper lifting techniques.
10. Remove the heat buffer bracket, if installed.
6

NOTES:
6

Coral IPx 800M Main Cage
6.2 Description
This section describes the main features of the Coral IPx 800M (main) cage. For
information on how to configure the system, see page 6-53, System Configuration Options.
The IPx 800M main cage is the “nerve center” of the Coral IPx 800 system. It includes
the main control cards, peripheral cards, service cards, power supply unit and the
system configuration jumpers. The main cage includes eleven card slots: one service
slot, eight peripheral slots and two card slots for the control cards. The slot at the
extreme left of the cage is reserved for the power supply unit.
For a list of components supplied with the IPx 800M cage, see Table 2-5 on page 2-11.
1 Circuit Card Slots
The card section of the main cage includes eleven card slots and one power supply
unit slot. See Figure 6-38. The first two right slots are reserved for the common control
cards (MEX-IP2 and HDC). For further information, see Chapter 8. The following eight
universal I/O slots, numbered 1-8, can house any shared service or peripheral cards.
Slot 9 is reserved for a service card. Slots 4 and 5 are configured by the manufacturer
to house primary and secondary clock synchronization digital trunk cards. The slot at
the extreme left side is reserved for the power supply unit. Table 6-1 describes the
cards that are inserted into the card slots for Coral IPx 800M.
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage Description

Table 6-1 Coral IPx 800M
Slot Name Contains Rear RJ-45 Universal
Card Slot Configuration
Connection I/O Slot
for Main Cage
CONTROL MEX-IP2 control card (with optional Yes* No

CARDS DBM/DBX or MAP/CLA
daughterboard)
HDC quad group controller card No No
Slot 1-8 Any peripheral or shared service card Yes Yes
Slot 9 Shared service card Yes No
POWER SUPPLY PS19 AC, DC, or DC-D unit No No

6
*For more information, see page 6-12, LAN RJ-45 Connectors.

6 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage Description
6-40
(Front View)
IPx 800M Card Cage
Figure 6-38 Coral
0
Power supply
PS19 AC / DC / DC-D
Shared service slot
9
Universal I/O slot
slots for digital trunk cards

7
Universal I/O slot
clock synchronization
Primary/secondary
6
Universal I/O slot
5
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
4
3
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
2
Universal I/O slot
1
Peripheral service card (HDC)
Main processor card (MEX-IP2)

with optional DBM/DBX or MAP/CLA
0
2 Backplane Description
The backplane of the main cage includes the eight peripheral card connectors, two
control card connectors, one service card connector, and the configuration jumpers.
The backplane is displayed in Figure 6-39.
Figure 6-39 Coral IPx

0
800M Backplane
PRM SYNC
SEC SYNC
Power supply
SPARE
connector
J31 J29 J30 Z6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Z5
Configuration jumpers
Shared service slot MEX-IP card slot

0
8 universal I/O slots HDC card slot

6

0
3 Configuration Jumpers
The configuration jumpers of the main cage:
Configure the main cage to house the primary and/or secondary digital trunk
synchronization card (J29). For more information, see page 6-43, Digital Trunk
Synchronization Slots (J29).
Provide the shorting plugs that are used in jumper J29
STable 6-2 displays each jumper setting and its description.
Table 6-2 Coral IPx

800MConfiguration
Jumpers
Jumper Setting Description
Connected Primary synchronization card installed in slot 4

J29
bottom 2 pins
Not connected Primary synchronization card not installed in slot 4
Connected Secondary synchronization card installed in slot 5

J29
top 2 pins
Not connected Secondary synchronization card not installed in slot 5
J30 not in use
J31 Spare - used to house shorting plugs, only

6

Digital Trunk Synchronization Slots (J29)
Two synchronization sources may be defined for the Coral IPx 800 system. One serves
as the primary source, and the other serves as a secondary synchronization signal
source. A total of six slots are factory set to accept digital trunk cards to operate in
slave clock mode. Two slots are located in the IPx 800M main cage and the additional
four slots are pre-wired in each of the IPx 800X/500X expansion cages. Card slot 4 in
all cages is wired to operate as the primary external clock synchronization source
(marked PRM SYNC). Card slot 5 in all cages is wired as the secondary external clock
synchronization source (marked SEC SYNC). The expansion cage can house the
primary and/or secondary synchronization card in slot 4 and 5, respectively.
Figure 6-40 displays the jumper configuration for synchronization. For further
information, see page 2-30, Setting the Configuration Jumpers and Chapter 3 of the Coral
Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
The primary and secondary card slots may be housed in the same
cage.Only one IPx 3000M cage can house a primary card. Only one IPx
3000M cage can house a secondary card. Do not define more than one IPx
3000M cage as housing either a primary or a secondary card.
Figure 6-40 Coral

IPx 800M Jumper
Configuration for Slot 4 Primary N/A Primary N/A
Synchronization Slots
(J29) Slot 5 Secondary N/A N/A Secondary
J29 J29 J29 J29

Jumper
configuration

PRM SYNC
SEC SYNC
SPARE
J31 J29 J30 Z6
Z5
6

0
4 Connections to Other Cages

The main cage includes the following connectors that can be used to connect to other
cages (see Figure 6-41):
F1 is a D-type, 50-pin, female connector that is used to connect to the first
expansion cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable supplied with the
expansion cage.
P1 is a D-type, 25-pin, female connector that can be used to connect two cages that
house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit in one or both of the cages. The connection
is made with an H719 cable supplied with the power supply at specific customer
request. See Figure 6-53 on page 6-62.
For more information, see page 6-51, Connections to Other Cages and page 6-60,
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.
Figure 6-41 Coral

IPx 800M Rear Panel
Connections to other
Cages P1
F1
Expansion
connector PS19 DC-D power
supply duplication
connector
-48V 48VRTN
6

Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage
6.3 Description
This section describes the main features of the Coral IPx 800X (expansion) cage. For a
general description of the Coral IPx 800 system, see page 6-3, Cage Description and
Installation. For information about configuring the system, see
page 6-53, System Configuration Options.
The expansion cage expands the Coral IPx 500/800 and Coral IPx Office system
capacity by adding ports to the system. The expansion cage includes I/O card slots for
peripheral cards and a slot for the power supply unit. The rear panel of the cage
includes two expansion connectors that are used to connect the expansion cage to
other cages and one power supply duplication connector.
Up to two expansion cages may be installed in any IPx 500/800 system configuration.
For a list of components supplied with the IPx 800X cage, see Table 2-6 on page 2-11.
0
1 Circuit Card Slots

The expansion cage contains twelve card slots that are numbered 1 through 12 from
right to left. See Figure 6-42. Slot 1 is reserved for a shared service card or a PX buffer
card if two IPx 800X expansion cages are installed in the system. Slot 2 through slot 12
are universal I/O slots and may house any service or peripheral cards. Slots 4 and 5
may be configured to house primary or secondary clock synchronization digital trunk
Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage Description

cards. The slot on the extreme left labeled POWER SUPPLY is reserved for the power
supply unit. Table 6-3 identifies the cards that are inserted into the card slots for the
Coral IPx 800X cage.
Table 6-3 Coral IPx 800X

Card Slot Configuration Slot Contains Rear RJ-45 Universal
for the Expansion Cage Connection I/O Slot
Slot 1 Service card for system with 1 IPx No No

800X cage. PX card for cage 1
(when two cages are installed).
Slot 2-12 Any shared service or peripheral Yes Yes

cards
POWER SUPPLY PS19 DC, DC-D, or AC unit No No

6

6 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage Description
6-46
(Front View)
IPx 800X Card Cage
Figure 6-42 Coral
.
Power supply
PS19 AC / DC
12
Universal I/O slot
11
Universal I/O slot
10
Universal I/O slot
Universal I/O slot
9
Universal I/O slot
8
Universal I/O slot
7
Universal I/O slot
6
Universal I/O slot
5
Universal I/O slot
4
Universal I/O slot
3
Universal I/O slot
2
Service Card or PX card slot
1
0
2 Backplane Description
The backplane of the expansion cage includes the eleven peripheral card connectors,
the service or PX card connector, the power supply connector, the AC power input,
and the configuration jumpers.
The backplane is displayed in Figure 6-43.
Figure 6-43 Coral

IPx 800X Backplane Power supply
connector J40
SPARE
Z6 J38 J37
PRM
SYNC
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SEC
Z5 SYNC
Configuration Jumpers
PX or service card
11 universal I/O slots

6

0
3 Configuration Jumpers
The configuration jumpers of the expansion cage:
Define the cage that houses the primary and/or secondary synchronization card.
Designate the cage number within the system:
IPx 500/800 (shelf 1 or shelf 2)
IPx Office (shelf 2 or shelf 3)
Table 6-4 displays the settings of each jumper its definition.
Table 6-4 Coral IPx 800X Jumper Setting Description

Jumper Configuration
J37 - top 2 pins Connected Primary synchronization card in slot 4
Not connected Primary synchronization card not in slot 4
J37 - bottom 2 pins Connected Secondary synchronization card in slot 5
Not connected Secondary synchronization card not in slot 5
J38 - Z6 top pin Not connected Expansion cage designated “Shelf 1” in

Z6 bottom pin Connected IPx 500/800 systems
Z5 top pin Connected
Z5 bottom pin Not connected
J38 - Z6 top pin Connected Expansion cage designated “Shelf 2” in

Z6 bottom pin Not connected IPx 500/800 systems
Z5 top pin Not connected
Z5 bottom pin Connected

Z6 bottom pin Connected Coral IPx Office systems
Z5 top pin Not connected
Z5 bottom pin Connected

Z6 bottom pin Connected Coral IPx Office systems
Z5 top pin Connected
Z5 bottom pin Not connected
6

Expansion Shelf Number (J38)
The term “shelf” is used in this section in order to retain consistency with
Program Interface terminology. The terms “shelf” and “cage” are identical.
Each peripheral card must be recognized by the main shelf. Therefore, the Coral
IPx 800 system must be able to distinguish between the first and second expansion
shelves. The main shelf is designated 0 by the manufacturer. The first expansion shelf
is designated 1. The second expansion shelf is designated 2. Jumpers are used to
configure the shelf number. Figure 6-44 displays the jumper configuration for each cage
designation.
The shelves in a Coral IPx Office system, however, are designated 1, 2, and 3, for the
main unit, first, and second expansion cages, respectively. Therefore, Coral IPx Office
must be able to distinguish between the first and second expansion shelves. The main
shelf is designated 1 by the manufacturer. The first expansion shelf is designated 2.
The second expansion shelf is designated 3. Jumpers are used to configure the shelf
number. Figure 6-40 displays the jumper configuration for each cage designation.
Figure 6-44 Coral

IPx 800X Jumper
Coral IPx 500 / 800 Coral IPx Office
Configuration for Shelf
Designation (J38) Shelf# 1 Shelf# 2
Shelf# 2 Shelf# 3
Z6 J38 Z6 J38 Z6 J38 Z6 J38
Z5 Z5 Z5 Z5
J40

SPARE
PRM
Z6 J38 J37
SYNC
SEC
Z5 SYNC
6

Digital Trunk Synchronization Slots (J37)
Two synchronization sources may be defined for the Coral IPx 800 system. One serves
as the primary source, and the other serves as a secondary synchronization signal
source. A total of six slots are factory set to accept digital trunk cards to operate in
slave clock mode. Two slots are located in the Coral IPx 800 main cage and the
additional two slots are pre-wired in each of the IPx 800 expansion cages. Card slot #4
in all cages is wired to operate as the primary external clock synchronization source
(marked PRM SYNC). Card slot #5 in all cages is wired as the secondary external clock
synchronization source (marked SEC SYNC). The expansion cage can house the
primary and/or secondary synchronization card in slots 4 and 5, respectively.
Figure 6-45 displays the jumper configuration for clock synchronization. For further
information, see Chapter 3 of the Coral Service and Peripheral Cards Installation Manual.
The primary and secondary card slots may be housed in the same cage.
Figure 6-45 Coral

IPx 800X Jumper
Configuration for Primary Slot 4 Primary N/A Primary N/A
and Secondary
Synchronization Slots
(J37) Slot 5 Secondary N/A N/A Secondary
J37 J37 J37 J37

Jumper
configuration
J40
SPARE
PRM
Z6 J38 J37
SYNC
SEC
Z5 SYNC
6

0
4 Connections to Other Cages

The expansion cage includes three connectors that can be used to connect to other
cages (see Figure 6-46):
F2 is a D-type, 50-pin, male, serial port connector. It connects the second
expansion cage to the first expansion cage, or the first expansion cage to the main
cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable that is supplied with the
expansion cage.
F3 is a D-type, 50-pin, female, serial port connector. It connects the first expansion
cage to the second expansion cage. The connection is made with an H500-1 cable
that is supplied with the expansion cage.
P1 is a D-type, 25-pin, female connector that can be used to connect two cages that
house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit in one or both of the cages. The connection
is made with an H719 cable supplied with the power supply at specific customer
request. See Figure 6-53 on page 6-62.
For more information, see page 6-44, Connections to Other Cages and page 6-60,
Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages.
Figure 6-46 Coral

IPx 800X Rear Panel
Connections to other PS19 DC-D Power Supply
Cages Connector to P1 Duplication Connector
main cage or
1st expansion F2
cage
F3

Connector to
2nd expansion
cage

NOTES:
6

System Configuration Options
6.4 Coral IPx 800
This chapter describes the layout and configuration of the Coral IPx 800 system. For a
general description of the Coral IPx cage, see page 6-3, Cage Description and Installation.
For a more detailed description of the main cage, see page 6-39, Coral IPx 800M Main
Cage. For a more detailed description of the expansion cage, see
page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
1 General Description
The Coral IPx 800 can operate as a system in any one of the following configurations:

System Configuration System Configuration See Figure
Options
Main 1st Expansion 2nd Expansion
Cage Cage Cage
800M — — Figure 6-47 on page 6-55
800M 800X — Figure 6-48 on page 6-55
System Configuration Options Coral IPx 800

800M 800X 800X Figure 6-49 on page 6-56
800M 500X — Figure 6-50 on page 6-57
The main cage includes control, service, and peripheral cards. The expansion cage or
cages include shared service cards and peripheral cards.
6

Main Cage (IPx 800M)
The IPx 800M main cage is designated as the common control cage and is used to
house the common control cards. For further information, refer to Chapter 8, Common
Control Cards. In addition, the main cage houses eight universal peripheral slots and
one service slot as well. Each of the Coral IPx 800 configurations includes one IPx
800M cage. For more detailed information about the main cage, refer to page 6-39,
Coral IPx 800M Main Cage.
Expansion Cage (IPx 800X)

The expansion cage may house up to twelve cards. Slot 1 is used to house a shared
service card, or a PX card. For more information, see page 8-27, PX Card. Slot 2 through
slot 12 are universal I/O slots, and may house any combination of shared service and
peripheral cards. These card types are described in detail in the Coral Service and
Peripheral Cards Manual. For more detailed information about the expansion cage, refer
to page 6-45, Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage.
Expansion Cage (IPx 500X)

One IPx 500X cage may house ten peripheral special form-factor “ipx” cards.
For more detailed information, refer to page 6-70, Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion
Cage.
Table 6-6 Number of

Universal I/O Slots per System Main 1st 2nd Total System
System Configuration Configuration Cage Expansion Expansion Universal I/O
Cage Cage Slots
IPx 800M 8 — — 8
IPx 800M+800X 8 11 — 19
IPx 800M+800X+800X 8 11 11 30
IPx 800M+500X 8 10 — 18
IPx 800M+500X+800X 8 10* 11** 29
IPx 800M+500X+500X 8 10 10 28
* IPx 500 Cage

**IPx 800 Cage
6

Figure 6-47 System with
One Cage (IPx 800M)
Coral IPx 800M

Main cage
8 Universal
I/O slots
1 Power
supply
1 Shared
service
slot
Common
Control

Two Cages (IPx 800M and
IPx 800X)
Coral IPx 800X

Expansion cage
1 Shared

service
slot
19 Universal Coral IPx 800M

I/O slots Main cage
2 Power
supplies
1 Shared
service
slot
Common
Control
6

Three Cages (IPx 800M
and Two IPx 800X Cages)
Coral IPx 800X

2nd expansion
2 Shared
service
or PX slots
30 Universal
I/O slots
Coral IPx 800X
1st expansion
3 Power Coral IPx 800M

supplies Main cage
1 Shared
service
slot
Common
Control
6

Two Cages (IPx 800M and
IPx 500X)
Coral IPx 500X

Expansion Cage
10 Universal
*
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS500
Coral IPx 800M
Main Cage
8 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS19
1 Shared
Service
Slot
Common
Control
* Special form-factor cards

6

Three Cages (IPx 800M,
IPx 500X, and IPx 800X)
Coral IPx 800X

2nd Expansion
11 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Shared
Service
Slot
1 Power
Supply Coral IPx 500X
PS19
1st Expansion
*
10 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS500
Coral IPx 800M

Main Cage
8 Universal
I/O Slots
1 Power
Supply
PS19
1 Shared
Service
Slot
Common
Control

6

Three Cages (IP x800M
and Two IPx 500X Cages)
Coral IPx 500X

2nd Expansion
20 Universal
*
I/O Slots
Coral IPx 500X

1st Expansion
2 Power
Supplies
PS500
Coral IPx 800M

Main Cage
8 Universal
I/O Slots

1 Power
Supply
PS19
1 Shared
Service
Slot
Common
Control

6

0
2 Interconnecting Main and Expansion Cages

The Coral IPx 800 can be expanded in any one of the following configurations:

System Expansion System Configuration See Figure
Options
Main Cage 1st Expansion 2nd Expansion
Cage Cage
800M 800X — Figure 6-54 on page 6-63
800M 500X — Figure 6-56 on page 6-65
H500 -1 Cable
The Coral IPx 800 main cage and its expansion cages maintain a continuous
“conversation”. HDLC and PCM highways, clock and synchronization signals as well
as alarms are constantly exchanged between the cages. All data transfer is carried out
via the H500-1 cable.
The H500-1 cable is connected from the main cage to the first expansion cage. If an
additional expansion cage is connected, an additional H500-1 cable is connected from
first expansion cage to second expansion cage.

One H500-1 male/female cable, 55" (140 cm) long, is supplied with each IPx 800X cage
or IPx 500X cage.
The IPx 500/800 cages include cable connections that allow the expansion cages to be
added.
The IPx 800M main cage includes one 50-pin female connection that connects to the
first expansion cage with an H500-1 male/female cable. When there is only main cage
in the system, this connection is not used.
The IPx 800X expansion cage includes two 50-pin cable connections that allow the
expansion cages to be added. The lower connection is female; the top connection is
male. The lower female connection connects the first expansion cage to the second
expansion cage. The top male connection connects either to the female connection on
the main cage or to the female connection on the first expansion cage.
6

The IPx 500X expansion cage includes two 50-pin connections: the top connection is
female; the bottom connection is male. The top female connection connects the first
expansion cage to the second expansion cage. The lower male connection connects
either to the female connection on the main cage or to the female connection on the
first expansion cage.
H719 Power Supply Duplication Cable

H719 cables supply power from cages that house a PS19 DC-D power supply unit to
other cages (Figure 6-53). This cable is supplied with the PS19 DC-D power supply unit
at specific customer request and is connected between the P1 connector of any two
IPx 800 cages in one of the following situations:
When one PS19 DC-D power supply unit supplies two IPx 800 cages with power.
The H719 cable supplies the second cage with power.
When two PS19 DC-D power supply units supply two cages with power. In this
case the H719 cable is connected to provide redundancy if one PS19 DC-D unit
fails.
For further information, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable
between Two Cages.

6

Do not use the H719 cable when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are
installed.
This cable is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Connecting the power supply duplication connector (P1) for PS19 DC or PS19 AC
power supplies will result in damage to the system.
Figure 6-53 H719 Cable

Connection between Two
IPx 800 Cages with
Male
PS19 DC-D Power Supply
IPx 800 Cage
Female
H719 Cable (Rear panel)
Male
IPx 800 Cage
6

Figure 6-54 Connection
between Two IPx 800 Male
Cages (Rear panel)
(IPx 800M and 800X)
Female
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
H500-1 Cable
Female
(Rear panel)
Male
Main
Cage
IPx 800M

6

between Three IPx 800 Male
Cages (Rear panel)
(IPx 800M and two 800X)
Female
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X x Female
(Rear panel)
Not used
H500-1 Cable
Male
(Rear panel)
Expansion Cage Male

IPx 800X
H500-1 Cable Female

(see previous page) (Rear panel)
Main
Cage
IPx 800M
6

between Two Cages
(IPx 800M and 500X)
Female Male
H500-1 Cable
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage
IPx 800M

6

between Three Cages
(IPx 800M, 500X and
800X)
Male
H500-1 Cable
(rear panel)
Female
Second
Expansion Cage
IPx 800X
Female
(rear panel)
Male Female
Not used
Female Male
H500-1 Cable
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage
IPx 800M
6

between Three Cages Female
(IPx 800M and two 500X) (not used)
Male
H500-1 Cable Second

Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male Female
Female Male
H500-1 Cable
First
Expansion Cage
IPx 500X
Male
Female
(rear panel)
Main Cage

IPx 800M

0
3 Suggestions for Peripheral Card Distribution

When installing a new Coral IPx 800 system, it is recommended that the timeslot (PCM
highway) distribution among the cages and card slots be taken into account when
planning the peripheral interface cards location.
The Coral IPx 800 system (main cage and two expansion cages) is supplied with a total
of 384 timeslots between a maximum of 32 card slots. The timeslots are evenly divided
into 3 groups of 128 timeslots and distributed between slot sets, as detailed in Table 6-8.
Therefore, slots 1-4 of cages 0, 1 and 2 share 128 timeslots, slots 5-8 of cages 0, 1 and 2
share 128 timeslots, and slots 9-12 of cages 0, 1 and 2 share an additional 128 timeslots.
Figure 6-59 illustrates the distribution of PCM highways in Coral IPx 800 systems.
To ensure efficient use of time slots, it is recommended to distribute heavy consumer cards
(cards with a large number of ports: UDT, 30T/x, T1, PRI-30, PRI-24, IPG or UGW) evenly
among the slot sets, i.e. one heavy consumer card per slot set. The least blocking sets are
the slot sets that have the highest ratio of number of timeslots to number of peripheral slots
in Table 6-8.
If three PRI-30 cards are installed, it is recommended that one of them be

installed in any one of slots 9-12, the second card in any one of slots 5-8,
and the last card in any one of slots 1-4.
Table 6-8 Time Slot

Set Peripheral Card Slots Number of Number of
Distribution in Coral
IPx 800 Shelf # Peripheral Timeslots
Slots
1 0, 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 12 slots 128
2 0, 1, 2 5, 6, 7, 8 12 slots 128
0 9
3 9 slots 128
1, 2 9, 10, 11, 12
6

Figure 6-59 Coral
IPx 800, PCM Highway
Distribution
IPx 800M IPx 800X/ 500X IPx 800X / 500X

Coral IPx 800 Main Cage 1st Expansion Cage 2nd Expansion Cage
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HDC
PCM highway A3
A3
Peripheral B3
service A2
& B2
group A1
controller B1
PCM highway B1
SLOT 12
SLOT 10
SLOT 11
384 time slots
SLOT 12
SLOT 10
SLOT 11
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
64 time slots
each PCM highway
Not applicable in Not applicable in
IPx 500X IPx 500X

6

0
4 Optional Coral IPx 500X Expansion Cage

General
The Coral IPx 500X expansion cage is a small, rack or wall-mounted extension to the
Coral IPx 500M or Coral IPx 800M cage. It supports any of the Coral FlexiCom 200 and
IPx 500 family small factor and peripheral cards. Any combination of up to two
IPx 500X and IPx 800X expansion cages can be connected to one IPx 800M cage. The
key features of the IPx 500X cage capacity and functions are described below.
Card Slots
One IPx 500X cage may house ten peripheral special form-factor “ipx” cards.
These card types are described in detail in Chapter 10 of the Coral IPx 500 Hardware and
Installation Manual.
Port Capacity
One IPx 500X cage supports up to 160 combined trunk and wired station ports.
Power Supply
The expansion unit is compatible with 48VDC or 115/230VAC power. Like the
IPx 500M cage, the expansion cage is either powered by the PS500 AC or PS500 DC
power supply unit. There is also an option to install a backup battery for the IPx 500X
cage. This battery pack, known as the BATTipx, can be ordered at specific customer
request.
MDFipx
An MDF may be supplied with the IPx 500X cage at specific customer request.
Whenever an MDFipx unit is included with an IPx 500X cage, it can function as a
master ground and be connected directly to the building master ground.
Setting the Configuration Jumpers

For information on setting the configuration jumpers on Coral IPx 500X cages, refer to
the Coral IPx 500 Installation Manual, Section 6.3.
6

Connecting the IPx 500X Cage to the IPx 800M Cage
All IPx 500 and IPx 800 cages are interconnected with an H500-1 cable.
For systems that include one IPx 500X cage and one IPx 800X cage, always connect the
IPx 500X cage directly to the IPx 800M cage. If an IPx 800X cage is installed between
the IPx 800M cage and an IPx 500X cage, a PX card will have to be installed in slot 1 of
the IPx 800X cage. This slot could otherwise be used for a service card.
Related Documentation
Coral IPx 500 Hardware and Installation Manual
Coral FlexiCom and IPx Product Description

6

NOTES:
6

Chapter 7
Power Supplies
7.1 PS19 DC ...................................................................7-1

Coral
7.2 PS19 DC-D..............................................................7-17
7.3 PS19 AC..................................................................7-39

Cor

PS19 DC
7.1 Power Supply Unit
The DC Power Supply (PS19 DC) provides internal operating voltages for the
Coral IPx 800 systems.
The PS19 DC power supply card has been discontinued and has been
replaced by the PS19 DC-D power supply card.
The PS19 DC operates from a nominal input of –48VDC, typically supplied by an

external 48VDC rectifier or a stationary battery plant. Actual input may vary from
–40 to –60 volts allowing operation:
From an external battery power source while the batteries are charged at an
equalized charge rate.
During a power failure, until the batteries are completely discharged.
PS19 DC Front Panel

Figure 7-1 illustrates the front panel of the PS19 DC. The following items located on
the front panel are described in the following table:
Feature Description
PS19 DC Power Supply Unit
Alarm (red) Indicator Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 DC
Power (green) Indica- Lights when the power switch is turned on

tor
7
Power Supplies 7-1

Feature Description
ON/OFF Power Turns the unit On or Off.

Switch CAUTION!
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC unit from
the cage when turned ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components.
Before inserting or extracting the PS19 DC unit,
verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
Top and Bottom Used to release the unit from the cage backplane.
Ejectors
Top and Bottom Used to insert the screws (M4x10) that secure the
Fastener Holes unit to the cage, ground the unit and safeguard
against malfunction.
7

Figure 7-1 PS19 DC
Front Panel Layout Top
Top Mounting Ejector
Screw (M4x10)
and
Serrated Washer
ALARM Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 DC
Cat. No. 72440953000
INPUT:
-40VDC to - 60VDC 12A
OUTPUT: +5VDC 12.0A
+12VDC 3.0A
-5VDC 0.15A
-12VDC 0.15A
-48VDC 7.0A
-120VDC 0.4A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 12VA
Bottom Mounting PS19 DC Power Supply Unit

Screw (M4x10)
and
Serrated Washer
Bottom
Ejector
7
Power Supplies 7-3

PS19 DC Card Layout
The PS19 DC card’s component side layout is shown in Figure 7-2. Three components
are described in the following table:
Feature Description
F1 A 0.8A / 250V, slow blow fuse, protects the unit’s

Message Fuse message circuitry voltage. See page 7-14, PS19 DC Fuses.
F2 A 0.8A / 250V, slow blow fuse, protects the unit’s ring

Ringer Fuse generator circuitry voltage. See page 7-14, PS19 DC Fuses.
JU1 Configured as per customer specification providing

Ring Frequency 20Hz (North American systems) or 25Hz depending on
Selection Jumper the JU1 configuration. See page 7-9, Ringer Frequency
Adjustment.
The entire cage 48VDC input circuitry, including the power supply, is protected by a
15A/250V slow blow fuse on the rear panel of the cage. See Figure 7-3, PS19 DC Block
Diagram.
7

Figure 7-2 PS19 DC
Card Layout
F1
Message Fuse
0.8A/250V S.B.
On
Off
F2
Ringer Fuse
0.8A/250V S.B.
JU1
Ring Frequency
Selection
3 2 1
JU1
25Hz
3 2 1
20Hz
7
Power Supplies 7-5

2 Circuit Description
Figure 7-3 presents a block diagram of the PS19 DC power supply.
Power Input Section

The DC input consists of: passive filter, inrush current, and an on/off switch. The DC
input is protected against reverse polarity.
DC Output Power
DC to DC converters convert the –48VDC input power to the following outputs:
+5VDC, +12VDC
–5VDC, –12VDC
Message and Ring Circuits

The –120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
message waiting lamps of single line telephones connected to SLT ports of the system.
–120 VDC for SLT (Single Line Telephone) message waiting lamps
85VRMS for SLT ringers
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing for up to 20 ports simultaneously
at 20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is selected with the JU1 configuration
jumper on the PS19 DC circuit board. See page 7-9, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
The current is used for ringing on industry standard, SLT, and magneto telephone
station ports. The ring generator provides high voltage (85VRMS) ring generator
current required by SLT station ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, 24SLS, or
8SM cards.
Messaging
The messaging generator is capable of generating –120VDC for message lamps. It is
used to light neon lamps on SLT ports of the 16SH/S-LL, 8SLS, 16SLS, or 24SLS
cards.
NOTE:฀For 8SA and 24SA cards the message and ringer generators฀are provided by the
8/24SA card.
7

-48VDC Output Power
The PS19 DC also filters and limits the –48VDC input to feed the peripheral card
slots.
Ripple and Noise

Filtering circuitry minimizes ripple and noise on the –48VDC feed to the peripheral
cards. The filtering circuitry produces an output voltage approximately 1.5V to 2.0V
lower than the input voltage to the PS19 DC.
Monitoring Circuitry
All outputs, with the exception of the –48VDC output, are regulated. Voltage and
current level monitoring circuitry check each output of the PS19 DC (including
message and ring generator currents), and produce an alarm signal to the Coral system
main processor in the event of malfunction.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output (with the exception of the
–48VDC output) is within specification. If any of the voltage outputs drop below
specification, the monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal to the Coral system
processor, causing the red Alarm indicator to illuminate. Note that the green Power
indicator of the PS19 DC remains illuminated at the same time as the red alarm
indicator.
If the Input voltage drops below 36.5±1VDC, the unit shuts down and returns to power
only when the voltage increases above 38.5±1VDC again. Additionally, if the voltage
is greater than 62±1VDC, then the unit shuts down until the input voltage drops below
58±1VDC.

7
Power Supplies 7-7

Figure 7-3 PS19 DC
Block Diagram
Rear Panel Power On/Off Feedback

Fuse
S.B. 30A/125V
-VIN Current Limit -48VDC/7A
Passive Inrush
Current and Common 48V RTN
VRTN Filter Active Filter
NOTE:
-48VDC or approx.
Input: 1.5V to 2.0V lower
than -VIN (input voltage)
-40 to -60VDC
-48VDC nom.
DC +5V/12A
DC
+12V/3A
DC
DC -12V -12V/0.15A
Series -5V/0.15A
Regulator
Messaging F1 -120V/0.4A
Rear Circuit Messaging
Backplane F1/F2 0.8A/250V S.B.
Ringing 85VAC/12VA
Circuit Ringer
F2
3 2 1
JU1
20/25 Hz
Frequency Selection Common
Monitoring
Control
Alarm
Circuit
Power On/Off Alarm

Indicator Indicator
(Green) (Red)
7

3 Ringer Frequency Adjustment
The PS19 DC can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper JU1 located on the bottom component side card. See Figure 7-2. This jumper is
factory configured according to local requirements. However, it can be configured in
the field. The procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the power supply unit from its slot and place it over the anti-static
material with the component side facing upwards, as described in page 7-11,
Removing the Power Supply.
Do not insert or remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
power surges could damage system components.
2. Configure jumper JU1 as described below for the following frequencies:
Frequency JU1 shorting plug

over pins
20Hz 2 and 3
25Hz 1 and 2
3. Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-10, To Install the Power
Supply.
7
Power Supplies 7-9

4 Installation
The PS19 DC power supply is inserted in the extreme left slot of the card cage. Before
installing the power supply, verify that the ring frequency configuration jumper, JU1,
is set to the correct frequency (20 or 25Hz). See page 7-9, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
To Install the Power Supply

is not in use.
panel) for PS19 DC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power
Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 DC power supply is installed.
5. Verify that the PS19 DC power switch is turned OFF.
6. Position the two guide ridges (located on the right panel of the power supply, at
top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
slot (labeled on the bottom of the card cage).
7. Slide the PS19 DC gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the card cage. A slight
resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at the rear of the
power supply and backplane.
Do not force the power supply into the card cage. Irreparable damage may occur
if the multi-pin connectors misalign while attempting to insert the unit into the
card cage. If more than slight resistance is encountered, partially slide out the card
from the cage and verify the alignment of the guide ridges with the card edge
guides. If alignment appears to be correct, remove the card from the slot and
inspect the multi-pin connectors for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.
7

8. Secure the power supply to the card cage by fastening the two M4x10 screws,
located at the top and bottom of the unit’s front panel to the cage, thus securing
the card to the cage as well as grounding the unit.
9. Turn the PS19 DC power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is
lit, while the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
Turn ON the PS19 DC units in the expansion cages only after powering the main cage
(IPx 800M) and verifying that the main cage has initialized properly and the alarm
indicator does not illuminate. Otherwise the cards in the expansion cages (IPx 800X)
might not initialize.
Removing the Power Supply

1. Locate a desk or table top that can support 50lb (23kg). If the surface can be
damaged by sharp objects, place a protective sheet of cardboard or similar
material over the top surface.
2. Place an anti-static sheet (the card’s plastic shipping bag will suffice) over a desk
or a table top.
3. Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components. Before extracting the PS19 DC card, verify
that the power switch is turned OFF.
4. Unfasten the two M4x10 screws located at the top and bottom of the unit’s front
panel and set aside. PS19 DC Power Supply Unit
5. Carefully remove the PS19 DC from its slot.
6. Place the PS19 DC over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
7
Power Supplies 7-11

5 Ringer Database Programming
Max Ringers (Route: SFE,2)

The maximum number of SLTs that can be fed ringing simultaneously from each
PS19 DC is 20, by default. This value can be altered via the Coral database’s System
Features (Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details.
7

6 Troubleshooting (PS19 DC)
Power supply failure generally results in the loss of one or more output voltages.
However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down
a regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 DC lights when any of the
output voltages are below specification and/or when either the F1 or F2 fuse blows.
The red Alarm indicator illuminates if any voltage supplied by the power
supply is outside of specification. This could be caused by an internal or
external fault. If the alarm indicator illuminates in a replaced power supply,
the fault is not within the unit.
All maintenance activities are to be carried out by a qualified service technician.

The red Alarm indicator can be activated by malfunctions in the backplane, the power
supply, in any of the cards inserted into the cage, or in any of the above in a connected
cage.
Power Supply turned ON - Green Power Indicator is OFF

Check the following:
1. DC power supply interruption (Range: –40 to –60 VDC).
2. Blown main or circuit fuse/breaker in the building electrical panel.
3. Blown fuse in the cage rear panel.
4. Faulty PS19 DC.
(Insert a different PS19 DC unit as described in page 7-10, Installation.)

7
Power Supplies 7-13

PS19 DC Fuses
The PS19 DC employs two fuses, F1 and F2, to protect the message and ringing
circuitry respectively.
If the F1 fuse blows, the message lamps for the SLT units connected via this
cage do not light.
If the F2 fuse blows, none of the SLT units connected via this cage can ring.
If the cage rear panel fuse blows, the PS19 DC Power green indicator and
Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
To replace a fuse within the PS19 DC

material with the component side facing upwards, as described on page 7-11,
2. Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse. See the PS19 DC card layout
in Figure 7-2.
3. Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-10, To Install the Power
Supply.
7

Determining the Cause of the Alarm Indicator
1. Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
2. Disconnect the expansion cable(s) connected to the relevant cage.
3. Remove all cards from the relevant cage so that they protrude from the cage by
4. Turn ON the PS19 DC and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the PS19 DC is malfunctioning or the
problem is caused by the backplane. Replace the PS19 DC unit.
If the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is functioning properly and the alarm
is being caused by one of the cards.
5. For cages that include common control cards (see table below).
Cage Control Cards
IPx 800M MEX-IP2, HDC
IPx 800X PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 DC power
switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards) and re-insert the first control card.
Then turn the PS19 DC power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator.
Continue this process, adding one common control card at a time, and turning
OFF the PS19 DC power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 DC
power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator after inserting each card. If
the red Alarm indicator is lit, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 DC power switch OFF, insert the common control cards (MEX-IP2,
HDC, or PX). Then turn the PS19 DC power switch ON and check the red Alarm
indicator once again. If the red Alarm indicator is off, the problem is caused by
one of the cards that was removed. PS19 DC Power Supply Unit
6. To determine which shared service and peripheral card is causing the problem,
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one at a time, beginning from the right
side of the cage. Ensure that the card’s rear panel connectors engage properly with
the backplane and that they initialize properly.
If the Alarm indicator lights when one of the cards is inserted, then that card is
faulty.
7
Power Supplies 7-15

7 Specifications
PS19 DC (DC Power Supply)
Coral systems:............................................. IPx 800, 3000, 4000
Input:........................................................... –40VDC to –60VDC, 12A max.

Power Consumption: ........................................ Continues 575W
DC Outputs: ................................................+5VDC Nom. Regulated 12.0A max.

–5VDC Nom. Regulated 0.15A max.
+12VDC Nom. Regulated 3.0A max.
–12VDC Nom. Regulated 0.15A max.
–48VDC unregulated (or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower than input voltage)
7.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs):........................–120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Outputs (for SLTs):

Voltage: ...................................85VRMS
Frequency................................20 or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ..................................12VA max.
Alarm: .........................................................Signaling malfunction

Front panel LED indicator (red)
Indicators: ...................................................Power ON/OFF (green)

ALARM (red)
Fuses: ..........................................................
Input (–48VDC) ......................None (Protected by a fuse on the rear
panel of the cage)
Output (Message)....................F1: 0.8A/250V S.B
Output (Ringer) .......................F2: 0.8A/250V S.B.
Controls and Adjustments: .........................ON/OFF power switch

Output ring frequency
Weight:................................................................. 1.4 kg
7

PS19 DC-D
7.2 Power Supply Unit with Duplication
The DC duplication power supply (PS19 DC-D) provides internal operating voltages
for the Coral IPx 800, 3000 and 4000 systems.
The PS19 DC-D operates from a nominal input of –48VDC, typically supplied by an
external 48VDC rectifier or stationary battery plant. Actual input may vary from
–40 to –60 volts, allowing operation;
From external battery power source while the batteries are charged at an
equalized charge rate
During a power failure, until the batteries are completely discharged
Each PS19 DC-D is designed with the capacity to support two fully populated cages
with average mix of port types. The PS19 DC-D employs automatic switching
circuitry to share the output between two cages for redundancy purposes. The
PS19 DC-D may be used in any one of the following three configurations supporting
the cards in the cages:
PS19 DC-D Power Supply Unit with Duplication

Configuration Description
Economical One power supply supporting two adjacent cages via the
H719 DC-D connection cable, see Figure 7-7.
Redundant Two power supplies supporting two adjacent cages,

providing redundancy for both cages via the H719 DC-D
connection cable between the two cages. See Figure 7-8.
Double Power One power supply for each cage, powering only its own
cage (no cable). Installing one PS19 DC-D in each cage
enables greater power support among the cards of the
same cage. See Figure 7-9.
See page 7-28, Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages for H719
7
DC-D wiring details.
Power Supplies 7-17

PS19 DC-D Front Panel
Figure 7-4 displays the front panel of the PS19 DC-D. The following items located on
the front panel are described in the following table:
Feature Description
Alarm (red) Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 DC
Indicator
Power (green) Lights when the power switch is turned on

Indicator
ON/OFF Turns the unit On or Off

Power Switch CAUTION
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC-D unit from the
cage when turned ON. Sudden power surges could
damage system components. Before inserting or
extracting the PS19 DC-D unit, verify that the power
switch is turned OFF.
Handle Used to pull the unit out of the card cage
Top and Bot- Used to release the unit from the cage backplane.
tom Ejectors
Top and bot- Used to secure the unit to the cage. These screws also
tom captive ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit against
screws malfunction.
Turning one PS19 DC-D to OFF does not remove power from the peripheral cage if a
shared PS19 DC-D is turned ON. Shared power supplies must both be turned off to
remove all power from both cages.
7

Figure 7-4 PS19 DC-D
Front Panel
Top
Top Ejector
Captive Screw
ALARM Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
INPUT:
-40VDC to - 60VDC 25A
OUTPUT: +5VDC 20A

+12VDC 5.0A
-5VDC 0.25A
-12VDC 0.25A
-48VDC 12.0A
-120VDC 0.6A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 20VA

Handle
Bottom
Ejector
7
Power Supplies 7-19

PS19 DC-D Card Layout
The PS19 DC-D card layout is shown in Figure 7-5. Two components are described in
the following table:
Feature Description
F1 25A/125V, slow blow, protects the input voltage. See

Input Fuse page 7-34, PS19 DC-D Fuses.
The entire cage 48VDC input circuitry, including the
power supply, is protected by a slow blow 30A/125V
fuse on the rear panel of the cage wired in series to the F1
fuse, see Figure 7-6, PS19 DC-D Block Diagram.
J3 Configured as per customer specification providing

Ring Frequency 20Hz (North American systems) or 25Hz depending on
Selection Jumper the J3 configuration, see page 7-25, Ringer Frequency
Adjustment.
7

Card Layout
On
Off
F1
Power Input Fuse
25A/125V S.B.
J3
Ring Frequency
Selection
3
3
2
2
1
20Hz 25Hz

7
Power Supplies 7-21

Figure 7-6 presents a block diagram of the PS19 DC-D power supply.
Power Input Section

The DC input consists of: passive filter, inrush current, and an on/off switch. The DC
input is protected against reverse polarity.
DC Output Power
The PS19 DC-D includes two switch-mode DC-DC converters that convert –48VDC
input power to:
+5VDC, –5VDC
+12VDC, –12VDC

The –120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
–120VDC for SLT (Single Line Telephone) message waiting lamps
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing up to 33 ports simultaneously at

20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is configured by setting jumper J3 on the
PS19 DC-D circuit board, see page 7-25, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
station ports. The ring generator provides high voltage (85VRMS) ring generator
8SM cards.
Messaging
cards.
NOTE:฀For฀8SA and 24SA cards the message and ringer generators฀are฀provided by the
7
8/24SA card.

–48VDC Output Power
The PS19 DC-D also filters and limits the –48VDC input to feed the peripheral card
slots.
Ripple and Noise

Filtering circuitry minimizes ripple and noise on the –48VDC feed to the peripheral
cards. The filtering circuitry produces an output voltage approximately 1.5V to 2V
lower than the input voltage to the PS19 DC-D.
Hot Swap Circuitry (Redundant Configuration)

The PS19 DC-D contains Hot Swap circuitry for redundancy purposes, so that if one
among two connected PS19 DC-D units fails, the second unit may “take over” the
power supply production.
All outputs, with the exception of the –48VDC output, are regulated.
Voltage and current level monitoring circuitry check each output of the PS19 DC-D
(including message and ring generator currents), and produce an alarm signal to the
Coral system main processor in the event of malfunction.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output (with the exception of the
–48VDC output) is within specification. If any voltage deviates from specification, the
monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal to the Coral system processor, causing

the red Alarm indicator to light. Note that the green Power indicator of a PS19 DC-D
remains lit at the same time as the red Alarm indicator.
If the voltage input drops below 36.5±1VDC the unit shuts down and returns to power
only when the voltage raises above 38.5±1VDC again. Additionally, if the voltage is
greater than 62±0.5VDC, then the unit shuts down until the input voltage drops below
58±0.5VDC.
7
Power Supplies 7-23

Block Diagram
On/Off
25A/125V S.B.
Rear Panel Power Input Feedback
Fuse Fuse
S.B. 30A/125V
F1
-VIN -48VDC/12A
Passive Inrush Current
Filter Current Common
VRTN Limit 48V RTN
NOTE:
-48VDC or approx.
Input: 1.5V to 2.0V lower
-40 to -60VDC than -VIN (input voltage)
-48VDC nom.
+5V/20A
-5V/0.25A
DC
+12V/5A
-12V/0.25A
Messaging -120V/0.6A
Rear Circuit Messaging
Backplane DC Ringing 85VAC/20VA
Ringer
Circuit
3 2 1
J3
Common
20Hz 25Hz
Frequency Selection
Monitoring
Alarm
Control PS Indicator Out
Circuit PS Indicator In
Power On/Off Alarm

Indicator Indicator
(Green) (Red)
7

The PS19 DC-D can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper J3 located on the left side card panel, see Figure 7-5. This jumper is configured
by the manufacturer according to local requirements. However, it can be configured at
the field. The procedure is as follows:
Removing the power supply.
8. Configure jumper J3 as described below for the following frequencies:
Frequency J3 shorting plug

over pins
20Hz 2 and 3
25Hz 1 and 2

9. Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-26, Installing the PS19 DC-D.
Power Supplies 7-25

4 Installation
The PS19 DC-D is installed in the extreme left slot of the peripheral card cage.
The system may be configured for power redundancy with two PS19 DC-D units (one
in each cage) supporting two adjacent cages.
The Hot Standby system is designed to allow hot insertion and hot swaps of a
PS19 DC-D unit, such that, if one of the PS19 DC-D units malfunctions, system
operation is not interrupted because the second unit alone can continue powering
either cage.
Installing the PS19 DC-D

1. Verify that the PS19 DC-D power switch is turned OFF.
top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER SUPPLY
label on the bottom of the cage slot.
3. Slide the PS19 DC-D power supply gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the
card cage. A slight resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at
the rear of the power supply and backplane.

Do not force the unit into the slot. Irreparable damage may occur if the multi-pin
connectors mis-align while attempting to insert the unit. If more than slight
resistance is encountered, partially slide the unit out of the card cage and verify
the alignment of the guide ridges with the unit edge guides. If alignment appears
to be correct, remove the unit from the slot and inspect the multi-pin connectors
for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.
4. Secure the power supply to the card cage by fastening the two captive screws,
located at the top and bottom of the unit to the cage.
5. Turn the power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is lit while
the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
7

Turn ON the PS19 DC-D units in the expansion cages only after powering the Main
Cage (IPx 800M) and verifying that the Main Cage has initialized properly and the alarm
may not initialize.
Removing the power supply

1. Locate a desk or table top that can support 50 lb (23kg). If the surface can be
2. Place an anti-static sheet (the card’s plastic shipping bag will suffice) over a desk
or a table top.
3. Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the power supply unit from the cage when switched ON. Sudden power
surges could damage system components. Before extracting the power supply card,
verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
4. Unfasten the two captive screws on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D.
5. Carefully remove the PS19 DC-D from its slot.

6. Place the PS19 DC-D over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
cabinets.
7
Power Supplies 7-27

Connecting the Power Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages
An H719 DC-D connection cable enables the PS19 DC-D to supply power to two
adjacent cages with or without redundancy. The H719 DC-D cable must be ordered
separately by the customer.
The following two configurations are possible when the connection cable is used:
Configuration Description
Economical One PS19 DC-D can supply power to two adjacent cages
by connecting an H719 DC-D cable from the backplane
of the one cage to the POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION connector on the adjacent cage. See
Figure 7-7.
Redundant One PS19 DC-D can be installed on each of two adjacent

cages to provide power supply redundancy. An H719
DC-D cable is connected between both cages, in the
same manner as above. In this type of configuration, if
one of the power supplies fail, the other unit supplies
power to both cages and no calls are lost. This
configuration is depicted in Figure 7-8.
panel) for PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system.
This connector is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply. Do not use this
connector when the PS19 DC or PS19 AC power supplies are installed.
Tip:
Using H719 cable requires 30A/125V slow blow fuse on the cage rear panel.
In old versions of the Coral IPx systems replace the 15A/125V S.B. fuse with
a 30A/125V S.B. fuse.
7

Economical Mode
Cabling POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
located on rear backplane
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
One PS19 DC-D Unit

POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
7
Power Supplies 7-29

Redundancy Cabling
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
Two PS19 DC-D Units

ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
POWER SUPPLY
DUPLICATION
Connector
7

Double Power (No Cable)
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D
CAT.NO. 72440953100
H719 DC-D
Cable
NOT
CONNECTED
Two PS19 DC-D Units
ON
OFF
PS 19
DC-D

CAT.NO. 72440953100
Power Supplies 7-31


The maximum number of SLTs which can be fed ring generators simultaneously from
each PS19 DC-D is 33. By default, however, its value in the Coral database is set to
20. This default value can be altered via the Coral PI database’s System Features
(Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the system-wide MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for further
details.
Defining Ringer Shelf Number (Route: RPS)

The ringer power supply (RINGER PS) definition in the PI database of the RPS branch
must be defined to reflect the actual power supply hardware setup per cage. The
(RINGER PS) default definitions are set up for Double Power configurations. For the
Economical and Redundant Power configurations, the RINGER PS definition per
cage must be updated to reflect the actual system setup - especially when increasing
MAX_RING.
When a PS19 DC-D supplies power to SLT ringers located on two adjacent cages
(Redundant or Economical configurations), the two adjacent cages must share the
same RINGER PS definition, via the Coral database (Route: RPS).
See Chapter 6 — Ringers, of the Coral Program Interface & Database Reference
Manual for details on the parameter definitions.
7

6 Troubleshooting (PS19 DC-D)
However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down
a regulator because of a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 DC-D lights when any of the
output voltages are outside of specification. This may be caused by internal or external
faults. The technician must isolate the problem and replace the faulty unit when
necessary, see below.

cage.
For Redundant Peripheral Power Supply Units
(i.e. one PS19 DC-D installed on each of two adjacent shelves and connected via a
cable on the backplane, see Figure 7-8):

If one of the units is faulty, while the second unit is functioning properly, then
the “red (ALARM) lit” unit is at fault and should be replaced.
If both units have the red ALARM indicator lit, then both shelves are not
functioning properly and the problem must be isolated to either both the units
or one of the peripheral shelf cards.
Alternatively, the PS19 DC-D unit may not light any Power or Alarm indicator and
shut down. Following the shutdown of a P19 DC-D unit, the F1 fuse within the
PS19 DC-D or the fuse on the rear panel cage should be replaced. If this does not
restore the unit, then the unit should be replaced.
7
Power Supplies 7-33

1. DC power supply interruption. (Range: -40 to -60 VDC)
3. Blown fuse in the cage rear panel.
4. Blown fuse, F1, within the PS19 DC-D.
(Replace fuse as described in page 7-34, PS19 DC-D Fuses.)
5. Faulty PS19 DC-D.
(Insert a different PS19 DC-D unit as described in page 7-26, Installation.)
PS19 DC-D Fuses

The PS19 DC-D employs one fuse, F1, to protect the DC mains input.
If the F1 fuse blows, the PS19 DC-D Power green indicator and Alarm red
indicator do not illuminate.
If the cage rear panel fuse blows, the PS19 DC Power green indicator and
Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
To replace the fuse within the PS19 DC-D

Removing the power supply.
Do not insert or remove the PS19 DC-D unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
2. Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

The PS19 DC-D card layout is shown in page 7-21, PS19 DC-D Card Layout.
3. Reinstall the power supply unit as described in page 7-26, Installing the PS19 DC-D.
7

Determining the Cause of the Alarm Indicator
The red Alarm indicator can be activated by malfunctions in the PS19 DC-D or one
of the peripheral shelf cards. The Troubleshooting procedures for a lit Alarm indicator
are described below, depending on the PS19 DC-D usage: Redundant, Double Power
or Economical.
Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration

For a single PS19 DC-D supplying power only to its own cage the peripheral
cards must be individually examined.
4. Switch ON the PS19 DC-D and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the PS19 DC-D is malfunctioning or the
problem is caused by the backplane. Replace the PS19 DC-D unit.
If the Power indicator lights but the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by one of the cards.
Cage Control Cards

IPx 800X PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 DC-D
power switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards), re-insert the control card.
Then turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON, and check the red Alarm indicator.
OFF the PS19 DC-D power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 DC-D
the red Alarm indicator is lit on, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF, insert the common control cards
(MEX-IP2, HDC, or PX). Then turn the PS19 DC-D power switch ON and check
the red Alarm indicator once again. If the red Alarm indicator is off, the problem
is caused by one of the cards that was removed.
7
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one by one, beginning from the right
Power Supplies 7-35

the backplane and that they initialize properly.
If the Alarm indicator lights when one of the cards is inserted, then that card is
faulty.
Redundant PS19 DC-D Configuration

1. In the relevant cages turn the PS19 DC-D power switch OFF (turn the switch
downwards).
2. Remove the H719 DC-D connector cable from the backplane to isolate the power
supplies.
3. In the relevant cages switch ON the PS19 DC-D and check the red Alarm
indicators.
4. Continue checking each cage separately in the manner described above. See page
7-35, Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
Economical PS19 DC-D Configuration

For a single PS19 DC-D supplying power to two cages:
2. Remove the H719 DC-D connector cable from the backplane to isolate the cage
causing the Alarm.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, continue checking each cage separately in the
manner described above. See page 7-35, Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by the adjacent cage with
no power supply or by the H719 cable.

5. Remove the PS19 DC-D and install it on the adjacent cage (See page 7-26,
Installation).
If the Alarm indicator is lit, continue checking the cage with the power supply,
in the manner described above for the Double Power Case, skip to page 7-35,
Double Power PS19 DC-D Configuration.
functioning properly and the alarm is being caused by the H719 cable.
8. Replace the H719 cable.
7

7 Specifications
PS19 DC-D (DC Power Supply-Duplication)
Coral systems:............................................. IPx 800, 3000, 4000 (requires 30A/125V

fuse on the cage rear panel)
Input:........................................................... -40VDC to -60VDC, 25A max.

Power Consumption: ........................................ Continues 575W per cage
DC Outputs: ................................................+5VDC nom. regulated 20A max.

–5VDC nom. regulated 0.25A max.
+12VDC nom. regulated 5A max.
–48VDC unregulated (or approx.
1.5V to 2.0V lower than input voltage)
12.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs):........................–120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Outputs (for SLTs): .........................

Voltage: ...................................85VRMS
Frequency................................20Hz or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ..................................20VA Max.
Alarm: .........................................................Signaling malfunction

Indicators: ...................................................Power ON/OFF (green)

ALARM (red)
Fuses: ..........................................................
Input (-48VDC).......................25A/125V S.B.
Output .....................................None
Controls and Adjustments: .........................ON/OFF power switch

Weight: ................................................................ 3.0 kg
The PS19 DC-D is not for use with 4, 8,16SH/S cards. Using these cards with the
PS19DC-D may cause a failure in the start-up or restart of the Power Supply unit. 
The 4, 8,16SH/S cards were discontinued and were primarily used in Coral FlexiCom
7
cabinets.
Power Supplies 7-37

7 PS19 DC-D Power Supply Unit with Duplication
7-38
NOTES:
PS19 AC
7.3 Power Supply Unit
The AC power supply (PS19 AC) provides internal operating voltages for the
Coral IPx 800 and 3000 cages.
The PS19 AC operates from a nominal input of 100-240VAC/47-63Hz.
PS19 AC Front Panel

Figure 7-10 displays the front panel of the PS19 AC. The following items are located on
the front panel and are described in the following table:
Feature Description
Alarm (red) Lights when there is any failure within the PS19 AC
Indicator
Power (green) Lights when the power switch is turned on

Indicator
ON/OFF Turns the unit On or Off.

Power Switch CAUTION
Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage PS19 AC Power Supply Unit
when turned ON. Sudden power surges could damage
system components. Before inserting or extracting the
PS19 AC unit, verify that the power switch is turned
OFF.
Handle Used to pull the unit out of the card cage
Top and bottom Used to release the unit from the cage backplane
Ejectors
7
Power Supplies 7-39

Feature Description
Top and bottom Used to secure the unit to the cage. These screws also
Captive Screws ground the unit to the cage and safeguard the unit
against malfunction.
Figure 7-10 PS19 AC

Front Panel Top
Top Ejector
Captive Screw
ALARM Alarm
(Red) Indicator
POWER Power
(Green) Indicator
ON
Power Switch
OFF
PS19 AC
Cat. No. 72440952900
INPUT:
100-240VAC 47-63Hz
CURRENT RATING:
6A/115VAC/60Hz
3A/230VAC/50Hz
OUTPUT: +5VDC 13.0A

+12VDC 3.0A
-5VDC 0.15A
-12VDC 0.15A
-48VDC 7.0A
-120VDC 0.4A
85VRMS 20/25Hz 12VA
Handle
PS19 AC Power Supply Unit
Bottom
7

Ejector

PS19 AC Card Layout
The PS19 AC card layout is shown in Figure 7-11. Two components are described in the
following table:
Feature Description
J2 Configured as per customer specification, providing 20

Ring Frequency Hz (North American systems) or 25 Hz depending on the
Selection J2 configuration. See page 7-45, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
Jumper
F5 10A/250V, slow blow, protects the AC input voltage.

Main Fuse See page 7-50, PS19 AC Fuse.

7
Power Supplies 7-41

Figure 7-11 PS19 AC
Circuit Board
On
Off
J2:
Ring Frequency
Selection
3 2 1
25Hz
3 2 1
FAN 1 FAN 2
20Hz
J2
F5:
AC Input Fuse
10A/250V S.B.
F5
AC Connector
CAUTION: For continued protection against risk of fire,

replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
7

0
Figure 7-12 displays a block diagram of the PS19 AC power supply.
The PS19 AC includes one AC-DC converter and one switch-mode DC-DC converter
that convert 98-126VAC and 198-253VAC (47-63Hz) input power to:
DC outputs
Message and Ring outputs
DC Output Power
-48VDC
+5VDC
–5VDC
+12VDC
–12VDC

The -120VDC and 85VRMS voltages are provided for ringers to drive the ringers and
–120VDC for SLT message waiting lamps
Ring Generator
The ring generator is capable of generating ringing up to 20 ports simultaneously at
20Hz or at 25Hz. The ringing frequency is configured by setting jumper J2 on the
PS19 AC circuit board. See page 7-45, Ringer Frequency Adjustment.
station ports. The ring generator provides high voltage (85VRMS) ring generator PS19 AC Power Supply Unit
8SM cards.
Messaging
cards.
NOTE: ฀For฀8SA and 24SA cards the message and ringer generators฀are฀provided by the
7
8/24SA card.
Power Supplies 7-43

The PS19 AC also limits the –48VDC output to feed the peripheral card slots.
All outputs, with the exception of the –48 VDC output, are regulated.
Voltage and current level monitoring circuitry checks each output of the PS19 AC
(including message and ring generator currents), and produces an alarm signal to the
Coral system main processor in the event of malfunction.
Monitoring circuitry verifies that each voltage output is within specification. If any
voltage deviates from specification, the monitoring circuitry produces an alarm signal
to the Coral system processor, causing the red alarm indicator to illuminate. Note that
the green power indicator of a PS19 AC remains illuminated at the same time as the
red alarm indicator.
Figure 7-12 PS19 AC Feedback

Block Diagram
AC Input Fuse
10A/250V S.B.
L F5
AC -48VDC/7A
E Current
DC Limit Common
N 48V RTN
100-240VAC
47-63Hz
+5V/13A
-5V/0.15A
DC +12V/3A
-12V/0.15A
Messaging -120V/0.4A Messaging
Circuit
DC Ringing 85VAC/12VA
Circuit Ringer
3 2 1
J2
Common
20/25 Hz
Frequency Selection
Monitoring
On/Off Control
Circuit Alarm
Switch
Power On Alarm
Indicator Indicator
(Green) (Red)
7

0

The PS19 AC can supply either 20Hz or 25Hz ringing frequency by configuring
Jumper J2 located on the bottom left component side card panel. See Figure 7-11. This
jumper is configured by the manufacturer according to local requirements. However, it
can be configured in the field. The procedure is as follows:
Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
2. Configure jumper J2 for the following frequencies:
Frequency J2 shorting plug

over pins
20 Hz 2 and 3
25 Hz 1 and 2
3. Reinstall the power supply unit as described on page 7-46, Installing the Power
Supply.
7
Power Supplies 7-45

0
4 Installation
The PS19 AC power supply is inserted into the Coral IPx cage in the extreme left slot.
Before installing the power supply, verify that the ring frequency configuration jumper
is set to the correct frequency (20Hz or 25Hz). See the table on page 7-45, Ringer
Frequency Adjustment.
Installing the Power Supply

is not in use.
panel) for PS19 AC power supplies will result in damage to the system. This connector
is only used with the PS19 DC-D power supply, see page 7-28, Connecting the Power
Supply Duplication Cable between Two Cages. Do not use this connector when the
PS19 AC power supply is installed.
2. Verify that the PS19 AC power switch is turned OFF.
Inserting the PS19 AC power supply card into the cage when the power switch is ON
could result in a sudden surge voltage that could damage the Coral IPx system. Before
inserting the PS19 AC card, verify that the power switch is turned OFF.
the top and bottom) into the card edge guides corresponding to the POWER
SUPPLY label on the bottom of the cage slot.

4. Slide the power supply gently but firmly, until fully inserted into the card cage. A
slight resistance should be felt as the multi-pin connectors engage at the rear of
the power supply and backplane.
Do not force the unit into the slot. Irreparable damage may occur if the multi-pin
connectors misalign while you attempt to insert the unit. If more than slight
resistance is encountered, partially slide the unit out of the card cage and verify
the alignment of the guide ridges with the unit edge guides. If alignment appears
to be correct, remove the unit from the slot and inspect the multi-pin connectors
7
for bent pins and debris in the pin holes.

5. Secure the PS19 AC to the card cage by fastening the two captive screws, located
at the top and bottom of the PS19 AC to the cage. See Figure 7-10.
6. Turn the power switch ON, and verify that the green Power indicator is lit, while
the red Alarm indicator is not lit.
Turn ON the PS19 AC units in the expansion cages only after powering the Main Cage
(IPx 800M) and verifying that the Main Cage has initialized properly and the alarm
may not initialize.
Removing the Power Supply

1. Locate a desk or table top that can support 50 lb (23kg). If the surface can be
2. Place an anti-static sheet over a desk or a table top (the card’s plastic shipping bag
will suffice).
3. Turn the PS19 AC power supply switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
Do not remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden power surges
could damage system components. Before extracting the PS19 AC card, verify that the
power switch is turned OFF.
4. Unfasten the two captive screws on the front panel of the PS19 AC. See Figure
7-10.
5. Carefully remove the PS19 AC from its slot.
6. Place the PS19 AC over the anti-static material with the component side facing
upwards.
7
Power Supplies 7-47

0

.

The maximum number of SLTs that can be fed ringing simultaneously from each
PS19 AC is 20, by default. This value can be altered via the Coral database’s System
Features (Route: SFE,2) branch, by changing the MAX_RING parameter value.
See Chapter 6 of the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual for details.
7

6 Troubleshooting (PS19 AC)
However, protection circuitry in the power supply regulator circuitry may shut down a
regulator due to a current overload caused by an external fault.
The red Alarm indicator on the front panel of the PS19 AC lights when any of the
output voltages are outside of specification.

cage.

1. AC power supply interruption.
115VAC/60Hz (Range: 98-126VAC, 47-63Hz)
230VAC/50Hz (Range: 198-253VAC, 47-63Hz)
3. Blown fuse F5 within the PS19 AC
(Replace fuse as described on page 7-50, PS19 AC Fuse.)
4. Faulty PS19 AC PS19 AC Power Supply Unit
(Insert a different PS19 AC unit as described on page 7-46, Installation.)
7
Power Supplies 7-49

PS19 AC Fuse
The PS19 AC includes one fuse, F5, to protect the AC mains input. If the fuse blows,
the PS19 AC Power green indicator and Alarm red indicator do not illuminate.
Replacing a Fuse within the PS19 AC

Do not insert or remove the PS19 AC unit from the cage when turned ON. Sudden
2. Replace only with the same type and rating of fuse (10A/250V S.B.).
See the PS19 AC card layout shown in Figure 7-11.
3. Reinstall the power supply unit as described on page 7-46, Installing the Power
Supply.
7

Determining the Cause of the Red Alarm Indicator
1. Turn the PS19 AC power switch OFF (turn the switch downwards).
4. Turn ON the PS19 AC and check the red Alarm indicator.
If the Alarm indicator is lit, either the
PS19 AC is malfunctioning (replace as described in page 7-46, Installation.)
or the problem is caused by the backplane (contact the manufacturer).
If the Alarm indicator is not lit, the unit is functioning properly and the alarm
is being caused by one of the cards.
Cage Control Cards
IPx 800X PX
To determine which control card is causing the problem, turn the PS19 AC power
switch OFF again (turn the switch downwards) and re-insert the control card.
Then turn the PS19 AC power switch ON and check the red Alarm indicator.
OFF the PS19 AC power switch before inserting each card. Turn the PS19 AC
the red Alarm indicator is lit on, the last card inserted is causing the problem and
should be replaced.
Turn the PS19 AC power switch OFF, insert the common control cards (MEX-IP2,
HDC or PX). Then turn the PS19 AC power switch ON and check the red Alarm
indicator once again. If the red Alarm indicator lit off, the problem is caused by
one of the cards that was removed.
insert the cards into their appropriate slots, one at a time, beginning from the right
the backplane and that they initialize properly. If the Alarm indicator lights when
one of the cards is inserted, then that card is faulty.
7
Power Supplies 7-51

0
7 Specifications
PS19 AC (AC Power Supply)
Coral systems: ...................................... IPx 800, 3000
Input:...................................................... 100-240VAC 47-63Hz
Power Rating: ....................................... 115VAC / 60Hz / 6A (Range: 98 to 126VAC)

230VAC / 50Hz / 3A (Range: 198 to 253VAC)
Power Consumption: .......................... Continues 575W
DC Outputs:.......................................... –48VDC regulated 7.0A max.

+5VDC nom. regulated 13.0A max.
+12VDC nom. regulated 3.0A max.
Message Output (for SLTs): ................ –120VDC, 0.4A max.
Ringer Output (for SLTs):

Voltage.........................................85VRMS
Frequency ...................................20 or 25Hz (jumper selectable)
Capacity ......................................12VA Max.
Alarm: .................................................... Signaling malfunction

Indicators: ............................................. Power ON/OFF (green)

ALARM (red)
Fuses:
Input ............................................F5: 10A/250V S.B.
Output .........................................None
Controls and Adjustments: ON/OFF power switch
Weight:................................................... 2.6 kg
7

Chapter 8
Common Control Cards
8.1 Common Control Cards.......................................8-1

Coral
8.2 MEX-IP2 ..............................................................8-5
8.3 DBM ....................................................................8-7
8.4 DBX .....................................................................8-9
8.5 IMC8/16 Integrated Flash Memory Cards ......... 8-11
8.6 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) ....................8-13
Cor
8.7 MAP...................................................................8-15
8.8 LIU .....................................................................8-17
8.9 HDC Card ..........................................................8-19
8.10 PX Card ...........................................................8-27

8.1
0
1 General Information
Each control card is described in detail in the

Coral Control Card Installation Manual.
The Common Control portion of the Coral IPx 800 systems provides the control
mechanism for establishing audio and data connections or calls between Peripheral
I/O ports in the system via the PCM bus. Common Control is divided into the
following functions:
Main processor
Generic feature memory
Database memory (DBM/DBX)
Flash memory card (IMC8/16)
Peripheral bus interface or group controller
The Common Control card set consists of an MEX-IP2 Main Processor and Database
Memory, one IMC8/16 generic feature memory baby card, an optional DBM/DBX
database memory expansion card with an optional MAP/CLA card, an HDC (High
Density Group Controller), and a PX card.
The MEX-IP2 and HDC cards reside in designated card slots in the IPx 800M cage. The
MAP/CLA and DBM/DBX cards are smaller baby cards that are mounted on the
MEX-IP2 card. The IMC8/16 card resides in a special slot in front of the MEX-IP2 card.
The card slot designation appears below each common control card slot on the front of
the card cage. For more information, see Chapter 6 - Cage Description.
The MEX-IP2 card is the “core” of the Coral common control. The card contains the
main processor circuitry, memory management circuitry, local bus interface and
database memory (protected against power loss with a long-life lithium standby
battery). It also provides a real-time clock and hosts the System Authorization Unit
(SAU). Additionally, the MEX-IP2 acts as a mother card to one MAP/CLA card, up to
two DBM cards, or up to four DBX cards. The main processor receives status messages
8
from ports in the system and determines the appropriate response based on
programming entries contained in the system database.
Common Control Cards 8-1

The IMC8/16 card provides memory space for the generic feature software of the
Coral IPx 800 systems. The generic feature software determines the operation of
telephony functions of the system. The IMC8/16 uses flash memory technology to
provide high-reliability, non-volatile storage for the generic software and system
database, combined with the capability of field software upgrade.
The DBM/DBX is an optional card that expands the database memory space, which
stores the system's configuration. The DBM/DBX is generally not required. It is likely
to be required in special applications (see page 8-7, DBM, page 8-9, DBX) or when the
CoraLINK with MAP/CLA card is implemented.
The optional MAP card is used for FlexCT CTI (Computer Telephone Interface)
applications, Coral Telephony Gateway interface, and other applications. The MAP
card incorporates the application processor and Ethernet 10Base-T interface circuitry
for the CoraLINK computer-telephony integration (CTI) link. CoraLINK uses TCP/IP
protocol and complies with ECMA 179, ECMA 180, and ECMA 269 phase 3 standards
(CSTA III). CoraLINK also supports the Novell TSAPI protocol, the Intel Dialogic
CT-connect, and IBM Callpath.
The MAP attaches to an expansion connector on the MCP-IPx2 card in piggyback
fashion. The 10Base-T Ethernet interface appears at a RJ-45 connector on the front
panel of the MAP card.
Refer to the Control Card Installation Manual for detailed information on each common
control card.
8

0
2 Card Handling Procedures
All circuit cards, including common control cards, backplane cards, and peripheral
cards, contain static-sensitive circuitry and may be damaged or destroyed by
electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always wear the static dissipating wrist strap connected
to the cage while handling circuit cards. Hold circuit cards by their edges and avoid
touching contact surfaces. Handle with care and do not drop.
Never place a common control card in a slot other than the one designated for that
card.
Never insert a common control card with power applied. Irreparable damage may occur
if a common control card is placed in an incorrect slot with power applied.
Inserting a Coral Circuit Card

The system cabinet is equipped with an anti-static wrist strap at the top, above the
card cage. This wrist strap should be worn while inserting, removing, or handling any
card in the system. Each card is shipped inside an anti-static plastic bag. Cards should
be kept in this bag whenever handling is not required.
To insert a circuit card into a card slot, grasp the card with both hands, fingers on the
edge of the card near the front panel, and thumbs against the extractor levers at the
top and bottom of the front panel. Verify that the card is oriented correctly (red
diagnostic indicator on front panel toward top of card). Align the edges of the circuit
card with the card edge guides in the card cage or shelf, and gently slide the card
straight into the card slot. A slight resistance will be felt as the multi-pin connectors on
the circuit card meet mating connectors on the backplane and engage. Push against the
extractor levers until the front panel of the card is flush with the front frame of the
card cage. Do not force the circuit card into the slot. If more than slight resistance is
encountered, remove the circuit card and examine the connectors for bent pins or
interfering debris.
8

NOTES:
8

MEX-IP2
8.2
0
The MEX-IP2 card is the Main Control Processor card, for IPx 800systems. See Figure
3-3 on page 3-12. The MEX-IP2 card provides RS-232E programming and maintenance
interface, Software Authorization Unit (SAU) and IMC8/16 interface. The MEX-IP2
contains a multi-pin connector and support circuitry for the addition of LIU,
MAP/CLA and DBM/DBX baby cards. It integrates the main processor, memory
management circuitry, local bus interface, real-time clock, generic feature software
memory, and database memory.
The MEX-IP2 supervises overall system operation by executing system-wide
processes. These processes include port connection management, feature
management, generic feature software installation, feature authorization,
configuration database management, database backup and restoration, program
interface input/output and diagnostic testing.
Do not insert or remove the MEX-IP2 card when power is on!
Before installing the MEX-IP2 card, verify that the battery insulator between the top
contact of the battery and the battery holder has been removed on the MEX-IP2
battery.
MEX-IP2
8

Before removing the MEX-IP2 card from the Coral system, do the following:
1.Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.
2.Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card
numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed from
the system when “P” is illuminated.
3.Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if the MEX-IP2
card is removed when the system is powered.
For further details, see Chapter 2 of the Control Card Installation Manual.
MEX-IP2
8

DBM
8.3
3
The DBM (Database Module) memory expansion card is a component of the Coral
common control section that expands the database memory space used for storing the
system configuration. The DBM card requires Coral Software version 15 or higher or
any Coral Wave Gateway version. See Figure 3-4 on page 3-13.
The DBM card includes either 2MB, 4MB, or 8MB of Static Random Access Memory
(SRAM), used to store the configuration database of a Coral system. The
configuration database determines the individual characteristics of a particular
installation site. Up to two DBM cards can be mounted onto a main control processor
MEX-IP2 card.
The DBM memory is protected by the lithium energy cell, located on the MEX-IP2
card, which continues to supply power to the SRAM when power to the Coral system
is removed. When the battery voltage is low, the diagnostic software displays a
warning message.
The DBM does not occupy a card slot within the Coral system unit. Rather, it is
installed as a baby card onto memory interface connector on the MEX-IP2 card. The
DBM card is equipped with an extension connector on the top side that extends the
memory interface connector from the main control processor card, allowing for
another DBM or MAP card to be connected on top of it.
Most Coral systems do not require a DBM at all. Special applications may require a
single DBM, and rarely would any system configuration require more than one DBM
card.
Once the system database has been installed, the DBM is powered by a backup battery
DBM
positioned on the main control processor MEX-IP2 card. Removing the DBM cards
(“upper” and/or “lower”) from the main control processor card will cause data on the
8
DBM card to be lost. Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.

contact of the battery and the battery holder has been removed on the MEX-IP2
battery.
3
2 When a DBM Card is Required

To use the Coral Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features
Refer to the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-4 Size Definition, Route:
SIZ, CHECK MEMORY) to display the database memory status.
DBM
8

DBX
8.4
3
The DBX card is an expansion card of memory. See Figure 3-5 on page 3-14. It adds an
additional 1 MB SRAM to the Coral main control. The card is equipped with an
extension connector on its top side allowing for another DBX or MAP/CLA card to be
connected on top of it.
The MEX-IP2 supports up to two DBX cards.
The DBX cards use a lithium battery to operate. When the battery voltage is low, the
diagnostic software displays a warning message, stating that the battery of either the
upper or the lower memory card needs to be replaced. The DBX connected directly to
the MEX-IP2 is the “lower” memory card, while the DBX connected on top of the first
one is referred to as the “upper” memory card. Up to four DBX cards can be mounted
onto a main control processor MEX-IP2 card.
Once the system database has been installed, the position of DBX cards
(“upper” and/or “lower”) on the MEX-IP2 card must not be changed.
Doing so will cause the Coral system to malfunction.
contact of the battery and the battery holder has been removed on both the MEX-IP2
battery and the battery of any DBX baby card installed on the MEX-IP2 card.
DBX
8

3
2 When a DBX Card is Required

To use the Coral Directory, Traffic, or Call Log features
Refer to the Program Interface Reference Manual (Chapter-4 Size Definition, Route:
SIZ, CHECK MEMORY) to display the database memory status.
DBX
8

IMC8/16 Integrated Flash Memory Cards
8.5
3
The Coral system is delivered to the site with factory-loaded software on IMC card.
The IMC card contains three types of data:
Generic Feature Software Version and Boot Code
Authorization
Database Backup
The IMC8 and IMC16 flash memory cards are used by the main control card during
run-time. The memory management on the MEX-IP2 allows part of the code to use
portions of the IMC8/16 memory for run-time. Therefore, the IMC8/16 card must not
be removed from its drive during system operation. If removed, the system will crash.
Do not Remove the IMC8/16 card form its drive during system operation! Removing the
IMC8/16 while the system is ON AIR will cause the system to shut down.
The MEX-IP2 numeric status display indicates various operating and error states of

the Coral system, and can provide valuable information to assist in the maintenance of
the system. A “P” appears during software installation or backup, to indicate data
programming to the flash memory of the IMC8/16 card.
Before removing a memory card from the Coral system, do the following:
1. Perform the Database Binary Backup procedure.
2. Verify that the database is not being backed up: check that the main control card
numeric status display does not read “P”. Data will be lost if power is removed
from the system when “P” is illuminated.
8
3. Turn the Coral power supply OFF. The flash card could be damaged if removed
when the system is powered.

3
2 When an IMC16 Card is Required

An IMC16 card is required when the database exceeds 1.5MB and can be used with
Coral software version 15 or higher.
8

Software Authorization Unit (SAU)
8.6
3
The MEX-IP2 supervises the feature authorization using the SAU (Software
Authorization Unit) lock device. The SAU is a small, encapsulated device which is
plugged into a component side connector on the MEX-IP2.
The SAU enables a set of permissions and feature authorizations associated with its
unique identification number. The Coral software detects and verifies the permission
settings of the SAU on the Control card (MEX-IP2) enabling the system to function
properly.
The Coral system automatically ceases call processing after 14 days for any of the
following reasons:
The SAU serial number does not match the corresponding IMC8/16 SAU serial number.
The Coral generic version contained in the IMC8/16 is higher than is authorized by the
SAU.
An SAU is removed from the MEX-IP2.
Relevant system messages appear on the PI, warning that the system will not operate
without the proper SAU.

Replacing an MEX-IP2 card necessitates removing the SAU from the old card and
installing it on the replaced MEX-IP2 card.
When starting up the Coral system, ensure that there are no SAU Fault
messages during start-up or SAU Alarms (PI Branch: Root, 1, 1,
15-Controls) due to any one of the following three reasons:
-- a missing SAU device
-- inappropriate SAU software for this type of system
-- mismatched SAU serial numbers on the IMC8/16 and SAU device
8

NOTES:
8

MAP
8.7
3
Management Applications Platform (MAP). The MAP is installed on the MEX-IP2 card
in the IPx 800systems. See Figure 3-4 on page 3-13.
The optional MAP card attaches to an expansion connector on the MEX-IP2 Main
Controller card in piggyback fashion. The 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface appears at a
RJ-45 connector on the front panel of the card.
The MAP card includes the following applications:

With Coral Version 15 or lower provides:
CLA (CoraLINK Adapter) for COMPOSIT and FlexCT CTI (Computer Telephone
Interface) applications.
With Coral Version 15.5 or higher provides:
CLA and direct IP access to a variety of system management applications (such as:
Wakeup, PI, CVD, Traffic, CFM, Charge, SMDR, MCT, etc.)
The MAP card does not support Initialization messages, GP messages

and other online Alarm messages, when used to communicate with the PI
(Program Interface) over IP.
For further information, see Chapter 6 of the Control Card Installation Manual.
MAP
8

NOTES:
MAP
8

LIU
8.8
3
LIU (LAN Interface Unit) card. Installed on MEX-IP2 card. Provides PI (Program
Interface) connection over IP.
When the MAP card is installed, the LIU is not needed.
The LIU card enables the MEX-IP2 main control processor card to communicate with
the PI (Program Interface) over IP. Without this card, communication via the RJ-45
connector on the MEX-IP2 cannot take place, and all interaction with the PI must
occur via the KB0 RS-232 port unless a MAP card is installed. When a MAP card is
installed, communication via the RJ-45 connector on the MAP can take place and the
LIU card is redundant.
The LIU card translates the RS-232 protocol used by the KB0 to the IP protocol.
In order for the LIU to function, it is necessary to move DIP switch #1 on the front
panel of the MEX-IP2 cards to the left.
For further information, see Chapter 7 of the Control Card Installation Manual.
LIU
8

NOTES:
LIU
8

HDC Card
8.9 High Density Control
Do not insert or remove the HDC card when power is on. Removing the HDC card from
the system while the power is on will cause the system to crash. Inserting the HDC card
while the power is on will prevent the peripheral cards from initializing properly.
The HDC (High Density Control circuit) card for Coral IPx 800 systems serves as a
communication link between the MEX-IP2 and peripheral cards. It contains:
Digital tone generators (dial, busy, ringing, ringback, DTMF, MFC, and test)
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) bus drive circuitry
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) bus drive circuitry
Clock circuitry to synchronize the Coral peripheral clock to an external clock
derived from a digital trunk interface such as the 2DT, UDT, T1, 30T, 30T/x, PRI-23,
PRI-30, 4TBR, or 8TBR card.
512 x 512 Time Slot Switch circuitry, as in the 4GC card.
Figure 8-4 on page 8-25 illustrates the HDC card layout.
HDC Card High Density Control
Figure 8-1 Coral
IPx 800, HDC and IPx 800X
2nd expansion cage
Peripheral Cards
IPx 800X
1st expansion cage PX
IPx 800M
main cage HDC MEX-IP2
Peripheral Cards
8

The HDC card (in combination with one PX card when two expansion cages IPx 800X
are installed, see Figure 8-1) is functionally similar to the 4GC/32GC card used in
larger capacity Coral systems. The HDC card supports two HDLC and eight PCM
highways (each PCM highway provides 64 time slot,) and drives the peripheral buses
directly.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the four major circuit areas of the HDC card in a block diagram.
Figure 8-2 HDC Circuit CPU

Block Diagram
Digital Tone Generation
Local
Bus
Data
Universal I/O Slots
HDLC HDLC Tx
Card Time Slot Management
RAM Software HDLC Rx
PROM 512 x 512 Timeslots
U56 PCM PCM Tx 0 - 511
PCM Rx
Clock (4.096 MHz)

Clock & Sync Generation
Sync (8 KHz)
Clk Select
External Clock Selector
Primary Secondary
Sync Sync
Clock Selection
The external clock selector monitors the two inputs for the presence of an 8.0 kHz
clock signal that can be obtained from the incoming data stream of a digital trunk
card. A primary and secondary clock source may be defined in the system database to
synchronize the PCM clock of the HDC card with the digital trunk. If there is no
external clock source, the HDC card always reverts to an internal clock.
The HDC card contains phase-lock circuitry that synchronizes the Coral PCM clock to
a signal derived from one of two digital trunk interface cards (PRI23, PRI30, 4TBR,
8TBR, 30T, 30T/x or T1), designated the primary and secondary external clock source.
This feature, called “slaved clock” or “loop-timed” operation, enables the Coral system
to integrate with any digital telephone network in the world. The HDC monitors
external clock signal integrity and switches the system between the primary and
secondary external clock sources, or internal HDC clock, as necessary.
8

Digital Tone Generator
The digital tone generator generates the audio call progress tones (dial, busy, ringback,
etc.) used to notify the caller of the status of the call. The tones are also used during
Keyset (FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST, EKT, VDK, etc.) ringing (except for mute ring which
is a function of the telephone set itself). DTMF and MFC dialing tones and test tone
patterns used by diagnostics are also generated by the 4GC/32GC. These tones are
stored in digital PCM form, in a programmable PROM. The stored tone patterns are
sent directly to the digital PCM bus when required. See page 8-23, Tone PROM, below
for more information.
Time Slot Management

Each HDLC and PCM bus operates at a fundamental data rate of 4.096 Mbps. This
data rate allows each HDLC bus sufficient bandwidth to simultaneously control up to
64 peripheral bus controller circuits located on the Shared Service and Peripheral
cards.
Every PCM highway consists of a transmit bus and a receive bus, each of which are
divided into 64 time slots. Each time slot is eight bits wide, sampled every 125
microseconds (mS), or 8,000 times per second. This rate matches both American and
European PCM voice transmission rates to facilitate complete digital integration with
the local telephone network.
The time slot manager, acting on command by the system processor, is responsible for
forwarding PCM voice samples from an incoming transmit time slot assigned to one
port to a complementary outgoing receive time slot for the recipient port. Traffic
handling capacity of the HDC card is maximized through the use of a very
sophisticated algorithm to avoid time slot usage conflict.
Using Time Slots

A call between two ports requires one transmit and one receive time slot on a single
Peripheral highway. Therefore, the HDC card is capable of establishing a call between HDC Card High Density Control
64 ports on each of the eight peripheral highways to any other 64 ports, with a
maximum of 512 simultaneously busy ports, using the eight peripheral highways.
The HDC’s 512 x 512 Time Switch interfaces with the Coral cabinet using eight Receive
and eight Transmit PCM highways. Each PCM highway carries 64 Time Slots. The total
number of Time Slots for the Coral with the HDC is 512 for Receive and 512 Transmit
PCM highways. The Coral backplane is designed to have two Receive and two
Transmit PCM highways for every four card slots. See Figure 8-3.
Number of Transmit TS - 64 on each of the eight PCM highways, making a total of 512.
Number of Receive TS - 64 on each of the eight PCM highways, making a total of 512.
8
Maximum 384 simultaneous calls per Coral IPx 800 system.

Clock and Sync Generator
The Clock signal is strobed at 4.096 MHz to identify the bit period of the HDLC and
PCM buses. The Sync signal is strobed at 8.0 KHz, appearing once every 125mS to
identify the start of time slot 0 on each of the two PCM buses.
Figure 8-3 Coral

IPx 800, PCM Highway
Distribution
IPx 800M IPx 500X / 800X IPx 500X / 800X

Coral IPx 800 Main Cage 1st Expansion Cage 2nd Expansion Cage
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HDC
Prm.Sync.
Prm.Sync.
Prm.Sync.
Sec.Sync.
Sec.Sync.
Sec.Sync.
PCM highway A3
A3
Peripheral B3
service A2
& B2
group A1
controller B1
PCM highway B1
SLOT 12
SLOT 10
384 time slots

SLOT 11
SLOT 12
SLOT 10
SLOT 11
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
SLOT 9
SLOT 8
SLOT 7
SLOT 6
SLOT 5
SLOT 4
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
64 time slots each PCM highway
Applicable in Applicable in
IPx 800X IPx 800X
8

3
3A Front Panel Indicator

Figure 8-4 displays the HDC card front panel.
The HDC card is equipped with one LED. Before closing the front door, the LED
should be extinguished.
HDC red diagnostic LED
The LED remains illuminated steadily after turning on the PS19 unit. After a few
seconds, the LED should extinguish. The extinguished diagnostic LED indicates that
the HDC software has been properly initialized.
LED continuously on for more than two or three minutes, indicates a possible problem
with the ( $ C card.
LED flashing indicates a diagnostic alarm as descrbied in Table 8-1A
Table 8-1A฀฀HDC LED

Indications LED State Indication
Steadily Off No problem - HDC card operating normally
Steadily On HDC card has not initialized. It indicates a possible problem

with the ( $ C card
HDC Card Group Controller and Peripheral Services Unit
Flashing Diagnostic test failed by circuitry on HDC card. It indicates

one of the following diagnostic alarms:
 5 - HDLC channel
 6 - PCM Highway
 7 - PCM Time slot
 22 - E911 Compatibility
For further information on these diagnostic alarms, refer to
Chapter 22 of the Program Interface and Database
Reference Manual.
8
8-23A Coral IPx 800 Installation Manual

3
3 Tone PROM
The HDC card generates the audio call progress tones used to notify the caller of the
status of the call. In addition, tones used during Keyset (FlexSet, GKT, DKT, DST, EKT,
VDK, etc.) ringing (except for mute ring which is a function of the telephone set itself)
dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) dialing tones, multi-frequency (MFC) dialing tones,
and test tone patterns used by diagnostics are also generated by the 4GC/32GC. These
tones are stored in digital PCM form, in a programmable PROM. The stored tone
patterns are output directly to the digital PCM bus when required.
Two methods of encoding audio sounds into a digital, PCM form are in common use:
The A-Law method is in common use throughout Europe, Africa, Asia, South
America, and many countries in other continents.
The µ-Law (pronounced M-YOO Law, sometimes spelled Mu-Law, or m-Law)
method is in common use in North America. Neither method has any particular
advantage over the other.
The Coral switching system may operate using either encoding method. The database
defaults are set to the µ-Law (m-Law) method for systems shipped to North America,
and A-Law for all other locations. For instructions on the database programming, see
the Program Interface and Database Reference Manual- Chapter 6 System Features (Tones,
Route: SFE, 8, M_LAW).
To operate a system using the non-default encoding method, the database must be
programmed appropriately, and the tone PROM located on the HDC card must be
changed to PROM containing the system tones stored in the appropriate encoding
method.
The encoding method is important only when the Coral system interfaces with another
switching system through a digital trunk interface card such as a T1, 30T, 30T/x, 4TBR,
8TBR, PRI-23 or PRI-30. In this case, the encoding method of both systems must match,
so that audio signals encoded by one system can be properly decoded by the other.
The integrated circuit socket U45 includes the tone PROM. See Figure 8-4. This PROM
contains DTMF and MFC dialing tones and other system tones such as dial tone, HDC Card High Density Control
ringback tone, busy tone, the Keyset ringing tones. The tone PROM present in the
HDC card IC socket varies according to the country of use. The correct tone PROM for
each country of use is supplied by the manufacturer.
8

3
4 HDC Card Installation

The HDC card is installed in the Coral IPx 800M main cage, in a reserved slot, to the
left of the MEX-IP2 card.
Do not insert or remove the HDC card when power is on.
1. Remove power from the Coral IPx 800 system by turning the PS19 power switch
OFF (downwards) in all cages.
2. Insert the HDC fully into its card slot.
8

Figure 8-4 HDC Card
Layout and Front Panel
HDC
Tones, DTMF,
U45
MFC PROM
Timeswitch
U50
PAL
U131 Arbiter
PAL
Card
U56 Software
PROM HDC layout C1

8

NOTES:
8

PX Card
8.10 Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card
The PX (Peripheral eXpansion) buffer card acts as a buffer between first and second
expansion cages of the Coral IPx 800 system. For that reason, the PX is installed in the
first expansion cage only when two expansion cages are installed in the system. The
PX card is installed in slot #1 of the first expansion cage whenever a second expansion
cage is installed.
The PX card buffers PCM streams, HDLC highway, and clock & sync signals to the
second expansion cage. If the second expansion cage malfunctions, the PX card
prevents the malfunction in the second expansion cage from affecting the first
expansion cage, and the system continues to function with the main cage and the first
expansion cage fully operational.
Figure 8-5 displays the block diagram for the PX card. PCM and HDLC signals are
received from the Coral IPx 800M main cage and transmitted via the PX buffer card to
the second expansion cage. The second expansion cage transmits PCM and HDLC
signals to the main cage via the PX card.
Figure 8-5 PX Buffer

Card Block Diagram
Highway 1
PX Card Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card

Highway 2 PCM A Rx
PCM A Rx Highway 3
Highway 4
Expansion Cage
Highway 1
To Main Cage
PCM A Tx Highway 2
PCM A Tx
Highway 3
Highway 4
To Second
HDLC A Rx HDLC A Rx
HDLC A Tx HDLC A Tx
HDLC B Rx HDLC B Rx
HDLC B Tx HDLC B Tx
Sync A Sync A
Sync B Sync B
CLOCK A CLOCK A
8
CLOCK B CLOCK B

3
2 PX Card Installation
1. Remove power from the second expansion cage of Coral IPx 800 by turning the
PS19 power switch OFF (downwards). Do not insert or remove the PX buffer card
until power has been removed from the second expansion cage.
Do not insert or remove the PX card when power in the second expansion cage is on.
Doing so will result in incomplete initialization of the peripheral cards within the second
expansion cage. Before removing or inserting the PX card remove power from the
second expansion cage.
2. Insert the PX fully into its card slot.

3. Reactivate second expansion cage by switching the power toggle switch on the
front panel of the PS19 power supply unit to ON.
PX Card Peripheral eXpansion Buffer Card
8

International Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom Ltd.
18 Hasivim Street P.O.Box 7607
Petach Tikva 49170 Israel
Tel. +972-3-9262000, Fax. +972-3-9262310
USA Headquarters
Tadiran Telecom, Inc.
265 Executive Dr., Suite 250
Plainview, NY 11803
Tel. +1-516-632-7200, Fax. +1-516-632-7210
http://www.tadirantele.com
TM
Coral IPx 800
Installation Procedure and Hardware Reference Manual
D o c u m e n t E d i t i o n 3 . 5 ( J a n - 2 0 11 )

5 - Tadiran Telecom - Compress

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5 - Tadiran Telecom - Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eliezer Katzenstein

(Document Edition 3.5)

Creating a new world of IPportunities

Information supplied by the Manufacturer is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no

Any representation(s) in this document concerning performance of the Manufacturer's

© Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2005-20.

The Coral is Protected by U.S. Patents 6,594,255; 6,598,098; 6,608,895; 6,615,404

CB SCHEME Compliance Statement

CE Compliance Statement (R & TTE)

EN 60950-1 :2006, 2nd Edition + A11 :2009

Australia and New Zealand Compliance Statement

Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

1.1 Document Description .............................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2 Special Symbols Used in this Document .................................................................................. 1-5

1.3 System Description................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4 Recommended Tools................................................................................................................ 1-9

Chapter 2 - Hardware Installation Procedure

2.1 Site Inspection .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Equipment Installation

2.3 Program Interface Device Connection...................................................................................... 2-47

3.1 Power Supply Test.................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Common Control Test............................................................................................................... 3-9

3.3 Shared Service and Peripheral Card Test ................................................................................ 3-19

3.4 Installation Wrap-up.................................................................................................................. 3-27

Chapter 4 - Software Installation Procedure

4.1 Generic Feature Software ........................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 MEX-IP2 Status Display Codes ................................................................................................ 4-3

Chapter 5 - External Connections

5.1 Main Distribution Frame ........................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 External Equipment .................................................................................................................. 5-5

5.3 Protection Devices.................................................................................................................... 5-11

5.4 Power Fail (PF) Transfer Circuits ............................................................................................. 5-17

5.5 Terminal Data Communication Ports ........................................................................................ 5-21

5.6 I/O Connections Via Front Panel .............................................................................................. 5-25

5.7 I/O RJ-45 Connections Via Rear Panel .................................................................................... 5-43

5.8 I/O Connections Via Champ Connectors.................................................................................. 5-57

Chapter 6 - Cage Description

6.1 Cage Description and Installation............................................................................................. 6-3

6.2 Coral IPx 800M Main Cage ...................................................................................................... 6-39

6.3 Coral IPx 800X Expansion Cage .............................................................................................. 6-45

6.4 System Configuration Options.................................................................................................. 6-53

Chapter 7 - Power Supplies

7.1 PS19 DC................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 PS19 DC-D............................................................................................................................... 7-17

7.3 PS19 AC................................................................................................................................... 7-39

Chapter 8 - Common Control Cards

8.1 Common Control Cards............................................................................................................ 8-1

8.2 MEX-IP2 ................................................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3 DBM.......................................................................................................................................... 8-7

8.4 DBX .......................................................................................................................................... 8-9

8.5 IMC8/16 Integrated Flash Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-11

8.6 Software Authorization Unit (SAU) ........................................................................................... 8-13

8.7 MAP.......................................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.8 LIU ............................................................................................................................................ 8-17

8.9 HDC Card ................................................................................................................................. 8-19

8.10 PX Card .................................................................................................................................. 8-27

Figure 2-1: Space Requirements............................................................................................................................. 2-4

Figure 2-2: Removing the Locking Bar .................................................................................................................... 2-12

Figure 2-6: Installing the Heat Buffer Bracket.......................................................................................................... 2-16

Figure 2-7: Coral IPx 800 Cage Ground Wiring....................................................................................................... 2-18

Figure 2-8: Master Ground Unit ............................................................................................................................... 2-19

Figure 2-11: DC Power Terminal Interconnection ................................................................................................... 2-22

Figure 2-18: PS19 Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 2-35

Figure 2-24: 25-Pin Program Interface Device Connections to KBO....................................................................... 2-48

© Copyright by TADIRAN TELECOM LTD., 2005-20.